Revit MEP 2009

Imperial Tutorial

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Creating a Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Secondary Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System . Creating the Primary System Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Primary System Equipment . . . . . . . . . Inspecting and Color Coding the System . . . . . . . . . Creating Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Electrical Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . 26 . 31 . 35 . 39 . 45 . 47 . 47 . 57 . 60 . 63 . 72

Developing Your MEP Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

v

Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 77 . 88 . 94 . 95

Chapter 4

Mechanical Systems: Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 . 101 . 108 . 112 . 136 . 141 . 148 . 153 . 156 . 160 . 162 . 168 . 185

Chapter 5

Mechanical Systems: Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 . 189 . 196 . 200 . 204 . 217 . 230 . 249 . 252 . 260 . 263

Chapter 6

Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 . 269 . 274 . 280 . 281 . 284 . 284 . 291 . 296 . 303 . 304 . 309 . 314 . 320 . 325 . 331 . 338

Chapter 7

Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 . 344 . 345 . 346

vi | Contents

Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 346 . 352 . 359 . 371 . 376 . 382 . 390 . 398

Chapter 8

Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Placing Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 . 406 . 410 . 432 . 445 . 451 . 458

Chapter 9

Creating Revit MEP Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Modifying Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Fan Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family . Modifying Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Water Closet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . Creating Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Light Fixture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flange Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol Family . . . . . . . . . . . . Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lookup Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 . 470 . 474 . 483 . 488 . 491 . 493 . 498 . 498 . 507 . 518 . 555 . 561 . 561 . 568 . 568 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 571 . 571

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 . 577 . 582 . 589 . 595 . 599 . 599 . 602 . 605 . 607 . 610 . 615 . 615

Contents | vii

Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Chapter 11

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 . 631 . 637 . 641 . 644 . 644 . 649 . 651 . 654 . 656 . 662 . 670 . 673 . 673 . 675 . 678 . 682 . 682 . 684 . 684

Chapter 12

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 . 688 . 692 . 692 . 702 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 713

Chapter 13

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 . 720 . 727 . 731 . 732 . 735 . 737 . 741 . 742 . 742 . 743 . 745

Chapter 14

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 . 761 . 767 . 767 . 769

viii | Contents

Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 769 . 773 . 779 . 779 . 781 . 783 . 784 . 790 . 791 . 791 . 792

Chapter 15

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Chapter 16 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 . 815 . 823 . 827 . 830 . 830 . 833 . 836 . 836

Chapter 17

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 . 840 . 840 . 844 . 848 . 851 . 856

Chapter 18

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 . 862 . 872 . 879

Chapter 19

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 . 894 . 903 . 906

Contents | ix

Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 908 . 911 . 911 . 913 . 916 . 918 . 919

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 Chapter 21 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 . 925 . 927 . 929 . 930 . 933 . 933 . 937 . 939 . 942 . 947 . 949 . 950 . 953 . 953 . 954 . 959 . 961 . 964 . 965 . 967

x | Contents

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix.

3

■ ■

Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. 10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2009?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

Understanding the Basics | 5

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2009 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, walls, windows, doors, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, windows, doors, and cabinets are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and keynotes are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You

Understanding the Basics | 7

create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories, families, and types.

Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For example, categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. and View. While working in the drawing area.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. click (New). The toolbar buttons represent common commands. The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you type the required key combination to perform the command. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. Edit. which are listed on the menu. For example. By default. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. In addition. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. This creates a new project based on the default template. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. When you select the Door tool. a door type is specified. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Navigating the User Interface | 11 .the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. On the left side of the Options Bar.

you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Show Design Bars dialog displays. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available.8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. 9 In the Type Selector. In the drawing area. For example. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. when you add a door. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. ■ The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model.

click the tab in the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. Navigating the User Interface | 13 .The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. containing buttons grouped by function. immediately below the Type Selector. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.

and rename views. and groups of your current project: ■ Right-click in the browser to add. select Views (all). reports. and groups. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. families. sheets. schedules.TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In the Project Browser. families. delete. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.

14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. click Cancel. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. The browser is dockable.■ The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. walls. The cursor displays as a pencil. 3D). making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. and group name. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. Do not click. click Wall. family category (doors. To open a view. After creating a browser organization scheme. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click its name. windows). you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. elevations.

and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. 20 Press TAB. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. find a keyword on the Index tab.In the bottom left corner of the window. The status bar also provides information. regarding selected elements in a view. 18 On the Design Bar. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. You can use this tri-pane. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. In this case. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. When you place the cursor over an element. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. Revit MEP 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2009 Help. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. There are several tools that help you find information. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). In the status bar. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. in conjunction with tooltips. click Modify to end the Wall command.

rvt. For example. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. Toolbar: From the toolbar. After you are familiar with these tasks. Tooltips: To see tooltips. Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. press F1 for context-sensitive help.In addition. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. There are several ways to access zoom options. You can also press SHIFT+F1. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. Click the Help button. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. press F1 for help. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. click Training Files. Windows: From any window. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. click on the Standard toolbar. In the following steps. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP In this exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. If no Help button displays. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 17 . TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.

4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 6 Click Zoom To Fit.The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. the view zooms out from the building model. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. the view zooms in on the selected area. When you release the mouse button. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 7 Click in the drawing area. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. In the drawing area. 5 On the View toolbar. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command.

click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 10 To display SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view.9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. As you move the mouse. NOTE As you zoom in and out. moving the wheel to the desired location. and click Help. To define settings for SteeringWheels. To modify or add snap increments. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. and then using the Zoom tool again. press ESC. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 19 . 15 To exit the wheel. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. . on the View toolbar. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. click Settings menu ➤ Options. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and click the SteeringWheels tab. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. For more information about SteeringWheels. 13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.

to lengthen the wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. display along the ends. These are the drag controls. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 18 Click and drag the left control. and double-click 2nd Flr. click (Move). 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. Cnst. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. 17 Type ZR. expand Floor Plans. Small blue dots. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . bottoms. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. Similar controls. and on the Tools toolbar. as shown. called drag controls. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. When drawing or modifying a building model. referred to as shape handles. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. and select the wall. expand Views (all).Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser.

and click again to specify the ending position. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. as shown. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 21 . for example.Some commands. such as Move and Copy. click to specify the starting position. The table moves down. and drag it on top of the table. In this case. After selecting the element to move. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 23 Click next to the lower wall. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. you want to move the table closer to the wall. 24 Select the plant.

All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. such as the Lines command. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click Modify. Move. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Some commands. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. or press CTRL+Z.Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. and click again to end it. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click the Undo command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . On the Design Bar. Press ESC twice. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). on the Standard toolbar. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. In this example. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 26 On the Undo menu. 29 To end the command. select the second item in the list. click Lines. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.

Express Workshop 23 .

24 .

Finally. secondary supply air systems and a primary. The systems are used to perform calculations and analysis. you will have a basic understanding of Revit MEP design and documentation tools. When you have finished these tutorials. 25 . high pressure system. and to place and size ductwork. creating the primary supply system. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an MEP project. After air terminals and mechanical equipment are placed in a model. an HVAC system is a logical connection between air terminals and HVAC mechanical equipment. you create a supply air system that consists of 2 low pressure. you can create supply. You then create the main trunk line for Mechanical Supply Air 3 and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. you place the variable air volume (VAV) box. connect it to existing air terminals. The model you use in this lesson contains the secondary system Mechanical Supply Air 1. return. which is the physical representation of the system. and size the ductwork. In Revit MEP. and exhaust systems using these components. To create Mechanical Supply Air 2. Creating a Supply Air System In this lesson. you add and connect the air handler.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit MEP functionality and highlight powerful features that are integral to the most common MEP workflows.

If necessary. 2 If the Mechanical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. you place a parallel. right-click the Design Bar. creating a secondary supply system. click Training Files. VAV box in the model. click the Mechanical tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create the logical system shown above on the left. ■ Open the i Express Workshop Supply Air System. the model contains one completed secondary supply air system.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. Display the Mechanical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Creating a Secondary Supply Air System In this exercise. fan-powered. scroll until the folder is displayed. In this exercise. The Mechanical commands are displayed. and click Mechanical. You then define a logical connection between the VAV box and 4 existing air terminals. At the beginning of this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. Add a VAV box 7 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. click Mechanical Equipment. In this tutorial. To pan. you find the command at the far left of the screen. 4 Type ZR. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. Then. you can enter ZE to zoom out. To zoom in and out.In this tutorial. Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. The entire model displays on the screen. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. The model zooms to the specified area. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. roll the wheel. hold the wheel down and drag. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 27 . when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar.

8 In the Type Selector. The cursor displays as the VAV box outline. select Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 3 . 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 12 On the Design Bar.Directly above the Design Bar. 10 Press SPACEBAR once to rotate the VAV box 90 degrees. the Type Selector displays the mechanical equipment that is pre-loaded in the model. 11 Click to place the VAV box in the location shown. click Modify to end the command. on the Options Bar. but do not click. 9 Move the cursor to the area near the interior door of the room between grid lines 3 and 4.8 inch Inlet.

Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 29 . for Offset.200000 (20%). 16 Press ESC to clear the selection of the VAV box.Airflow. Verify that the PrimaryToSupplyRatio is 0. indicating that it has been selected. verify that SupplyAirFlow is set to 900 CFM. or just 10. you can enter 10 0 without units. The air terminal turns red.) ■ Under Mechanical . After the system is created. You do not need to enter the units. and click Element Properties. 19 Move the cursor off the air terminal. Create the system 17 Move the cursor over the leftmost supply air terminal in the model to highlight it. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box.13 Right-click the VAV box. ■ 15 Click OK. enter 10' 0". This value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the Level 1 ceiling and the Level 2 floor. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box. 14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. this value is automatically updated to reflect the supply airflow requirement. 18 Click to select the air terminal.

The Options Bar displays system information such as the system name. select the 2 supply air terminals to the right. 22 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. You have created a secondary supply air system that includes 4 air terminals and a VAV box. click Modify to end the command. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . the air terminals display in red. 24 Select the VAV box you just placed. and the number of elements that make up the system. move the cursor over the supply air terminal to the right. Verify the elements of the system 26 Select an air terminal that is an element of the system you just created. indicating that they are selected. 27 On the Options bar. The red sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components of the system.20 While pressing CTRL. 21 While pressing CTRL. and click to select it. click (Select Equipment For System). the equipment supplying the system. click 23 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. click (Edit System). (Create Supply Air System). When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected air terminals.

3 On the Options Bar. you leave it unchanged. In this tutorial. the secondary supply air system shown below on the left. The sketch graphics highlight. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System The model now contains the logical connection for Mechanical Supply Air System 2. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 31 . click (Layout Path). Next. the ductwork. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Do not click. 30 Press TAB. In this exercise. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. 2 On the Options Bar.Revit MEP automatically named the system Mechanical Supply Air 2. Verify the connections between the system elements 29 Move the cursor over an air terminal in the system to highlight it. 28 In the Supply Air : Mechanical Supply Air 2 dialog. select Network. Specify the layout 1 Select an air terminal in the system you created. You could change the name by overwriting it. you create the physical connection for the system. however. 31 Move the cursor off the air terminal. for Solution Type.rvt. click Finish. showing the logical connection between the components of the system. you complete the secondary system by adding ductwork.

select Branch. thus maintaining the consistency of these systems within the project. and fire protection systems. 7 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. 8 In the right pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. 11 On the Design Bar. which is located to the far left of the drawing area. Verify that Flex Duct Type is set to Flex Duct Round : Flex . for Duct Type. select Main. 9 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. Verify that the Maximum Flex Duct Length is 2’ 0”. The layout path settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. click Finish Layout. Configuring the layout path settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during the project. 10 Click OK.A network layout solution displays with main segments in blue and branch segments in green. click Settings. piping. Specify the layout path settings 6 On the Options Bar. click solutions. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. 4 On the Options Bar. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . ■ ■ ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". (Show Next Solution) to display other suggested network 5 Click until the network solution shown below displays.Round. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". plumbing. for Duct Type.

08 in-wg/100ft. and type SD. If the entire network does not highlight. 13 Highlight a segment of the newly created ductwork by moving the cursor over it. click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Revit MEP supports 4 of the most common sizing methods: Friction. Select Duct Fittings. Size the duct system 21 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ Under Sizing Method. 15 Press TAB again to highlight the next level of connections. and a disconnection exists at the point where the highlighting stops. and equipment is highlighted. Equal Friction. Click Check None. The branch to which the duct is connected highlights. A disconnection will negatively impact calculations involving this system. 20 Click OK. 12 If the ductwork displays in wireframe instead of with shading. Select Flex Ducts. Check the connectivity of the system You can check the connectivity of ducts and fittings using the TAB key. 16 Press TAB until the entire hierarchy of connected ducts. fittings.Revit MEP automatically creates and initially sizes all of the ducts and fittings required to connect the components of the system. and enter . Velocity. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 33 . You will use TAB to examine the hierarchy of the system components. the system has not been created properly. click View menu ➤ Shading with Edges. click Sizing. 14 Press TAB. and Static Regain. or click in an empty part of the drawing area. Do not click. select Friction. 18 On the Options Bar. 17 Click to select the highlighted system. Select Ducts.

30 Select the segment of duct shown. The ductwork is automatically updated with all the necessary fittings. Next. 35 Select the VAV box in the system. The Flow value of 150 CFM matches the required flow for the air terminal. 36 On the Options Bar.Airflow. 34 Press ESC to clear the selection. click (Element Properties). click Modify to end the command. scroll to Mechanical . the adjusted SupplyAirFlow value of 625 CFM for the VAV reflects the supply airflow values calculated for the system. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Verify the sizing 25 In the system you created. 23 Click OK. scroll to Mechanical . select Calculated Size Only. 33 Click OK. 29 Press ESC to clear the selection. 24 On the Design Bar. Under Constraints. select the segment of duct shown. Verify the calculated airflow value for the VAV box. for Branch Sizing. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The ductwork is sized using the friction method at . 38 Press ESC to clear the selection.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.■ ■ Verify that Only is selected. 26 On the Options Bar. 37 Click OK. you create the ductwork for the primary system and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties).Airflow. 28 Click OK.Airflow. The Flow value of 300 CFM is the sum of the 2 air terminals. under Mechanical . click (Element Properties). 31 On the Options Bar.

select 12". This specifies the duct diameter. select 10' 0". 2 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. and click to place the second segment of ductwork and end the run. For D:. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 35 . Create the primary air duct 1 On the Design Bar. you create the main trunk line for the primary system and connect the 2 secondary systems.rvt. in the location shown by the pencil.Creating the Primary System Ductwork In this exercise. select Round Duct : Taps. 5 Move the cursor past the rightmost VAV. click near the door in the room to the left of the secondary systems. click Duct. ■ The cursor displays as a pencil. 3 To start the duct run. For Offset. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. 4 Click in the location shown to end the first segment of ductwork.

The ductwork and the proper fittings are automatically created. 10 In the Type Selector. Add an end cap Before you size the ductwork for a system. do the following: ■ On the toolbar above the Options Bar.6 Press ESC twice to end the command. and specify a zoom region at the end of the trunk line. Draw the main trunk line again. 8 Type ZR. 7 If your trunk line does not match the above illustration and you want to draw it again. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 11 Place the cursor over the end of the duct to display an endpoint snap point. as described above. The model is zoomed to the end of the duct. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. click Duct Fitting. 9 On the Design Bar. you must place end caps on all open ends of the ductwork except for the end that connects to the air source. This determines airflow direction and ensures accurate duct sizing. ■ ■ Click again to undo to first section of duct. click (Undo) to undo the last segment of duct.

Connect one secondary system You will use 2 methods of drawing a duct from a VAV box to the trunk line. 17 On the Options Bar. 15 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. First. closing the right end of the duct run. click 19 Click OK. 13 Click to place the end cap. This connects the end cap to the ductwork. 16 Select the leftmost VAV. you use the Connect Into tool to automatically draw the duct. 14 On the Design Bar.12 Press TAB until the point snap graphic shown below displays. 18 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 0 : Supply Air: Round : 8" Primary Air Connector. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 37 . (Connect Into). click Modify to end the command. In addition to the graphic at the cursor. 20 Select the primary air duct. the type of snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bat at the lower-left corner of the screen.

22 Select the VAV box. you manually draw the connecting duct. 23 Right-click the 8” inlet supply connector. and click Draw Duct. 21 Type ZR. Connect the other secondary system Next. and zoom in on the rightmost VAV box.Ductwork is automatically created to connect the VAV to the primary air flow supply with a tap connection. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

you add and connect the air handler for the primary system. Do not click. select Air Handler : 10 ton. click Modify to end the command. click Mechanical Equipment. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.24 Click on the center of the primary duct in the location where the intersection snap (an X) displays. primary system. 25 On the Design Bar. Place the air handler 1 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. Adding the Primary System Equipment | 39 . 26 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. you place an air handler and connect it to the main trunk line to complete the high pressure. The ductwork is created with a tap connection. 3 Move the cursor to the location shown. Adding the Primary System Equipment In this exercise. Next.rvt.

The cursor displays as the air handler outline. Do not click. 7 On the Design Bar. 5 Move the air handler to the location shown. 6 Click to place the air handler. Create a vertical section of duct 8 Move the cursor over an edge of the air handler to highlight it. click Modify to end the command. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 4 Press SPACE BAR as needed to rotate the air handler 90 degrees.

On the Options Bar. click (Apply Current Offset). select Rectangular Duct/Radius Elbows Tees. The connectors on the front of the unit. are also visible. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. ■ Adding the Primary System Equipment | 41 . Under Offset. for the hydronic supply and return. and click Draw Duct. 10 Move the cursor over the 24" x 24" supply connector. The connectors on the top of the unit are displayed.9 Click to select the air handler. intake. select 10' 0". and exhaust. return. 11 Right-click the connector. These are the connectors for the air handler supply.

expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. 15 Double-click 3D HVAC. 16 Close the 3D HVAC view. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. 18 Right-click the center point of the duct.A vertical section of duct is created. past the end of the primary duct. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 13 Press ESC. and click Draw Duct. The vertical section of duct you just created is visible. 14 In the Project Browser. 19 Move the cursor to the right. Attach a rectangular duct 17 Select the vertical duct you just created. and click.

24 Press ESC. select the leftmost VAV box. The sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components. (Select Equipment for System). click (Element Properties). Adding the Primary System Equipment | 43 . ■ 23 Select the air handler. 26 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Options bar: ■ Click Click (Create Supply Air System). 25 Select the air handler. Create the main system logical connection 21 While pressing CTRL.20 Press ESC twice to end the command. and then select the rightmost VAV box.

37 Press ESC to clear the selection. 30 On the Options Bar. 34 Select the air handler. View the system components 38 On the Design Bar. 27 Click OK. 33 On the Design Bar. 36 Click OK. 31 Select the 24" x 24" rectangular supply duct by clicking a point on the duct between the air handler and the primary trunk line. 35 On the Options Bar.In the Element Properties dialog. click System Browser. notice that the value for SupplyAirFlow is 32. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Click in an empty part of the drawing area to clear the selection. Connect the ductwork 29 On the Tools toolbar located above the Options Bar.Airflow. 32 Select the primary 12" round duct. under Mechanical . click (Trim/Extend). The ducts are trimmed and connected with the proper fittings.815 CFM. click (Element Properties). the value for SupplyAirFlow has been updated based upon the primary to supply ratio you specified in the element properties of the 2 VAV boxes. click Modify to end the command. under Mechanical .Airflow. This is the capacity of the air handler. verify that (Trim/Extend to Corner) is selected.

and the secondary system that was already in the model when you opened it. 41 When you are done. expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views.The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. 39 In the System Browser. The browser displays 3 mechanical systems: the primary system that you just created. you inspect the system and color code the ductwork. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. click (System Inspect). 3 On the Options Bar. You then add a legend to automatically color code the ductwork based on specific calculated values. the secondary system that you created in an earlier exercise. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. Inspect the completed supply air system 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select a section of a secondary system. and double-click 3D HVAC. Inspecting and Color Coding the System | 45 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. close the System Browser. Inspecting and Color Coding the System In this exercise.rvt. you inspect part of the system you created. 40 Expand any Supply Air system to view its HVAC components. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. Next. expand Mechanical (3 systems). Elements are listed by the system they belong to.

including flow. 5 Move the cursor over a section of the system.The selected system maintains its appearance. 11 Click OK. click Inspect. static pressure. 8 On the Design Bar. Place a legend and color code the ductwork Color coding the ductwork provides a quick.Flow. under Color Scheme. 7 Close the 3D HVAC view. and pressure loss. the red arrows indicate critical flow path. Delete the legend and remove color coding from the ductwork 12 Select the legend. select Duct Color Fill . The legend is added and the ductwork is automatically color coded based on the actual flow values. The flow arrows indicate flow direction. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. the other systems are displayed in half tone. 6 On the Design Bar. click Cancel Inspector. 4 On the Design Bar. The inspection tag describes the section that is being inspected. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. visual indication of a system’s air flow. 9 Click in the drawing area to place the legend to the left of the air handler.

The color is removed from the ductwork. Wiring types (including material. Electrical settings have already been specified for the model. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. and demand factors have been defined. under Schemes. receptacles. power circuits. you create 2 lighting circuits using lighting fixtures. As you create circuits. junction boxes. temperature rating. including power panels. click 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. (Delete) to delete the legend. click 15 Click OK. select none. and a 480V panelboard that have already been placed in the model. click No. 16 On the Standard toolbar at the top of the window.13 On the Options Bar. and insulation type). 18 When prompted to save the model. After creating the logical connections. you create the physical connections between the components: the wiring. voltage definitions. Creating Electrical Systems In this lesson. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. the other circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on the other side of the room. You use the System Browser to view the created circuits. You then automatically balance the electrical loads on a panelboard. junction boxes. Creating Lighting Circuits In this exercise. lighting fixtures. The legend remains selected. One circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on one side of a room in the model. and the color scheme is removed from the legend. distribution systems. Revit MEP ensures that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. The model already contains the electrical components you use to create the systems. Creating Electrical Systems | 47 . Creating a Supply Air System. 14 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and switches. .

2 If the Electrical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. The Electrical commands are displayed.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. right-click the Design Bar. ■ Open the i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. click the Electrical tab. scroll until the folder is displayed. you find the command at the far left of the screen. Display the Electrical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. If necessary. and click Electrical. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar. click Training Files. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

hold the wheel down and drag. roll the wheel. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. Creating Lighting Circuits | 49 . 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. The entire model displays on the screen. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. you can enter ZE to zoom out. The model zooms to the specified area. In this tutorial.Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. Create a lighting circuit 7 Move the cursor over the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the large room in the model. To pan. 4 Type ZR. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. Then. To zoom in and out. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on.

they display in red. 10 While pressing CTRL. 8 Click to select the lighting fixture. move the cursor over the lighting fixture below the selected lighting fixture.The lighting fixture highlights. 9 Move the cursor off the lighting fixture. 11 While pressing CTRL. The lighting fixture turns red. select the 2 lighting fixtures that are located immediately to the right of the previously selected 2 lighting fixtures. and click to select it. indicating that they are selected. indicating that it has been selected. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected lighting fixtures.

click (Create Power Circuit).12 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). click 14 Select lighting panel LP-1. Creating Lighting Circuits | 51 . The red sketch graphics show the created circuit. 13 On the Options Bar. which is the logical connection between the elements.

17 When you release the mouse button. Create a second lighting circuit 16 Place the cursor above and to the left of the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. and then drag diagonally to create a selection window that includes all 4 lighting fixtures as shown. all the elements within the window are selected.15 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

which is the logical connection between the elements. Click Check None. Select Lighting Fixtures. click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 20 While pressing CTRL. Click OK. The lighting fixtures remain selected. Creating Lighting Circuits | 53 . (Select a Panel for the Circuit). click 23 Select lighting panel LP-1. 21 On the Options Bar. click the junction box located among the lighting fixtures to select it.18 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics show the created circuit. click (Create Power Circuit).

26 Press TAB to display the circuit. The components include the 4 lighting fixtures and the junction box. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 24 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. 25 Move the cursor over a lighting fixture in the leftmost circuit so that the lighting fixture highlights. you have created 2 lighting circuits. Do not click. Modify a circuit At this point.The sketch graphics show the logical circuit with a home run.

28 On the Options Bar. Creating Lighting Circuits | 55 . 29 In the Power : 1 dialog. 27 Click to select the highlighted circuit. 30 Select the junction box located among the lighting fixtures. 31 In the Power : 1 dialog. click Finish. click (Edit Circuit).The circuit includes 4 lighting fixtures. click (Add To Circuit). Verify the modified circuit 32 Highlight the junction box in the circuit and press TAB.

33 Move the cursor away from the circuit to remove the highlighting. close the System Browser. You can display the logical connections using the TAB key. 34 Select lighting panel LP-1. 38 When you are done. expand Electrical (7 Systems) ➤ Power ➤ LP-1. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. Next. Display the electrical systems The lighting circuits you created are called electrical systems in Revit MEP. only the logical connections between the elements exist. The circuits become visible when the physical connections. 35 On the Design Bar. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. the wiring. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. 36 In the System Browser. are created. 37 Expand the 2 circuits to view their electrical components. you assign switches to control the lighting fixtures.The modified circuit is highlighted. At this point. click System Browser. and you can view the system components using the System Browser. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

click (Create Switch System). The sketch graphics show the only currently selected component of the system. (Select Switch). 2 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Switch System dialog. Creating Switch Systems | 57 . click (Edit Switch System). i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. click 5 Select the switch as shown.rvt. The 4 lighting fixtures on the left of the room are controlled by one switch. All elements in the drawing except the selected lighting fixture display in halftone. Create a switch system 1 Select the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the room. and the 4 lighting fixtures on the right are controlled by another switch. you create switch systems to define switching behavior. The switches have already been placed in the model.Creating Switch Systems In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.

Assign an identifier to the switch 8 In the Switch System dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 One by one. Verify the switch system 12 Move the cursor over the switch to highlight it. click (Add to System). click Finish. for Switch ID. select the 3 remaining lighting fixtures on the left side of the room.Lighting. The switch system highlights. The identifier A is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. the Number of Fixtures count on the Options Bar is updated. 6 In the Switch System dialog. 13 Press TAB. and the lighting fixture displays in full tone in the drawing area. As you select each lighting fixture. under Electrical . 11 In the Switch System (A) dialog. enter A. 10 Click OK. 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click (Switch Properties).The Options Bar displays the selected switch and the number of lighting fixtures currently selected (1).

Creating Switch Systems | 59 .Lighting. Assign an identifier to the switch 22 In the Switch System dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Switch System dialog. click 21 Select the switch as shown. Select Lighting Fixtures. click 17 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection).14 Move the cursor away from the switch system to remove the highlighting. 25 In the Switch System (B) dialog. enter B. click (Create Switch System). click 19 On the Options Bar. 24 Click OK. click Finish. for Switch ID. The selection is filtered. Create a second switch system 15 Drag to draw a selection window that includes the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. Click OK. The 4 lighting fixtures remain selected. Click Check None. (Select Switch). click (Switch Properties). (Edit Switch System). The identifier B is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. under Electrical .

Tag the lighting fixtures 1 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt. you define lighting fixture types and tag the lighting fixtures. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Verify the switch system 26 Move the cursor over the switch and press TAB to highlight the switch system. Tagging Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. you add a tag to each lighting fixture that identifies its type and the switch that controls it. 3 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. The lighting requirements for the left side of the room are different from the lighting requirements for the right side of the room. Next. so each side of the room requires a different lighting fixture type. The lighting fixture is labeled with an automatically generated tag. you define the lighting fixture types for the room. clear Leader. Then. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems.

5 Press ESC to end the command. 14 Press ESC to clear the selection. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. select (Element Properties).The bottom part of the tag displays the identifier (A) for the switch that controls the lighting fixture. under Identity Data. 12 Click OK. for Type Mark. click Duplicate. Create a new lighting fixture type 6 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. click Edit/New. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Name dialog: ■ ■ Enter 2x4 3Lamp A. The selected lighting fixtures are tagged. 4 One by one. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. select the remaining 7 lighting fixtures in the room. Tagging Lighting Fixtures | 61 . Click OK. which you have not yet defined. enter A. The top part of the tag displays the identifier for the lighting fixture type.

18 Press ESC twice to end the command. The cursor displays as an eyedropper. and the tag is updated. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . the type is changed. and their tags are automatically updated.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp A) is automatically updated to display type mark A. in the Type Selector. 16 Select the lighting fixture shown to specify the lighting fixture type to be matched.The top part of the tag for the lighting fixture with the new type (Troffer Corner Insert . For each lighting fixture. select the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp B. Change the type for the remaining lighting fixtures 19 While pressing CTRL. Change the type for some lighting fixtures 15 On the Tools toolbar. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 Select the other 3 lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. select Troffer Corner Insert . click (Match Type). The 4 selected lighting fixtures are changed to the specified type.

25 Click OK. you create electrical circuits with wiring. scroll to Lighting Fixture Tags. 23 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 24 Clear Lighting Fixture Tags. Create a power circuit with wiring 1 While holding down CTRL. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating Power Circuits In this exercise. Turn off the tags 22 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you use electrical receptacles and a 208 volt panelboard that have already been placed in the model to create 2 electrical circuits with arc type wiring. on the Annotation Categories tab. You then connect the 2 circuits to create a multi-circuit home run. select the 2 receptacles in the small room.rvt. The lighting fixture tags are no longer displayed in the model.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. One circuit connects 2 electrical receptacles in a small room. Next. Creating Power Circuits | 63 . while the other connects the 8 receptacles in the adjoining large room. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems.

(Select a Panel for the Circuit). 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The sketch graphics show the created circuit home run.2 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics show the logical created circuit. click 4 Select power panel PP-1. click (Create Power Circuit).

The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom to Region command. 8 Click to specify the upper-left and lower-right corners of the zoom region shown. click as shown to create arc type wiring. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 6 Press ESC to clear the selection. Creating Power Circuits | 65 . You can also specify the zoom region by clicking in one corner and dragging to the other corner. View conductor information 7 Type ZR.5 In the drawing area near the created circuit.

12 Click OK. 14 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. verify the number of conductors of each type (hot. Create a second circuit with wiring 15 In the large room. 13 Press ESC to clear the selection.9 Select the wire shown. click (Element Properties). neutral. select the receptacle as shown. 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and ground). under Electrical . 10 On the Options Bar. The tick marks indicate the number of conductors (3) for the wire.Loads.

16 While pressing CTRL. select the remaining receptacles in the large room. Creating Power Circuits | 67 . click 19 Select power panel PP-1. The sketch graphics show the circuit and home run. for a total of 8 receptacles. 18 On the Options Bar. click (Create Power Circuit). 17 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics show the circuit. (Select a Panel for the Circuit).

20 In the drawing area near the created circuit. The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. click as shown to create arc type wiring. The single arrow at the end of the home run wire indicates a single-circuit home run. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

24 Type ZR. Creating Power Circuits | 69 . The cursor displays as a pencil with arc type wiring. 23 Right-click. click Wire. and zoom in on the region shown. and click Delete.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. The wire is deleted. Rewire a circuit 22 Select the home run wire for the small circuit. 25 On the Design Bar.

but the point snap graphic is not displayed. 29 With the point snap graphic displayed. If the cursor is positioned as shown.26 Move the cursor to the location shown. 28 Move the cursor to the location shown. In addition to the graphic in the drawing. click to place the end of the wire. but the point snap graphic is not displayed. 27 With the point snap graphic displayed. press TAB until the graphic displays. press TAB until the graphic displays. The cursor is correctly positioned when the point snap graphic displays. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . the displayed snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bar at the lower-left corner of the screen. If the cursor is positioned as shown. click to place the end of the wire.

View the multi-circuit home run 31 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. The 2 arrows on the large circuit home run indicate that it is now a multi-circuit home run. The wires in the circuit have been automatically resized to accommodate the demand created by the new multi-circuit home run. Tag the wires 32 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 34 Highlight a wire in the small circuit as shown. Creating Power Circuits | 71 . creating a multi-circuit home run.The two circuits are automatically connected. 33 On the Options Bar. click Modify to end the command. select Leader. 30 On the Design Bar.

36 Highlight a wire in the large circuit as shown. 35 Click to place the label. scroll down as needed. 2 On the Options Bar. and expand Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. PP-1 is highlighted to show that it is the currently displayed view. 3 In the Project Browser. View the panel schedule report 1 Select power panel PP-1. 38 On the Design Bar.rvt. Next. 37 Click to place the label. The Panel Schedule Report view opens. Balancing Electrical Loads In this exercise. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .The temporary label shows the circuit the circuit number (5) and the power panel name (PP-1). The temporary label shows the 2 circuits (5 and 6) and the power panel name (PP-1). click (Panel Schedule Report). click Modify to end the command. you balance the electrical loads on panelboard PP-1. you view the panel schedule report for panelboard PP-1 and balance the electrical loads on this panel. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. click The Edit Circuits dialog displays. 12 Click OK. A. and C. Balancing Electrical Loads | 73 . 10 On the Options Bar. click OK. Balance the loads on the panel 9 Select power panel PP-1. and click Properties. and the circuit structure is automatically reorganized. (Edit Circuits on Panel). All the circuits connected to the panel are listed. B. right-click PP-1. are shown. 8 Close the Panel Schedule Report view. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. click Rebalance Loads. under Panel Schedule. for Appearance on Sheet. and the current loads on phases. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit.4 In the Project Browser. The loads are balanced across each phase. under Other.

74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click No.The reorganized circuit structure is reflected in the wire labels. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Electrical Systems. 14 When prompted to save the model. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Developing Your MEP Designs 75 .

76 .

You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. This system consists of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. Then.autodesk. and contain information about the locations in which they are placed. After applying a color scheme to the zones. In this lesson. you place spaces in the areas of the building model. This information is used for heating and cooling load analysis. Planning Mechanical Systems To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spacial environment. you can choose to save your work. After finishing each exercise. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In this exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you perform a heating and cooling load analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you will understand the process. methodology. you create a plenum level and place various types of spaces. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2009. as most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you configure the linked architectural model. 77 . First. you plan the system by first placing spaces in the building.Mechanical Systems 3 In this tutorial. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you design a mechanical system for an office building. However. By following the recommended workflow. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. As you create the mechanical system. If the tutorial datasets are not present. go to http://www. you first carefully plan the system. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. At the end of this tutorial. as with any design project. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.

you add a level for plenums. click the Training Files icon. Configure the linked model The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and double-click East . and click Element Properties. not in the MEP dataset. and click OK twice. 78 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . select Room Bounding. The level 1 floor plan of the linked model displays. Open the i Spaces. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design bar. and after the linked model highlights. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to achieve an accurate heating and cooling load analysis. and that the ceiling is defined as non room-bounding. NOTE When working with a linked file. In this section. The linked model is configured. right-click. click Modify. expand Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). The Status Bar located below the Design Bar and a tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. click Edit/New. 6 In the Project Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. make certain that the roof is defined as room-bounding.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. The elevation view opens. Next. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 1 Mech. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. These components are defined in the architectural dataset. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.Mech. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels to place spaces in the plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor) of the building. This makes the architectural components (such as walls and floors) room-bounding so that they are recognized as boundaries for spaces. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model.

This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 7 is created. and its listed in the Project Browser under Mechanical ➤ ???. Click Plan View Types. enter an Offset of 1' 0" For Bottom. If asked to rename the corresponding level and views.7 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 9 On the Options Bar. Scroll down to the Extents category. for Top. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Type Selector. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Draw) is selected. Under View Depth. and click Edit for View Range. for Level. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. enter Level 1 Plenum for View Name. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. and in the Plan View Types dialog clear Ceiling Plan. In the View Range dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK twice. click Level. right-click Level 7. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. verify that Level : Plenum is selected. select Level Above (Level 2). verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. and click OK. For Offset. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. For Cut plane. ■ 10 Draw a plenum level 8' 6" above Level 1. Under Identity Data. click Yes. and enter an Offset value of 0 0. 11 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click Properties. Placing Spaces | 79 . and press ENTER.

If Close Hidden Windows is unavailable. The Space box contains all unplaced spaces (spaces that were placed in unbounded areas). For Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ 19 Place the cursor in the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. This action specifies the vertical extent of the space. In the Space box. click Space. select Level 1 Plenum. double-click 1 . For Upper Limit. Notice that the level is renamed in the elevation view. New indicates that a new space is being placed. Verify that Leader is cleared. Verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box.Mech view is not maximized or the elevation view was closed. verify that New is selected. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 17 Verify that Space Tag is selected in the Type Selector.The Level 1 Plenum floor plan is now listed under HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 15 Use the mouse scroll wheel. 14 Click Windows menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows to close the elevation view. and maximize the window. The Space tool is also on MEP-specific Design Bar tabs. Place a space in an office area and in an open area 13 In the Project Browser.Mech. 80 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . and zoom the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building. enter 0' 0" . 16 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. the 1 .

click to place a space as shown. Later in the exercise. and click Zoom to Fit. and after the space snaps to the room-bounding elements.20 Click to place the space. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Only the space tag displays because the visibility for the interior fill and reference lines is not activated. You activate this visibility later in this exercise. Make certain that you place the space to the center-right of the open space as shown. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. 21 With the Space tool open. you will separate the open space near the entrance and place a space there. TIP You can also right-click in the drawing area. 22 Move the cursor to the large open area in the center of the floor plan. Placing Spaces | 81 .

Next.23 Click Modify. 25 Click the space tag name. you rename the 2 spaces. 82 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 24 Zoom in on the space tag in the upper left hand corner office. A text box appears.

The Interior option displays space shading. expand Spaces. Interior. enter 101 in the text box. and rename the space in the open area. The 2 spaces display in the floor plan view. Reference displays space reference lines (cross hairs). 27 Repeat this method. and select Color Fill. and press ENTER.Enter Office. You apply color fill to spaces in a later exercise. enter VG on the keyboard. 28 With the view active. Next. Placing Spaces | 83 . 30 Click OK. Open 104. and Reference. and click in the drawing area. 26 Double-click the space tag number. 29 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. you activate spaces visibility. Color Fill displays space color fill when it is applied.

33 On the Options Bar. 32 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. verify that 0' 0" is specified. and (Line) are selected. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Draw). right-click the Design Bar. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. Chain. and click Mechanical.Place a space in the entrance area You need to place a space in the area next to the building entrance becaue this entrance area will be heated and cooled more often than the rest of the open space.Mech view active. click Space Separation. 84 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . To place a space in the entrance area. The entrance area is bound only by the radius wall—this area is considered semi-bounded. 31 With the 1 . and draw a zoom region around the upper-corner of the radius wall as shown. you need to make this area fully-bounded by drawing space separation lines. enter ZR. For Offset.

40 Press ESC twice to close the Draw tool. and after the end point snap displays. If you see a warning that the space tag is outside of its space. click to specify the start point for the first space separation line segment. NOTE If the space or the space tag is inside the smaller area. and click to specify the end point of the third line segment. and type 4' 0" (notice the text entry box called a dimension listener that pops up). and click to specify the end point for the second line segment. and after the end point snap displays. Notice that the Open 104 space adjusted its boundaries so that it is not in the new area. select and drag both of them. click Move to Space. 34 Place the cursor over the upper-corner of the radius wall. 37 Move the cursor to the right to draw a horizontal line 32' 0". 36 Draw the line up. 35 Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom out the view. and press ENTER to specify the end point for the first line segment. If the space and space tag are inside the new area. Placing Spaces | 85 . click to specify the end point for the last line segment. The Draw tool remains open. and drag it to the larger open area. 38 Draw the line down 32' 0". select the space (reference line) or the space tag. The space separation line created a new fully-bounded area within the large open area.■ Verify that Radius is cleared. 39 Move the cursor to the left 4' 0" (which is located over the lower-end of the radius wall).

After the areas are separated. 41 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. space separation lines are not recognized in Revit Architecture. 44 Click Modify. For Name. and verify that New is slected in the Space box. click Space. spaces can be placed in them. Next. right-click and click Element Properties. Although room separation lines are recognized in Revit MEP. 43 Place a space in the entrance area. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 On the Options Bar. verify that Leader is cleared. verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. enter Entrance. 45 Place the cursor over the space. enter 0 0 for Offset. under Identity Data. 86 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . after the space reference lines highlight. enter 121. do the following: ■ ■ For Number.NOTE Space separation lines are MEP-specific room-bounding lines that separate areas where a wall is not desired or not possible. select Level 1 Plenum for Upper Limit. you place a space in the entrance area.

47 Click OK. Place a space in a chase area 48 Zoom in on the chase that is located to the right of the Mechanical room. Roof is specified for the upper limit because the chase area spans multiple levels and ends at the roof level. 56 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1 Plenum. 55 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Chase 118. 52 Press Esc. under Floor Plans. 53 Rename the space. and select Interior and Reference. The plenum space displays in the floor plan view. 49 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 60 Click OK. expand Spaces. 50 On the Options Bar. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. and enter 2 0 for Offset. 57 Place the cursor in the plenum area. click Space. select Roof for Upper Limit. Place a space in a plenum area 54 In the Project Browser. 59 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. and click to place a space. 51 Place a space in the chase area. This is because the walls prevent space placement. Notice that the plenum space is not in the mechanical room or in the stairwell. The offset places the space 2 feet above the roof. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 58 With the Level 1 Plenum view active. The space is renamed Entrance 121. and enter 0 0 for Offset. click Space. Placing Spaces | 87 . select Level 2 for Upper Limit. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces.

You used space separation lines to create a new fully-bounded area that was part of a larger area. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. click the Training Files icon. NOTE After finishing each exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you add spaces to zones in order to control the spacial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 62 In the Save As dialog. you can choose to save your work. 88 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . However. you modified the spaces visibility for the views. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Zones allow you to control the spacial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Spaces Training for File name. click File menu ➤ Save. In the next exercise.61 If you want to save your work. and double-click 1 .Mech to make it the active view. In this exercise. Otherwise. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 2 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Open the i Zones. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Finally. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you assign spaces to zones in the building. When you add a space to a zone. click System Browser. and click Save. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. and verify the zones in the System Browser. that action removes the space from the Default zone. close the file. You can click Reference under Spaces on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display space reference lines. Creating Zones After spaces are placed in the building.

NOTE You can also press F9 (with the drawing area active) or click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. 3 Right-click in Systems Browser. you can add or remove a space from the zone. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Creating Zones | 89 . You work with one zone until you click Finish. 7 In the drawing area. The title bar displays the name of the new zone. and modify the zone properties. and a new zone is created. 6 On the Zone toolbar. verify that (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. and click View ➤ Zones. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. it is automatically added to the Default zone. click Zone. Assign a zone to spaces on the same level 5 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. This is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. you assign spaces to a zone. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. After a space is placed in an area. place the cursor on Office 101 located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space highlights. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. the Zone toolbar displays. Using the Zone toolbar. As you do this. Next. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. This removes the space from the Default zone. NOTE The Zone toolbar provides zone tools and information. The Zone tool opens.

10 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. enter VG. under Identity Data. The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser.West Offices. you rename the zone.West Offices zone in the System Browser to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. add the Office 102 and Office 103 spaces to the zone. expand HVAC Zones. 14 Expand the 1 . In the System Browser. 90 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Next. The new zone displays. for Name enter 1 . 9 With the drawing area active. TIP You can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 12 On the Zone toolbar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. To view the zone in the drawing area. Notice that the zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 11 With the Zone toolbar open. and click OK.8 Click the space to add it to the zone. click (Zone Properties). you need to activate the zone visibility which you do next. and click OK. expand the new zone and notice that the Office 101 space is added to it and removed from the Default zone.

add the following level 1 spaces to the zone: Open 104 Men’s Room 105 Mech/Elec 106 Ladies Room 107. click Zone. 24 On the 1 . you activate zones visibility for the view. 26 Add the L1 Plenum 122 space to the zone. enter VG. 19 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan: 1 . and click OK. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. click Finish. 23 On the Zone toolbar. 22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 20 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. expand HVAC Zones. click Finish. Assign a zone for spaces on different levels 16 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.Mech to make it the active view. and double-click Level 1 Plenum to open the view.15 On the Zone toolbar. 25 With the Zone toolbar open. Creating Zones | 91 . verify that ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. 17 With the drawing area active. 27 On the Zone toolbar. click in the Level 1 Plenum view to make it active.Mech floor plan. Next. 21 Zoom in on each floor plan.

However. The Zone tool opens.You need to rename the zone. for Name. TIP You can also access zone properties by right-clicking the zone in the System Browser. 92 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . select the reference line to the zone that you created. Next. 29 On the Options Bar. 28 In either view.Open Offices. enter 1 . click (Zone Properties). click Edit Zone. you cannot open the Zone tool as this will create a new zone. you edit the zone to rename it. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the Zone toolbar displays the name of the zone that you are editing. and click Properties. 30 On the Zone toolbar. under Identity Data. and click OK.

Ladies Room 207.East Offices 1 . 203 Chases 118. Make certain that you verify the spaces in the floor plan views and in the System Browser If you prefer not to continue with this practice.Open Offices 1 . 110 Open 104. 35 In the Save As dialog. You can expand the 1 . Elec/Mech 106. You activated zone visibility in the views.West Offices Chases 34 If you want to save your work.West Offices Stairwells 2 . you assigned zones to the spaces that were on the same level and on different levels of the building. 202. use the methods that you learned and assign zones for all the spaces in the building.The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. 212 Lounge 208. navigate to the folder of your choice. 32 On the Zone toolbar. 211. 216 Offices 201. L2 Plenum 217 Offices 215.South Offices 1 . 113 Entrance 121 Offices 108. 103 Stairwells 114. Men’s Room 205. Ladies’ Room 107. 102.North Offices 2 . 213 Conference 214 Offices 210. Spaces Offices 111. 120 Zones 1 . and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and Creating Zones | 93 . In this exercise.South Offices 2 . Complete the zones for the building 33 For additional practice. 109. Elec/Mech 206.North Offices 1 .Entrance 1 . 116.East Offices 2 . 112. Office 209 Open 204. L1 Plenum 122 Offices 115. 119. click File menu ➤ Save. enter Zones Training for File name. click Finish. proceed to the next step. 117 Offices 101. close the file. Men’s Room 105. Otherwise. All zones will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise.Open Offices zone in the System Browser to view the 5 spaces in it. and click Save. The table below lists all spaces and the zones.Conference Room 2 .Open Offices 2 .

and double-click 1 . 6 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan.Mech view. In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Drafting.Mech to make it the active view. Verify that Schema 1 is selected for Color Scheme. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. Click OK. click Color Scheme Legend. NOTE All zone reference lines and shading have been hidden in this dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected. You can click Reference Lines and Interior Fill under HVAC Zones on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display zone reference lines and shading. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. The color scheme is applied to the zones in the 1 . right-click the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Open the i Zone Color Scheme.in the System Browser. Apply the color scheme 5 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. 7 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. you assign a color scheme to these zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. you apply a color scheme to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select HVAC Zones for Space Type. 94 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . The zones are also listed in the System Browser. and click to place the legend. 4 In the Type Selector. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using space schedules or accessing element properties. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar.

click File menu ➤ Save As. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 95 . and click Save. enter Zone Color Scheme Training for File name. and view the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Specify Project Settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit for Energy Data. Level 1 Plenum.Mech. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Office is specified for Building Type. 9 If you want to save your work. and Level 2 Plenum floor plan views. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Open the i Energy Analysis. proceed to the next step. click the Training Files icon. NH for City. In this exercise. use the method that you learned and add a color scheme for the zones on the 2 . and view the loads report. All color schemes will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise. and on the Place tab of the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. you verify the building. In the next exercise. For Postal Code. 10 In the Save As dialog.8 For additional practice. space. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. If you prefer not to continue with this practice. navigate to the folder of your choice. select Manchester.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. ■ Click for Location. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis In this exercise. You then perform a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 2 In the Element Properties dialog under Energy Analysis. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and zone information. enter 03101.

Verify area and volume setting 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. verify that Manchester. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Verify that Shading surfaces is selected.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that VAV . After opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. You have verified the building information. For Ground Plane. (Building ■ ■ For Building Service (Default Space Service).Single Duct is selected. For Building Construction. and click OK. 5 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. and do the following: ■ ■ For Building Type. Verify building information 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Then. Verify that <Building> is specified for Building Construction. click Edit for Energy Data. verify that Office is selected. verify that VAV . click Heating and Cooling Loads. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Verify that 1' 0" is specified for Sliver Space Tolerance. A preview pane displays the model and 2 tabs contain heating and cooling information for the building. under Energy Analysis.Single Duct is specified for Building Service. if you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. For Place and Location. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 96 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). verify that <Building> is selected. Next. Default Space Construction. Verify that New Construction is selected for Project Phase. 7 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you need to select this option. select Level 1. NH is selected. Click OK twice.

Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 97 . The space for Office 111 highlights in red. 12 Click (Highlight). 10 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). while pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. 9 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The Spaces and Zones tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. NOTE Wireframe displays the analytical volume of a space. click the Spaces/Zones tab. Next.View a space 8 In the preview pane. 13 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. and zoom the model to better view the space. verify that Wireframe is selected (default setting). TIP You can use the View Cube mouse to spin. you isolate a space. The analytical volume is bounded by the center plane of walls and the top plane of roofs and floors. pan. 11 Expand the 1 . You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. spin the model as shown. The Highlight tool allows you to verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them.East Offices zone. and select Office 111.

Next. 15 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden.14 With Office 111 selected. roofs. 17 Using the methods that you learned. select Office 111. This space information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. floors. you verify space information. highlight and isolate the space for Office 111 to view its inner volume. the space information displays for the selected space. 98 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . and other room-bounding components. Verify space information 19 On the Spaces/Zones tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces that normally would be obstructed by other spaces or by the architecture which would normally make it difficult to view. click (Isolate). 18 Next. you view the volume of the space differently. click Shading. Below the list of spaces and zones. Office 111. 16 On the View Selector .

<Default> is specified for People Data. and repeat the above steps to view the inner volumes of the spaces in the 1 -East Offices zone. and humidification set point. 22 On the Spaces/Zones tab. Below the list of spaces and zones. N/A : N/A : N/A is specified for Outdoor Air Information. You can also click (Zone Properties) on the Zone toolbar to access the zone information. and verify the space and zone information. This zone information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the spaces in the zone. 74. and air changes per hour. This specifies the outdoor air per person. the zone information displays for the selected zone. This specifies the heating set point. 23 As you did earlier.East Offices zone: ■ ■ <Building> is specified for Service Type.00 °F : 54. Revit MEP stores this space and zone information as space and zone properties. 1 .00 °F : N/A for Heating Information. This displays the analytical volume of the spaces in the selected zone. 70. verify the following space information: ■ <Building> is specified for Space Type and Construction Type.East Offices. and clicking Element Properties. view other spaces and zones in the building model. View other spaces and zones 27 Using the methods that you learned. outdoor air per area. You can also access the space and zone information by selecting a space or zone in the drawing area or System Browser. you verify the zone information.00 °F : N/A for Cooling Information.00 °F : 90. click Wireframe.20 Under the list of spaces and zones. 25 Click 1 . cooling air temperature.East Offices. use the (Highlight) and volume of the spaces in the selected zone. right-clicking. This zone contains 3 spaces. (Isolate) tools to view the analytical 24 Click (Shading). The space and zone information is located under Energy Analysis in the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains space and zone information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Lighting Loads: <Default> : Power Loads: <Default> is specified for Electrical Data. This specifies the cooling set point. Next. This specified the number of people or the area per person for the space. respectively. heating air temperature.East Offices. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and dehumidification set point. select 1 . Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 99 . These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. ■ ■ View a zone and zone information 21 On the View Selector . including Office 111. 26 Verify the following zone information for the 1 .

This product is not included with Revit MEP. and click Save. 29 Review the loads report. weather. the People Data option becomes blank. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. Various factors are analyzed including analytical and inner volumes of the spaces. or make any changes to the model. space. click Calculate. and zone information has been verified. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. building. Now that the project. pan. close the file. and zone information for the building model. For example. or zone information. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. Revit MEP performs a heating and cooling loads analysis using the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool that was developed in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). click File menu ➤ Save. TIP You can select multiple spaces or zones by pressing CTRL and selecting them. you can perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. 31 In the Save As dialog. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. In the next lesson. You must have IES <VE> installed. and zone information. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 28 On the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. or by pressing SHIFT to select a range of spaces or zones. In this exercise. this report includes project. space. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. 100 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . NOTE If you select multiple spaces or zones that contain different information. you verified building. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and space information to the IES <Virtual Environment> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. 30 If you want to save your work. or zoom the view to see the selected space or zone. or import the IES model that has already been created. space. You then performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. navigate to the folder of your choice. space. Otherwise. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes.You may need to spin. and a loads report displays. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. if 2 spaces are selected each having different people data. that information does not display.

You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 101 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. As you place the air terminals.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click (Properties). adding AC units. you will create supply air systems. modify air terminal parameters. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. and double-click 1 . After system creation. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Then. In this lesson. and click View Properties. click the Training Files icon. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you create new views. You can also select the 1 . Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts.Mechanical Systems:Air 4 Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After completing the air systems lesson. and then you validate your air system design. Modify a ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. sizing ductwork. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. Open the i Air Terminals.Ceiling Mech to make it the active view.

Under Primary Range.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. ■ ■ TIP When entering a value. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. 10 On the Options bar. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". under Graphics. NOTE The ceiling hosts the diffuser. click Air Terminal. and enter 8' 7" for Offset. for the Cut plane parameter. enter 0 for Offset. Under View Depth. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. 5 In the View Range dialog. 102 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. for the Top parameter. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. make sure that Place on Face is selected. do the following: ■ ■ Select Level 1 for Underlay. For example. for the Level parameter. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. and enter 8 7 for Offset. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". select Supply Diffuser . These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. You specify 8' 7" so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 8' 6") and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. 11 Click to place the supply air terminal in the upper left office as shown. 9 In the Type Selector. separate the value with a space. Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 .3 In the Element Properties dialog.Ceiling Mech is the active view. 6 Click OK twice.

Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. enter 300 CFM for Flow. click Modify. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 13 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. 19 On the Options Bar. Placing Air Terminals | 103 . Since snaps are not available here. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. TIP To use the Move tool. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. and then click Modify. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. you may have to move it to center it -. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). You can also press Esc to accomplish this result. 14 On the Options Bar.12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.use the arrow keys for fine movement control. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar. 17 Move the air terminal to the location shown. then select Multiple. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. click to specify the move start point. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. Move the diffuser so that it fits squarely inside a ceiling tile. the command in progress terminates. and then click the midpoint of the Office 102 and then of the Office 103 ceiling grids to specify copy end points. TIP When you click Modify. Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 101 air terminal selected. click (Move) on the Edit toolbar.

Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. listening dimensions display to aid placement. click Air Terminal. and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display midpoint snaps only. select Exhaust Diffuser . Notice that after you specify the copy start point. 22 In the Type Selector. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom).Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method. 104 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection.

and specify a 325 CFM airflow for each of them. place 3 return air terminals in the open space to the left of the restrooms. select Return Diffuser . make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 250 CFM. 25 Using the same placement method.Hosted: Workplane-based Return Diffuser. Placing Air Terminals | 105 .Before you copy the exhaust diffuser. 24 In the Type Selector.

Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 101 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. clear the UpArrow check box. and click Element Properties.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. and click OK. under Mechanical. click Modify. right-click. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 106 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. continue laying out the level 1 supply system. Optional: Create the level 2 air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1. do the following for level 2: ■ Make 2 . remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. Placing Air Terminals | 107 .Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. create the level 2 supply system. After you place the supply air terminals.Ceiling Mech the active view. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. 30 Select the Office 101 air terminal. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. click on the Edit toolbar.

Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. specify the same view parameters as 1 . In the next exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. enter Air Terminals Training for File name. In this exercise.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. You will be using different views to design the systems. you create the air systems. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. 33 If you want to save your work. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and 250 CFM airflow for the exhaust diffusers. More importantly. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. 34 In the Save As dialog. In the next exercise. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model.■ In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. modified the air terminal parameters. 108 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. and click Save. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Specify 325 CFM airflow for the supply and return diffusers. ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. click File menu ➤ Save. and learned a method for precise placement. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise.

Create a calculated value parameter 9 Click Calculated Value. 5 Under Select available fields from. Click OK. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow Space: Name Space: Number 7 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. under Available fields. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared. Verify that Formula is selected. select the field and click Remove. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 109 . select Air Terminals. 4 Add Mark and System Type. ■ ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Actual Calculated Airflow for Name. do the following: ■ Under Category. select Space. 6 While pressing Ctrl. 10 In the Calculated Value dialog. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select Flow. click Schedule/Quantities. Select HVAC for Discipline. Verify that Schedule building components is selected.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.■ Open the i Air System Schedules. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 8 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Number Space: Name Mark System Type Flow Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with spaces. Select Air Flow for Type.

A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser.Space: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. select Actual Calculated Airflow. On the Filter tab. you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Use the schedule as a design tool 15 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. and click Conditional Format. Select Footer. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Actual Calculated Airflow is selected for Field. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. and select Supply Air. The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. select System Type for Filter by. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. Format the calculated value parameter 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. Enter -35 CFM and 35 CFM for Value. 11 Click OK. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Click OK. in the Fields list. Select Blank line. and Itemize every instance is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Space: Number for Sort by. Click the Background Color and select Red in the Color dialog. Next. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use. Verify that Ascending is selected. Select Not Between for Test.■ Use the button on the right to enter Space: Actual Supply Airflow . Click OK twice. 13 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Organize the data 14 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. ■ ■ The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what rooms do not meet the design requirements as they are red in the schedule. 110 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. The red values in the Actual Calculated Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room does not yet meet the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 CFM. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and Count and totals. equals. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

22 Select By Category. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active.This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. and draw a zoom region around Office 101 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. 18 Enter WT to tile the 2 views. A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. click Leader to clear this option. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. 16 In the Project Browser. select the 300 CFM Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 101 air terminal. TIP Editing diffuser tags in schedules. The Actual Calculated Airflow value displays in white indicating that it now complies with the Office 101 airflow design requirements. and press Tab. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. speeds the design process. double-click 1 Mech to make it the active view. Optional: Modifying Other Parameters The drawing for the next exercise provides completed values. 24 Click on a diffuser to add a tag. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. 20 Delete 300 CFM enter 250. 19 In the schedule. This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. 17 Enter ZR. Tagging an Air Diffuser 21 Select Tag from the Mechanical tab on the Design bar. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 111 . the selected air terminal displays in red. NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. rather than one by one in a drawing. 23 On the Options bar. 25 Modify the other supply air terminal Flow parameters for both floors so that the airflow design requirements are met. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. NOTE If a different project is also open. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog.

do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. all Actual Calculated Airflow parameters display in white. 26 Close the schedule view. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. Open the i Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. and click View Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. click Edit for View Range. enter an Offset value of 10 0. Under Primary Range. and click Save. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. In this exercise. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system.Mech floor plan view. for the Top parameter. 4 In the View Range dialog. 112 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. After creating the logical connection. A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 27 If you want to save your work. Unlike logical connections. you create air systems. and maximize the 1 . This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. enter Using Schedules Training for File name. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems. and double-click 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. click File menu ➤ Save. under Extents. However. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. This is the power of BIM. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. click the Training Files icon. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. you are changing the air terminal connector size. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 28 In the Save As dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. After you modify the airflow parameters. and then create the logical connection between the system components. During this exercise. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. In the next exercise. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow.Mech to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the drawing window.

So. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. then press F9. if all system components are assigned.Mech view. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. after you placed the diffusers. and sketch a zoom region around Office 101 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. air terminals. enter ZR. You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. 9 If the System Browser title says Zones. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. For now. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems. click System Browser. right-click the title and select View ➤ Systems. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. This assignment occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. As you assign diffusers to systems. 10 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. Explore the System Browser 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. click in the drawing area to make it active.5 Click OK twice. and click OK. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 11 With the view active. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 113 . Thus. and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. If the System Browser does not respond. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. 6 Type VG on the keyboard. uncheck Air Terminal tags. 7 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides window.

Parallel Fan Powered : Size 3 .TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. and click Element Properties. 114 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and press Esc twice. You created a system that includes the air terminal. enter 9 6 for Offset. do the following: ■ Under Constraints. you add the VAV to this system. 13 In the Type Selector. IMPORTANT After you select a system component. 19 On the Options Bar. click to place the VAV box. 12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. Modify VAV box parameters 15 Right-click the VAV box. ■ The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). 14 Move the cursor to the right of the office door. click (Select Equipment for System). 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 17 Select the Office 101 rectangular diffuser. This VAV box services only Office 101 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. Note that the VAV will detect the downstream airflow when connected to diffusers. system specific tools display on the Options Bar. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. Next. you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and select the VAV box. click (Create Supply Air System).8 inch Inlet. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. select VAV Unit . If desired. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. click Mechanical Equipment. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number.

click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. select an air terminal that you added to the system. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. and select the system. This display indicates that the new system is selected. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. They remain assign to their respective default systems. and click Select to select the system. and cleared from the Options Bar. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. the VAV (the parent) to downstream.Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. The organization is from upstream. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 115 . IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. Create the ductwork 20 With the new system selected. place the cursor over the Office 101 air terminal and press Tab.

You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. ■ Click (Next Solution). Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 28 Click OK. refer to Help. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. select Main. 23 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. Notice that Solutions is selected.Round for Flex Duct Type. Verify that 6' 0" is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. and select solution 2. 29 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. select Branch. 116 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. 24 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. 25 Under System Type: Supply Air. do the following: 22 ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. 26 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. For more information. click Settings. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. click Finish Layout.The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. 27 Under System Type: Supply Air.

as was the elbow itself. you can delete ductwork and the system remains. For example. On the View Control Bar. select Medium for Detail Level. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. Check duct connectivity 31 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. Change the geometry display 30 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. and press Tab twice. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct.The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 117 . select Coarse detail level for single line. thus it is not part of the system. For example.

click Sizing. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Click OK. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Size the duct 32 Place the cursor over the duct. If the entire network does not highlight. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. then you know that a disconnection exists. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. fittings. Under Constraints. ■ The Office 101 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. under Sizing Method. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. and enter . Rerouting usually correct this issue.08 in-wg/100ft. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. 118 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 33 On the Options Bar. Verify that Only is selected. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. The first time you press Tab. and click to select them. 34 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and equipment.

Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 37 Click in the drawing area. click to place the VAV box. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 119 . press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. double-click the second VAV box listed. 39 In the Type Selector. select VAV Unit . and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Element Properties. 38 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 102 and 103 (the offices immediately below Office 101). It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. enter ZR. click Mechanical Equipment. 41 In the left column of the System Browser. the required airflow for the space and the airflow assigned to the diffusers.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . right-click and select Element Properties. 40 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 102 door.IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. 35 With the VAV selected. 36 Click Cancel.8 inch Inlet. Note that the airflow is set to 250 CFM .

TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click the component in the left column. 43 Select the Office 102 rectangular diffuser. under Constraints. 45 Click (Edit System). This system includes the selected system component(s). System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. If not. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. right-click. 120 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . enter 9' 6" for Offset. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. click Add To System. and click Select from the context menu. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. and click OK.IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. and number of elements in the active being edited. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. a new system is immediately created. system equipment. NOTE After you select a system component. 44 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. 47 Place the cursor over the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. The component highlights in the drawing area. 46 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. the selected component and its connector(s) highlight.

On the Options Bar. 51 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 102. 52 Select the VAV box. the number of elements has increased to 2. click (Select Equipment). The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 121 . Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active.48 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 50 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 49 Select the Office 103 rectangular diffuser.

122 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . If you leave the mouse stationary. The system displays in red. 54 Place your cursor over the Office 102 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. click Finish. 55 Click to select the system. a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2.On the Options Bar. 53 On the Edit System toolbar.

Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. 58 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed. 57 On the Options Bar. 59 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Layout.Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 56 On the Options Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 123 . and select solution 3. click Layout Path. verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.

Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. and after the end point snap displays. you can review it and take action if necessary. IMPORTANT When creating layouts. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. This was the reason for the warning message. So. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. If a warning occurs. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. You can either relocate the VAV box. 61 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click to place the endcap.The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. 63 Move the cursor over the end of the main. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system. Add an endcap 60 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 102. 62 In the Type Selector. click Duct Fitting. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. 124 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . or modify the duct manually.

Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. 64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. Size the duct 67 Place the cursor over the duct. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 125 . 69 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Click OK. Notice the airflow value of 530 CFM. right-click and select Element Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. under Sizing Method. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Under Constraints. 68 On the Options Bar. 65 With the VAV selected.08 in-wg/100ft. and enter . Verify that Only is selected. click Sizing. and click to select them. 66 Click Cancel.

It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. The VAV box. 126 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and press Tab twice. and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. air terminals. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 102 and 103 is sized using the Friction method at . Check duct connectivity 70 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights.

sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space). click Zoom in Region from the context menu. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created.Next. 74 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the VAV box. Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 71 Right-click in the drawing area.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . 72 In the 1 . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 127 .Mech view. select VAV Unit. 73 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below. However. 76 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it. 75 In the Type Selector. click Mechanical Equipment.8 inch Inlet.

Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. click (Create Air Supply System). select the 4 air terminals above and to the right of the VAV. under Constraints. 81 On the Options Bar.77 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click again to deselect the VAV. click (Element Properties). You will add this later. and on the Options Bar. The selected diffusers highlight in red (shown here as circled). 79 In the Element Properties dialog. 78 Select the VAV. 128 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and click OK. 80 While pressing CTRL. The new supply air system displays in red. enter 9' 6" for Offset.

place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. and select solution 1. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 84 With the system selected. you create the ductwork to physically the system components. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. Then. You have logically connected the air system components. Next. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 129 . Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. 85 On the Options Bar. ■ 86 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click to select the system. and press TAB once to highlight the system. and the red system display cleared. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. 83 Select the VAV to add it to the system. Click . click Modify. 82 On the Options Bar.The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. click (Select Equipment for System).

89 Repeat this procedure and move the connection to the upper right branch. The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction. 130 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. click Finish Layout. IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. and then snap and move down the right section of the main to create a straight main to the VAV. 88 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the branch to the right until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV. notice that drag controls display.87 In the drawing area. 90 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. select the left section of the branch. After you select the branch.

and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. click Add to System. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. The new system component is now part of the same system. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. 94 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. 96 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. click Finish. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). select a system component that is already part of a system. The system components are now physically connected. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. 92 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 131 . You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. 95 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. Then. VAV. mechanical equipment. A change has occurred in the air system design. Next. the Number of Elements increased to 5. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. and (Edit) on the Options Bar. 93 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. This number verifies the added diffuser.The ductwork is created. Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 91 Select the main duct. Notice that on the Options Bar.

and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar. 99 Zoom out the view. click Finish Layout. and working from the end of the main. select the flex duct and the transition on the diffuser.97 While pressing CTRL. 100 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. 101 On the Options Bar. 98 With the duct work selected. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. right-click and select Delete to remove the unwanted duct work. 132 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Click . ■ 102 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and select solution 1. and press Tab twice. Now that the duct work is in place. The new ductwork is created. Check duct connectivity 103 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. you need to check that all the parts are connected.

TIP Depending on your ductwork layout. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared.08 in-wg/100ft. and enter . and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Size the duct 104 Place the cursor over the main duct. under Sizing Method. 105 On the Options Bar. The selection displays in red. Under Constraints.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Verify that Only is selected. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 133 . 106 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Click OK. and click to select them. click Sizing. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction.

it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at 0. modify the duct manually.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. You can either relocate the VAV box. Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. see the note below. Next. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. 134 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 108 Using the systems creation methods that you learned.) 107 In the Project Browser. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system.This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. modify the layout. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. under Mechanical.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. Verify that all Other options are cleared. complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. ■ ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. double-click 1 . If you receive errors.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset.Mech floor plan to make it the active view. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. see the note below. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. Do not change the duct conversion settings. If you receive errors. Reposition and rotate if necessary. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. or reinsert duct fittings. So. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. Optional: Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems (See the next exercise for a completed drawing.

The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. see the note above. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 10' 0" and the Detail Level to Medium.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 135 . Do not change the duct conversion settings. specify the air terminal airflow. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Optional: Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 109 Use the 2 . Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. Size the duct using the Friction method at 0. 110 On the Annotations tab of the Visibility Graphics window. Reposition and rotate if necessary. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. see the note above. For VAV airflow. Verify that all Other options are cleared. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2. Next.Mech mechanical floor plan view. turn off Air Terminal tags. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. If you receive errors.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . If you receive errors. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system.

you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. 1 In the Project Browser. 136 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Save. sized the ductwork. and double-click 1 . In the next exercise. and validated the systems in the System Browser. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. You also specified VAV airflow. checked duct connectivity. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. Open the i Using Views for Duct Validation. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. Although you already checked duct connectivity.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 113 In the Save As dialog. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. click the Training Files icon.Mech to make it the active view. 112 If you want to save your work. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry.The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. After creating each system.

you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. The selected section displays in red. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 101 103. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. enter ZR. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 101 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 137 . click Section. and the second click specifies the section tail. right-click Section 1. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Zoom to Fit. under Graphics. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. The first click specifies the section head. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 103 air terminal to set the end point. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the section.Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). and click Properties. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. After you add the section. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. 8 In the drawing area. and click OK. The section relocates under HVAC. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.

The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be. 12 On the View Control Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 102 and 103.You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. 138 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. click Modify. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. The section head displays in blue. select Medium for Detail Level.

Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar. select Section Box. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. under Extents. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. and click View Properties. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. 18 On the View Control Bar. Notice that in the 3D view. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. and click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Project Browser. A section box displays around the building model. click Modify.14 Continue to validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 139 .

25 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls. 26 If you want to save your work. 102. 21 In the drawing area. 140 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing.NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. and 103 duct geometry is as you expected. click File menu ➤ Save. 22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. 24 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that you can verify that the Office 101. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry.

click the Training Files icon. do the following.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and click Save. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Mech to make it the active view. In the next exercise. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the approximate location shown. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. and click to specify the start point. you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. click Duct. ■ ■ ■ Verify that 12" is selected for diameter (D:). and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. select Round Duct : Taps. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 141 . This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. navigate to the folder of your choice. Open the i Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct. 5 On the Options Bar. Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts.27 In the Save As dialog. and double-click 1 . 2 Enter ZR.

9 Click on the VAV.7 Draw duct as shown in the following image. right-click on the air connection. and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 101. 142 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and click Draw Duct. Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 8 Enter ZR. you can select individual segments and use the arrow keys to adjust location. After placing the duct.

This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. and click to specify the end point. 10 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. If you pause briefly. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 143 . you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 8" VAV primary connector diameter. TIP When drawing duct. and click or press Enter to specify the end point. When drawing duct. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. 12 Move the cursor down and draw an approximate 8' 0" vertical second duct segment. 11 Draw the first duct segment 2' 0" to the right. use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector.

13 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 102. the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy. 144 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . After you click to specify the end point. TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. the duct run connecting the Office 101 VAV to the primary is complete. and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. 14 With the Draw tool open.

and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. 16 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. Check connectivity 19 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. 17 Connect the other three VAVs to the primary duct as shown. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 15 Place the cursor over the Office 102 VAV box supply air connection. and after the connector snap displays. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 145 . click to specify the start point. zoom the view to the right of the primary. 18 Using the draw duct methods that you learned. On the View Control Bar.

remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry. Finally. On the Options Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. and Angle is cleared. ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. 146 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV. you will do that in a later exercise. You will size the primary in a later exercise. 22 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. 20 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D views. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. Check connectivity. Optional: Complete the level 1 primary duct (See next exercise for a completed drawing. NOTE Do not size the primary at this time. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. Do not size the primary. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation.) 21 In the Project Browser. specify a 9' 6" offset.

and verify that Auto Connect is selected. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. and double-click 2 . and Angle is cleared. Do not size the primary. complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. You will size the primary in a later exercise.The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. specify a 9' 6" offset.Mech to make it the active view. Check connectivity. ■ ■ Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 147 . Optional: Draw the level 2 primary duct 23 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. On the Options Bar. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. 24 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned.

click the Training Files icon. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. However. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. While drawing duct. and click Save. 25 If you want to save your work. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. This determines the airflow direction. click File menu ➤ Save.Velocity. Open the i Duct Sizing . Considering that both ends of the primary are open. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. In this exercise. Finally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. Before sizing the primary. In the next exercise. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. but you have yet to size the primary. navigate to the folder of your choice. 148 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. 26 In the Save As dialog. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes.

7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 1 . 4 In the Type Selector. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 149 . click to place the endcap. and click Mechanical.Mech to make it the active view. The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located near the wall between Offices 117 and 116. click Duct Fitting. 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run. right-click the Design Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. and after the end point snap displays.

click Sizing. under Sizing Method. ■ 150 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. and enter 2500 FPM. The selected primary displays in red. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. and click to select it. 9 On the Options Bar. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Under Constraints. Verify that Only is selected. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog.

IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. and press TAB twice. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. or reinsert duct fittings. So. You can either relocate the VAV box. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 151 . select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. modify the duct manually. Next. modify the layout.The sized left primary is shown below. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 117. The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct.

18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary. 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. The sized right primary is shown below. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run. and double-click 2 . the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. As in level 1. Optional: Size the level 2 primary duct run (See the next exercise for a completed dawing.) 15 In the Project Browser. 14 Using the method you have learned.13 Using the process that you just learned. place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run. 152 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .Mech to make it the active view.

rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.Mech. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 153 . you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. In this exercise. you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. Then.Mech Duct Classes for Name. 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. Like room color scheme. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 20 In the Save As dialog. you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. Open the i Duct Color Scheme. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. and click Rename. In the next exercise. First. navigate to the folder of your choice. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Mech is created and becomes the active view. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise.Velocity Training for File name. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. and click Save. This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. enter Duct Sizing . 3 In the Rename View dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. enter 1 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Mech. 19 If you want to save your work. click File menu ➤ Save. you sized the primary duct for the building. right-click 1 . A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 .The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. right-click Copy of 1 .

Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical. 5 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. 8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK.

Next, you change the color scheme. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area, select the duct color scheme legend that you placed, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Velocity for Color, and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. Select By range. In the At Least column, click in the second row, and enter 2000 FPM. In the Caption column, delete the existing text, and enter low velocity for the first row, and enter high velocity for the second row. In the Color column, click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. In the Color column, click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box.

154 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.

Click OK.

The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them.

Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 2 - Mech, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, enter 2 - Mech Duct Classes for Name, and click OK. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. 15 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. Using the same color scheme allows you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 155

18 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. In the next exercise, you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method
In 2 previous exercises, you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. In this exercise, you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. First, you split the duct main into multiple pieces, and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. Finally, you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Duct Sizing - Equal Friction.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 In the System Browser, expand the Mechanical systems folder. TIP If the System Browser is closed, press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser, not ductwork (physical connections).

156 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

3 Right-click Supply Air, and click Expand All. Every supply air system that you created is listed. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number, such as Mechanical Supply Air 6, and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system, such as a VAV box and diffusers. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3, and click Show. The 1 - Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system, and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. 5 In the Show Element(s) In View dialog, click Close to deactivate the Show tool. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.

You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. To accomplish this reduction, you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. Split the main

6 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Split).

7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. 8 Watch the listening dimensions, and split the main about 11' 0" from the end of the main.

TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display, move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. 9 With the Split tool open, split the main to the right of the second branch as shown.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 157

10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main, and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box, and click to select them. Note that the VAV box is not selected.

12 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:
■ ■

Select Equal Friction, and enter 0.08 in-wg/100ft. Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Click OK.

IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined, ignore this warning. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it.

158 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.

Notice that as the airflow decreases, transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. Next, you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 15 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader. Click Tags.

16 In the Tags dialog, under Category, for Ducts, verify that Duct Size Tag is loaded, and click Cancel. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main, and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment, and click to place each tag. TIP To reposition a tag, select the tag and drag it to a new location. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement.

19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. 20 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Sizing - Equal Friction Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. First, you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments, and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. Finally, you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 159

sizes. In the next exercise, you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized.

Inspecting Air Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. Using this tool, you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2.

You will inspect this system. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. IMPORTANT To select a system, select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, select

(Inspect).

The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click , the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.

160 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector opens, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow, pressure, and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. A tooltip also displays the system information.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected, but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. These are not logically connected to this system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment, click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment.

Inspecting Air Systems | 161

10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. 13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork, the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). For example, you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. The primary is physically but not logically connected. In a later exercise, you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. 16 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 17 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction, airflow, and pressure information for various systems in the project. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you place 2 AC units.

Placing Air Conditioning Units
In this exercise, you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units.

162 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing AC Units.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create a new roof plan view 1 Click the View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 2 Select Roof and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Roof. 4 Right-click Roof, and click Rename. 5 Enter Roof Mech for Name, and click OK. 6 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. Ignore the warning about the name changing. 7 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view, and click View Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Mechanical for Discipline, and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. 9 Under Extents, click Edit for View Range and select Level 2 for View Depth: Level. Click OK twice. 10 Change the Graphics Style to Wireframe. 11 Set the Detail Level to Medium. This action specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser.

Add the AC Unit that services level 2 12 In the Roof Mechanical view, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. 13 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 14 In the Type Selector, select Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 163

15 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room, and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. 16 Place the unit in the approximate location shown below.

17 Click to place the AC unit, and then click Modify on the Design Bar.

Next, you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. Create a new section view 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 20 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 203 VAV box, and click to specify the section start point.

21 Move the cursor to the right, and after the cursor is past the AC unit, click to specify the section end point.

164 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 22 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 2, and click Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). 24 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. 25 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle.

The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. 26 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 27 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Medium for Detail Level. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. You may need to adjust the top border to see all of the AC unit.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 165

29 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators, notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface.

NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes, AC units are level-based components. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. To place the AC unit on the roof surface, you must relocate it.

30 Select the AC unit, and click

(Move) on the Edit toolbar.

31 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the move start point.

32 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit, and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface, (1' 0" directly above the start point), click to specify the move end point.

166 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

This specifies the AC unit offset level of 1' 0" which moves the AC unit to the roof surface.

TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. Place the level 1 AC unit 33 Using the methods that you learned, place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures (see the next exercise for approximate locations):

Work in the Roof Mech view, and place a Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. TIP You can copy the first AC unit you placed. Copying eliminates the elevation adjustment. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below.

The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown.

34 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 35 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing AC Units Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. In the next exercise, you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 167

Completing the Supply Air Systems
In this exercise, you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. First, you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. Then, you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Completing Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Modify the 3D view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and double-click {3D} to make the view active. 2 Select the section box, and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof.

The entire building including the AC units display.

If you like, you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. Remember that, if you do this, you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. 3 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that it displays as shown below.

168 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Next, you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. Tile the views 4 With the 3D view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 5 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. 6 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 7 Zoom the view in both windows as shown.

You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 9 In the Type Selector, select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. 10 In the Roof Mech view, place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection, the connector snap displays.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 169

11 Click to specify the duct riser start point. 12 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Enter 68" for W: (width), and 20" for H: (height). This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Enter -2 6 for Offset, and press Tab.

■ ■

The -2' 6" offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system, 9' 6". Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components, Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. If the 2 are different, connections are automatically created. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. 13 Move the cursor up, and after listing dimensions display, enter 3' 6" and press Enter to specify the end point.

The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 9' 6" from level 2, and then the duct continues horizontally for 3' 6".

Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 14 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 15 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

170 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted.

16 Close the Roof Mech view. You now switch to the 2 - Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 17 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 18 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views, and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 - Mech view. TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level, you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar, change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.

Notice that only the duct riser displays. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 - Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit, but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 171

19 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment.

The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. 20 In the 2 Mech view, select the horizontal primary segment, and while pressing CTRL, select the adjoining elbow. The selected items display in red. 21 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow.

22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 23 In the Type Selector, select Round Duct : Taps. 24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter), select 9". Verify that Auto connect is selected. For Offset, verify that 9' 6" is specified.

25 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser, and after the mid point snap displays, click to specify the start point.

172 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

and after the centerline snap displays. 27 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. The left primary is connected to the AC unit. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 173 . click to specify the end point. 28 Validate the geometry in the 3D view.26 Move the cursor over the primary.

you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. 174 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 29 Spin the 3D view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection.Next. 30 In the 2 . 32 Drag the connector down and to the right. 31 Select the right primary duct. pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment.Mech view. and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. You will also use this view to validate endcap placement. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point. and place the cursor over the end connector.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 175 . 34 Draw a short run of duct with a downward 30 degree angle and click to set the endpoint. 37 Validate the geometry in the 3D view. right-click and select Draw Duct. draw a horizontal run and connect it to the midpoint snap of the riser .33 Select the right primary duct. 36 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw Duct tool. 35 With the draw tool still active.

you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected. 40 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar. Add endcaps 39 In the 2 . The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. 176 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .Mech view. place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice.Mech view. Check connectivity 38 In the 2 . You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. However. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork. 41 In the Type Selector. zoom in on the duct riser.You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. click Duct Fitting.

click to add the endcap. 43 With the Duct Fitting tool open. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 177 .Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. 44 In the Type Selector.. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. 42 Place your cursor over the top edge.

and then validate its geometry. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap.45 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. 178 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 49 Using the 2 views. 46 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. click to add the endcap. 48 In the 3D view. Verify endcap placement 47 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement. verify the duct riser endcap. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry.

you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. 53 On the Options Bar. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of Completing the Supply Air Systems | 179 . and click OK. 54 In the Filter dialog. Next.50 Press Tab to check connectivity. and then select Mechanical Equipment. click in the 2 . click Check None. Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. 51 With the 2 views tiled. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Create the high pressure supply air system. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D view. 52 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner.Mech view to make it active.

180 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .the current view are selected. 56 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system. IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector. click (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the selected VAV boxes to it. 55 On the Options Bar. 58 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool. 57 Click the 3D view title bar to make the window active. all system components must be logically connected by a system.Mech view range. and select the level 2 AC unit. or even without ductwork. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. However. In this case. You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure.

click Inspect. click Inspect. The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect.Mech drawing area to make the view active. expand Mechanical. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information. 67 Click a blank space in the 2 . After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. you inspect the system. and click Inspect. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. Supply Air. 63 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector.Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 25 system listing. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. 69 Make the 3D view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. diffuser.Validate the primary supply air system 59 Press F9 to open the System Browser. Next. 62 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 25 to view the VAV boxes. 61 Expand Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . and click Select. This is the system that you just created. 68 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. 60 In the System Browser. 65 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed. The System Inspector tool opens. In the Unassigned folder. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 181 . duct fitting. Inspect the primary supply air system 64 In the System Browser. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. 66 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system.

This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. 182 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D view. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. Next. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. ■ ■ This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit. 9' 6". move the cursor down. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view.70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Specify the offset to -14' 6". Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air system 72 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. and a 20" height. and enter 3' 6". draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 68" width. 71 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system. Click the supply connector.

Watch for the centerline snap as shown.Mech view. open the 1 . release the mouse button.Mech view (if open). and tile it to the left of the 3D view. select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. In the 1 . and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct.Mech view. ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 . and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool.Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view. ■ ■ Connect the primary to the AC. select the left primary duct segment. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 183 . Instead of drawing duct. ■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser. and after the edge highlights. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge.

Validate the system using the System Browser. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D view. add an endcap on the end of the duct riser.Mech view. Use Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it.The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. ■ ■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system. and inspect the system with the System Inspector. ■ In the 1 . Use Tab to check duct connectivity. ■ 184 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and remember to zoom the view.

You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. As you view the warnings. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser.The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. you check the systems in your project. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. and validated these logical connections. and for duct sizing. click File menu ➤ Save. Open the i Checking Air Systems. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. In the next exercise. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using tiled windows. click the Training Files icon. 73 If you want to save your work. and click Save.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In this exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. and quickly target those systems that need attention. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. In this exercise. click Check Duct Systems. Revit MEP lists the system components Checking Air Systems | 185 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you need to validate them. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. 74 In the Save As dialog.

you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. 5 Right-click Default Return Air. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. Then. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. After you assign the system components to a system. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. 186 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. as a tutorial exercise. In the System Browser. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. For example. the duct is now associated with that system. and for duct sizing. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. thus assigning the components to a system. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid.that are associated with each warning. However. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. So. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems.

In this exercise.The red lines represent the default logical connection.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. 9 Right-click a system. and click Select to view it and its assigned system components. You now confirm the systems that you created. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. 11 In the Save As dialog. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. In the next lesson. 10 If you want to save your work. Checking Air Systems | 187 . TIP If you have multiple views open. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. Depending on your air systems design. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. 8 Right-click Supply Air. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. otherwise click Close. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. navigate to the folder of your choice. 6 Using the same methods.

188 .

you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. First. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Mech. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. and inspecting the piping system. pipes. click the Training Files icon.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In this lesson. circulator pump.Mechanical Systems: Piping 5 Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 189 . You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you create new views in which to design the piping system. and the systems to logically connect the system components. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. you create hydronic piping systems. right-click 2 . Open the i Creating Piping Views. After completing the air systems lesson. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. A new view called Copy of 2 . Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Then. a boiler. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. placing a circulator pump.Mech is created and becomes the active view. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems. Creating Piping Views In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

Piping for Name. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". for Level. and enter -11 6 for Offset.Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". scroll down to the Extents category. 8 Click OK twice. Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . and click Edit for View Range. and click Rename. you do not need to type measurement symbols. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. right-click Copy of 2 .Piping view selected in the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. enter 2 . Next. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. Under View Depth. TIP When entering a value. and click OK. click view properties.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems. For example. you change the view range. do the following: ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. Enter -3 1 for Cut plane Offset. The 2 . verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. Also notice that 2 . 190 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .2 In the Project Browser. and enter -11' 6" for Offset. 7 In the View Range dialog. and enter 1' 0" for Offset. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. For Bottom. just separate the value with a space. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1.Mech.

it will be best to create filters. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. Select VAV Unit . Next. However. such as family name. and enter VG. you may want to select each component type separately. Create and define filters 9 In the 2 . then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. On the Filters tab. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type. click the Filters tab. however. Verify that none is selected for And. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. 12 In the Filters dialog. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. So. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components.Piping view. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. 15 Under Filter Rules. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria.You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. However. (New). and click OK. they will not filter all system elements needed. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. Click Apply. 10 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. 11 Click Edit/New. the system filters are not used. Considering this. you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. To do this. and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. or even a description that you define.Parallel Fan Powered for the family name. click in the drawing area to make the view active. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. under Filters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. 14 Under Categories. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. click 13 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. select Mechanical Equipment. you can add and activate filters. and verify that equals is selected. In this lesson. system type. type name. the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. Creating Piping Views | 191 . Depending on the filter criteria. you need a define common filter criteria.

16 In the Filters dialog. select Description for Filter by. 28 Under Identity Data. under Filters. NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. select Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. select Supply Diffuser . and click OK twice. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For Family. 26 Click Apply. click in the Value column for Description. 20 Enter Air Terminal for the description. This is because the selected supply. 23 On the Options Bar. otherwise the filter will not work. 19 Under Filter Rules. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. 18 Under Categories. and select Air Terminal. . NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. return. and click Apply. 21 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select Exhaust Diffuser Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. then the type parameters will not display. 22 In the Type Selector. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. you will not see the Description type parameter. 31 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. Next. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. you can select it. and click OK. you continue to create and define the filters. This is the same rule for using formulae. click Air Terminals. you create a description as the common filter criteria. return. 30 Click OK twice. you add a description for the supply air diffusers. 32 Click in the 2 . you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. 29 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the Return air diffusers. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. By selecting each air terminal type separately. click (Properties). click 17 Enter Air Terminals for Name. under Identity Data. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. So. Remember. This action adds a description for all Exhaust Diffuser air terminals. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. Next. Because you already entered the description.Piping view to make it active. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). For Type. if differences exist in the selected elements. you must spell both verbatim. click Air Terminal. click Edit/New. enter Air Terminal for Description. Next. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. Remember to click Apply. 192 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .Hosted. and verify that equals is selected. and enter VG.

Supply and Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. clear all check boxes except for Mechanical . Add and activate filters 37 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. Filter by: System Type. Category: Duct Fittings. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 40 Click OK twice. To filter multiple duct fitting types. and select Round Duct for the family name. And: Type Name. verify that equals is selected. Creating Piping Views | 193 . All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. 36 Click OK. 34 On the Filters tab. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. So. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs.Duct Fittings. verify that equals is selected. select all of the filters that you created. Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Next. 38 In the Add Filters dialog. You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. click the Filters tab. create the following new filters according to the specifications. verify that equals is selected. verify that equals is selected. verify that equals is selected. Next. Round Ducts. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. So. and click OK. 39 Under Visibility. You used this duct to create the duct riser. you activate the filters. Filter by: Family Name. you need a common filter criteria. This is because you have not added them. Category: Ducts. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. Filter by: Family Name. and enter Supply Air for system type name. Filter by: Family Name.Round.33 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. Category: Flex Ducts. you need to define the filter again. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. verify that equals is selected. And: Type Name. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. click Add. 35 Using the methods that you just learned. ■ ■ ■ ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter. you add and activate the filters. verify that equals is selected. Category: Ducts. Next. Filter by: Family Name. If you did not click Apply. Flex Ducts . you specify a family and a type name. Category: Ducts. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . click Edit/New. you filter duct fittings by system type. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler.

45 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance. Create the level 1 piping view 41 In the Project Browser. you change the view range. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler. right-click Copy of 1 . Next. You now define the view properties. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 1 . this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden.Mech. The 1 .Piping view displays the new view settings. 44 Right-click in the drawing area. The 10 foot top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except 194 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 48 Click OK twice.Piping view.Mech is created and becomes the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 42 In the Project Browser. A new view called Copy of 1 . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 10' 0" is specified for Top Offset. and click Edit for View Range. TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. and click View Properties. and click OK. Next. Unlike the 2 . 43 Enter 1 . and click Rename.Piping for Name.All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. under Graphics. 47 In the View Range dialog. scroll down to the Extents category. under Primary Range.Mech.

under Extents. 50 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. 58 Click OK. Create the 3D Piping view 49 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. You used this duct to create the duct riser. 56 In the Add Filters dialog. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. clear Section Box to turn it off. click the Filters tab. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. As you create the pipe runs. and click OK. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 Right-click in the drawing area. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. and click View Properties.for the boiler pipe connection). under Graphics. you will want to validate the geometry. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. 55 On the Filters tab. such as halftone architecture. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. and to create the level 1 piping system. 51 Enter 3D Piping for Name. and click Rename. right-click 3D. ducts. If you turn off ducts visibility. select all of the filters that you created. click Add. Next. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Creating Piping Views | 195 . 57 Under Visibility. 59 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you will be unable to view the duct riser. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. and click OK.

NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. click Mechanical Equipment. You also created filters to display certain system components. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. click the Training Files icon. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. navigate to the folder of your choice. 6 Zoom in on Office 201 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. you place the radiators and a boiler. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall.60 Click OK. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. and click Save. 62 In the Save As dialog. Open the i Placing Radiators and Boiler. and click Piping.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. click File menu ➤ Save. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 196 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .Piping to make it the active view. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. and double-click 2 . select Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : 1" NPT. The duct risers and AC units display in the view. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. 61 If you want to save your work. In the next exercise. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. right-click the Design Bar.

9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown. 8 Click to place the radiator. except for the windows on the radius wall. To place the radiator precisely under the window. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 197 . select it and use the arrow keys to move it into position. and notice that the connectors display. and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown.7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall.

13 In the resulting dialog. All level 2 radiators display in red. click (Element Properties). Next.Piping to make this the active view. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. 14 Enter 4 for Flow. double-click 1 . Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. and click OK. 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. verify that 20 GPM is specified for all of the selected radiators. 198 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. you place the boiler. If so. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 4 GPM for all fin-tube radiators in the building. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify. and you do not want to include it. 12 On the Options Bar. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. and click Select All Instances. If parameters are blank. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. you modify the radiator flow rate. drag the section tail. If the same type of component exists on another level. TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. for Flow. right-click a radiator. Next.You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. then these are different across the selected objects. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. under Mechanical Loads.

click Mechanical Equipment. and select Boiler : Standard from the Type Selector. and click to place the boiler approximately as shown.16 Enter ZR. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. you verify the boiler flow rate. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 199 . 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser. watch the listening dimensions. Next. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. Notice that the connectors display after you place the boiler.

click File menu ➤ Save. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. 22 Click OK. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.Piping to make it the active view. During this exercise. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. 24 In the Save As dialog. and double-click 2 . and click Save. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. In this exercise. Unlike logical connections (systems). enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. and then create the logical connection between these system components. and click Element Properties. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. verify that 230 GPM is set for Max Flow. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click the boiler.20 In the drawing area. click System Browser. then press F9. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. click in the drawing area to make it active. 23 If you want to save your work. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. under Type Parameters. you create the supply and return piping systems. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Open the i Creating Piping Systems. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. click the Training Files icon. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. 200 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. analyses cannot be performed. If the System Browser does not respond. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. In the next exercise. After creating the logical connection.

Notice that after you click . As you assign radiators to systems. after you placed the radiators and boiler. Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator. right-click. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 6 On the Options Bar. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. All level 2 radiators display in red. and select the boiler to assign Creating the Piping Systems | 201 . 7 On the Options Bar. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. click (Create Hydronic Supply System). click it to the supply system. and click Select All Instances. (Select Equipment for System). They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. if all system components are assigned. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. Thus. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. So.

This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. This display indicates that the new system is selected. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. all other components are unavailable. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. and click Select to select the system. the boiler (the parent) to downstream. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. you create the return piping system. press Tab. The organization is from upstream. 202 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Next. Thus.TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. and select the system. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Notice that you can select only valid system components.

and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. 9 On the Options Bar. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. (Select Equipment for System). 11 The return system displays in red. These listings represent the systems that you just created. So. and select the boiler to assign TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. and cleared from the Options Bar.Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. 10 On the Options Bar. expand Piping. and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. 13 Right-click each category. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. Creating the Piping Systems | 203 . Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. click it to the return system. right-click. Notice that (Create Hydronic Supply System) does not display because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area.

Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. 1 In the Project Browser. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. and click Select. you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. and double-click 2 . In a later exercise. In this exercise. Now that you logically connected the piping system components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Piping to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. Open the i Creating Pipe Runs. navigate to the folder of your choice. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. in the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. 17 If you want to save your work. 204 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 18 In the Save As dialog. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. or even without pipe being drawn. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. and click Save. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection.

Creating Pipe Runs | 205 . you can place the cursor over a radiator. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Filter dialog. Then. the boiler. and then select Mechanical Equipment.Piping view range highlight. This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components. and click OK. click Check None. click Layout Path.Notice that all components that are in the 2 . TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 3 On the Options Bar. press Tab to highlight the system and select it. The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). the return system that logically connects the components display in red.Piping view). Notice that the radiators. (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 . The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open.

7 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. verify that Solutions is selected. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. Enter 1 0 for Inset. You can select each system in the dialog to view it. ■ Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. 6 In the Select a System dialog. It does not reference the architecture. You will need to select a system to create the layout. The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. then the Select a System dialog will open. The system displays in red. select Hydronic Supply 1 and click OK. ■ Click (Next Solution). 8 On the Options Bar. This option slopes the entire pipe layout.IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and select solution 4 of 4. ■ 206 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. duct. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. Next. you create the supply pipe run 1 foot from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). refer to Help. and other obstacles. Enter -1 3 for Offset. 14 Click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Branch. Using this inset. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. click Settings. Later in this exercise. This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 10' 9" in the level 1 plenum space. 12 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 10 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 11 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. you now modify the layout path. After configuring the pipe conversion settings.The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. structural beams. Creating Pipe Runs | 207 . or architecture. Enter -1' 3" for Offset. For more information. verify that Main is selected. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 13 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run.

208 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . The layout path is located under the radiators. 17 Using the drag control.Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 15 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. zoom the view. click Modify. 16 In the drawing area. drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as the layout path. You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. A drag control displays.

19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. TIP Use the Ctrl key to select both the main and the branch line.18 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings Creating Pipe Runs | 209 . click Finish Layout. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise. Ignore the no auto-route solution warning.

This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. Change the geometry display 20 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 201. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. 210 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . For example. Either relocate the system components. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. and is not part of the system. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. select a different layout solution. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.are automatically inserted. or offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.

22 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. To turn off hidden lines. This is caused by the hidden line setting. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. Creating Pipe Runs | 211 . click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. If a pipe is hidden by an object. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. In the Mechanical Settings dialog.Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. 21 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). select Fine for Detail Level.

On the View Control Bar. Next. 25 Press Delete to delete the selection. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. 24 Place the cursor over the pipe. Modify the pipe run 23 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run.TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. and click to select them. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. Instead of moving the pipe. or Fine for 2-line pipe display. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. The design requires 2 zones. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. select Coarse for single line display. Additionally. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. 212 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Medium for 2-line duct display. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 1 inch diameter. So.

26 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and click to select it. The diameter of the main and branches change to 1 inch. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. 27 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe). or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 1" indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). If the pipes had different diameters. 29 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. select 1" for D: (diameter). and click Modify on the Design Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. 30 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. the diameter Creating Pipe Runs | 213 . Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. the logical connection (or system) is still intact. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run.Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. Next. width. you modify the supply pipe run diameter.

Check connectivity 31 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. 214 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . then you know that a disconnect exists.would not display. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. fittings. 32 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Next. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. and equipment. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. press Tab 3 times. The first time you press Tab. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. If the entire network does not highlight.

Select Perimeter solution 4. 33 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run. This places the pipes at a 10' 3" elevation in the level 1 plenum space.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted.Piping view. create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system. Creating Pipe Runs | 215 . and enter -1' 9" for both the main and branch offsets. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. This allows you to better see disconnects. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . Next. you create the return pipe run. Enter 2' 0" for Inset. Create the level 2 return pipe run 34 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. For pipe conversion settings. you can click to select them.

Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. navigate to the folder of your choice. Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. click File menu ➤ Save. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. 35 If you want to save your work. Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 1". modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path.■ In the Layout Path tool. 216 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 36 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. Use the same method to correct any disconnects. Remember. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run.

Piping to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. Resolving Pipe Interference | 217 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. converted fittings.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. You checked connectivity. 1 In the Project Browser. corrected disconnects. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise. and double-click 2 .In this exercise. Open the i Resolving Pipe Interference.

After you add the section. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. and the second click specifies the section tail. click Zoom in Region.Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. 5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. 218 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell and click to specify the section head location. The first click specifies the section head. and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell. click Section.

6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell. click Modify.A new section view named Section 3 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. Resolving Pipe Interference | 219 . 7 On the Design Bar. NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above.

11 On the View Control Bar. under Graphics. 8 In the Project Browser. select Fine for Detail Level. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 3 view. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section).The section head and tail display. select Piping for Sub Discipline. and click Properties. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 220 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . right-click Section 3. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. The section relocates under Piping. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges.

17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active.The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase.Piping to make it the active view. place the cursor over the top connector. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase. These connectors connect to the tee fittings. 14 Zoom in on the stairwell. and other aspects of your systems design. TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. 16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting. Resolving Pipe Interference | 221 . They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. Next. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . and after the connectors display. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. mechanical equipment placement. The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run.

23 Watch the listening dimensions. NOTE When modifying pipe. 19 Zoom out. release the mouse button to reconnect it. 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to the area outside the stairwell as shown. you split the supply pipe segment. and after the fitting end point snap displays. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. 21 On the Edit toolbar. click (Split). This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe. fittings. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. Next. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. always connect to pipe segments. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. 222 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting.18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. and select the return pipe segment again. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. and click to split the pipe approximately as shown. If you split the pipe. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell.

This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. and draw the pipe around the stairs. 25 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase. 26 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. Next. and press Delete to delete it. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. 24 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. Resolving Pipe Interference | 223 . Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. Zoom out the view. you convert a tee fitting.

right-click and select Delete. not vertical. 30 Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. orientation. and after the end point connector snap displays. On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. The new tee has a horizontal. and then select the two adjacent pipes to add an elbow. and move the cursor to the left. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. 31 In the Type Selector.27 Select the tee. 33 Zoom out the view. 224 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 29 Select the elbow and click on the upper plus (+) sign to convert the elbow to a tee. and then click Modify. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. click Pipe to open the Draw tool. 28 Select Trim. 32 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted.

34 Draw the pipe 12’ 0" to the left outside the stairwell. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. 35 Draw the pipe down. NOTE When drawing pipe. 36 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right. click to specify the segment end point. Resolving Pipe Interference | 225 . click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. and after the connector snap displays. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing.

38 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors.The return pipe run is connected as shown. 226 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 37 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool. 39 Right-click the lower connector. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.

and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe. The section displays in red.This activates the Draw tool. 41 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. However. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. If necessary. or width and height. the pipe diameter. NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. The amount of movement that these keys provide depends upon the zoom factor. Optional: Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 42 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). Resolving Pipe Interference | 227 . and adjust the view clip planes as shown. use the arrow keys to move pipes to the exact location required. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. 40 In the Type Selector. 43 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell.

52 Using the methods that you learned. NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. 44 Press ESC. 45 On the View Control Bar. and double-click the section head to open the section view. you may get a false positive result. watch the listening dimensions. 49 On the Edit toolbar. Otherwise. you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section. and split the supply pipe at 12' 0" from its left connector.Piping to make it the active view. click (Split). 228 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 47 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . 50 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe. you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. 51 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 5' 0" from its left connector.Although this section was used for air systems. 46 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. 48 Zoom in on the stairwell. select Fine for Detail Level. modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown.

Remember to watch for connector snaps. 53 Again. Resolving Pipe Interference | 229 .You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. using the methods that you learned. draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown.

and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. 1 In the Project Browser. 55 If you want to save your work. navigate to the folder of your choice. 230 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. click File menu ➤ Save. In the left pane of the Open dialog. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). In this exercise. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. and click Save. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. diameter (or width and height).54 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. click the Training Files icon. Remember that after you create pipe. 56 In the Save As dialog. (2) Connect to a snap. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. the pipe type is also matched. Using these 2 methods. Using Create Similar. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. Draw. you used the Split. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. preferably a connector snap. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). Open the i Connecting Boiler. the start point. In the next exercise.rvtfile located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. Then. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. and offset are automatically specified.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. the active view is tiled to the left. Note that if this option is unavailable. Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler. 3 In the Project Browser. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Connecting the Boiler | 231 . TIP When tiling 2 views. Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.Piping to make it the active view.Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. 7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. and double-click 2 . You will design in the 2 .Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. the active view is the only open window. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 7 feet from level 1. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at approximately 1' 6" from the boiler connection. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 10 In the Type Selector.8 Zoom in on the boiler. watch the listening dimensions. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. 13 On the Options Bar. and after the connector snap displays. click Pipe. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 14 Move the cursor to the left. 232 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Enter -5 0 for Offset. click to specify the first pipe segment start point.

TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). In a later exercise. 10' 9" from level 1. you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. and click to specify the end point. zoom the view and try again. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar. Remember to always use a semi-colon (. 15 Draw the pipe up to 3’ 0". Connecting the Boiler | 233 . after listening dimensions display. enter -1 3 for Offset.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser. TIP When drawing pipe. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension. 16 On the Options Bar.) to separate snap increments.

and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. release the mouse button to connect to it. 234 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors. click to specify the pipe segment end point. The boiler supply connector pipe is created. and after the connector snap displays.17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe.

22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab.The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view. Connecting the Boiler | 235 .

click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 236 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 26 Use the selection tool to draw a box around the tee to select it. 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler.Next. 27 Click on the lower of the two plus (+) signs to convert the elbow to a horizontal tee. 24 With the windows tiled. you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run.

Connecting the Boiler | 237 .Piping view to make it active. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 34 Draw the pipe up. 31 In the Type Selector. The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. and the start point is automatically specified. select the tee to display the connectors. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. Verify that -5' 0" is specified for Offset. and after listening dimensions display. 33 Draw the pipe 2' 0" to the right and click to specify the segment end point. right-click the right connector. 30 Zoom in on the tee. 29 Click in the 2 .28 In the 3D Piping view. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. enter 3 0 and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 32 On the Options Bar.

This creates a 1 foot pipe segment. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. you will place a circulator pump on this segment. In a later exercise. 35 On the Options Bar. click to specify the end point. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 36 With the Draw tool activated. 37 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. 38 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run. connect the right supply pipe run. 238 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . enter -1 3 for Offset.

39 Check connectivity. 40 Validate the pipe geometry. Connecting the Boiler | 239 .The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler.

click the specify the end point. 43 In the Type Selector.Next. verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter). Optional: Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 41 With the windows tiled. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and click Draw Pipe. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 10' 3" from level 1. 44 On the Options Bar. and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. and enter 0 4 and press Enter. and the 2 . This places the return connection 10 inches above level 1. and that Auto Connect is selected. 42 Select the boiler. zoom in on the boiler. enter -1 9 for Offset. and right-click the return connector. you draw a 6 inch pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. 45 Move the cursor up. Next. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run. 240 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 47 Draw the pipe to the left.Piping the active view. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -11' -2" from level 2. 46 On the Options Bar.

48 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. Connecting the Boiler | 241 . and after the connector snap displays. click to connect to the left return pipe run.

The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. 49 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. 242 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 52 Select the tee fitting. convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls. 51 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the right connector. and click to specify the end point. 50 Zoom in on the boiler. 53 Draw the pipe 1' 0" to the right.

54 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. Connecting the Boiler | 243 . click to specify the end point.

244 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .55 Using the method that you learned. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed. drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe. The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 57 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting. 56 Click Modify on the Design Bar. The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe.

Piping view. 59 With the 2 . First. in the 2 . and then you select the point to align. If the Tools toolbar is not available. Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes. 60 On the Tools toolbar.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. 61 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe. Next. click to specify the alignment reference point.58 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. click (Align). and after highlights. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes. click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. select the reference point where you want to align. Connecting the Boiler | 245 . IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process.

NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return. click to specify the point to align. 246 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 62 Move the cursor over the left return pipe. and after the centerline highlights.

The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.

63 Using the alignment method you just learned, align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe.

64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool.

Connecting the Boiler | 247

The aligned return pipes are as shown. Notice that the return pipe runs also are parametrically adjusted. This situation results because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that you aligned.

65 Place the cursor below the tee fitting, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.

66 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

248 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. 67 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 68 In the Save As dialog, enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Finally, you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. In the next exercise, you size the supply and return piping runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods
You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. Next, you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler, and after it highlights, press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler, and click to select them.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 249

The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red.

3 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter 2.50 FT/100ft. Select And, and enter 8 FPS for Velocity. Under Constraints, select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Size is cleared. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. Click OK.

The sized pipe runs are sized. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing.

250 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry.

8 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the Save As dialog, enter Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. In the next exercise, you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 251

Placing Circulator Pumps
In this exercise, you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing Circulator Pumps.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.

Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.

You place the pumps in the 2 - Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. 7 On the Edit toolbar, click (Split).

8 Watch the listening dimensions, and make 2 splits on the left pipe 0' 3" from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown.

252 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting.

9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. The selected pipe segment displays in red. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted.

12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 13 In the Type Selector, select In-line Circulator : Standard. 14 Place the cursor between the pipe openings and click to place the circulator pump. 15 Select the pump and click Rotate on the toolbar. 16 Flip the pump so that the motor is on the left. 17 Click Align on the toolbar and select the middle of the pipe above and the middle of the circulator connector. NOTE You must align the pump correctly in order to connect it to the pipes above and below.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 253

18 TIP If you need to reposition the circulator pump, drag the pump away from the pipe, and then move it over the pipe opening, and watch for the centerline snaps. You can also use the cursor keys or the Move tool for precise placement. 19 Press ESC twice. 20 In the 3D Piping view, notice that the pump is not located near the selection point.

Actually, the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. You need to specify the pump offset. 21 In the 2 - Piping view, click the pump. The selected pump displays in red. 22 On the Options Bar, click .

You can also right-click the pump, and select Element Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -5 0 for Offset. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value, click the pipe segment. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset.

254 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

24 Click OK. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment.

If the pump remains selected, click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Next, you connect the pump. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. To clear the selection, you can click in the drawing area, click Modify on the Design Bar, or press ESC. 25 In the 2 - Piping view, click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. 26 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump, and after the connector snap displays, release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump.

Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. 27 Press ESC to clear the selection.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 255

28 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above.

After connecting the pump, you need to check connectivity. 29 Place the cursor over the pump, and press TAB. The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

30 Using the methods that you just learned, connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe, and check connectivity. Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.

Next, you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.

256 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

31 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 32 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view.

33 Click the left pump to display rotation controls.

34 Click the rotation control on the right.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 257

The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.

35 Using the method that you just learned, rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. The in-line circulator pumps are rotated.

Assign the pumps to the supply system 36 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser. You can also press F9. 37 In the System Browser, do the following:
■ ■

Expand the Unassigned folder. Expand the Piping folder, right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system.

Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. As you learned in previous exercises, you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment, and so on) that you placed to a system. Immediately after placement, Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. These unassigned components are located

258 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. After you assign the components to a system, they move to their respective system folder. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. 38 In the 3D Piping view, select the left supply pipe riser.

System tools display on the Options Bar. TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar.

39 On the Options Bar, click

(Edit System).

The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

NOTE Do not click . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system, such as VAV boxes, boilers and AC units. If you use this tool, the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. 40 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 41 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 259

Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. 42 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System. 43 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 44 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar, and by clicking the rotation controls. Finally, you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. In the next exercise, you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure.

Inspecting Piping Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector, you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. 4 Select the boiler. System tools appear on the Options Bar. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. NOTE To select a system, select any pipe segment, fitting, mechanical equipment, and so on that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, click

(Inspect).

6 In the Select a System dialog, select Hydronic Supply 1, and click OK. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler, the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect.

260 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector activates, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number, flow, and pressure information including pressure loss. A tooltip also displays this system information. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. As you inspect, notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump, and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment.

Inspecting Piping Systems | 261

11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps, click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected, double-click the 3D Piping view, and inspect a fin-tube radiator.

Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector.

262 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 16 Using the methods that you learned, use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 17 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 18 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction, flow, and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you check the piping systems.

Checking Piping Systems
Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure, and for pipe sizing. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design, you need to validate them. In this exercise, you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project, and quickly target those systems that need attention. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Checking Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, double-click the 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Check Pipe Systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. A warning appears, but does apply to the piping system. The piping system is logically and physically valid. However, check system warnings may occur. As a tutorial exercise, you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems. Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.”

Checking Piping Systems | 263

4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system, the pipe is now associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations, and for pipe sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators, all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus assigning the components to a system. After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. For example, you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser, the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. Next, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. Then, you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. Next, you confirm the system component assignments. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. Because you assigned all piping components, you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. 9 Right-click Default Return Air, and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components.

264 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The red lines represent the default logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.

TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views, otherwise, click Close. 10 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems, you confirm the piping system assignments. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 12 In the System Browser, collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply, and click Expand All. The supply system that you created, Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler, fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number.

Checking Piping Systems | 265

and fin-tube radiators. click File menu ➤ Save. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. In this tutorial. 17 In the Save As dialog. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. it is a valid system without problems. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. circulator pumps. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. and click Save.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. Finally. For pipe offset. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe 266 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. and section views. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings. In the lesson. 15 Using the methods that you learned. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. the creation and modification methods remained the same. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. navigate to the folder of your choice. For additional practice. Design the system in the 1 . you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. Depending on your air systems design. specify 9' 9" for the supply and 9' 3" for the return pipe offset elevation. 3D. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. 16 If you want to save your work. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. In this exercise. a boiler.

connections and creating logical systems. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. parametrically modify those designs. Checking Piping Systems | 267 . This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling).rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2009. The completed mechanical systems are included in the i Completed Mechanical Systems. Explore different system designs.

268 .

However. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. After finishing each exercise. However. you learn to create electrical systems using a linked architectural model of a building project. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. go to http://www. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Planning Electrical Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. if the link is lost. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. If the tutorial datasets are not present. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and select i Office Building.Electrical Systems 6 In this tutorial. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems.autodesk.rvt. 269 . Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. click Reload From. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system. you can choose to save your work.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and create schedules that you will need to design the electrical systems for your project. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. In this lesson you specify electrical settings. In this tutorial.

Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Electrical Views. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. For this reason. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in spaces are above the ceiling level. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. and ceiling plans for each have been prepared by duplicating architectural views. then applying the appropriate template to each plan: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. Later. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. Lighting. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. wiring. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan. click the Training Files icon.The electrical settings determine the voltages. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Insulation Max Size Value CU-THWN Copper 75 THWN 500 270 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and in the right pane. 3 Click Wiring Types. click Add (below the table). and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design.rvt. wiring. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. distribution systems. in the left pane. expand Wiring. For example. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures. power. and demand factors that are applied in the design. power distribution systems. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. in the Element Properties dialog for Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. has been set to 10' 6" for the building used with these exercises. the Limit Offset. and demand factors that you will use in your project. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families.

00 V 460. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions.00 V 200.Parameter Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value 1.00 V 480.00 V Minimum 110.00 V 240.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V.00 V 220. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 240 277 480 Value 120.00V 280.00 V 208.00 V 490. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition. For example.00V 260. By specifying a range.00 V 250.00V 277. click Voltage Definitions.00 V 220. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition.00 V Maximum 130.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 271 .

NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 120/240 Single 480/277 Wye Phase Three Single Three Configuration Wye None Wye Wires 4 3 4 L-L 208 240 480 L-G 120 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices. click Distribution Systems. you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480. even though this is physically impossible. 8 In the right pane. 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. 272 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . For example.

The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list. Red. at any given time. For this exercise.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load. For example. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting.000VA 3.000VA. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. leave the default settings as shown here.000VA 10. Power. You can specify one or more Demand Factors. HVAC. More Than and Less Than values define the range for the associated Demand Factor: ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads. 10 Click OK. Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. Preparing the Electrical Plan | 273 . or Other systems in your project based on their load. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3.NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4. 9 Click Demand Factors.000VA 10. this type of system (High. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage.000VA.

rfa Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .NEMA Type 2. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of spaces (offices. 19 Open the Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Fixtures folder and load the Troffer Corner Insert. and demand factors. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). and established the parameters for your wiring. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.rfa. and load Duplex Receptacle. Later. 13 Select Lighting Switches. 17 Using the same method. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. voltages. In this exercise.rfa.rfa family. expand Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Devices. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. An Electrical Fixtures ➤ Duplex Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design. As you loaded each of the component families. conference rooms. selected components for your electrical systems. expand Families. and load the following families: ■ ■ Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . because the key is linked to your new project parameter. in the Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. has also been added under Lighting Device. Defining Required Lighting Levels on page 274. restrooms. 16 In the Project Browser.rfa 18 Using the same method. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Transformer folder. 15 Click Open. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level.480V MCB . 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 274 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 14 Using the same method. 12 In the Open dialog.Surface. and load Dry Type Transformer . As an alternative.208V MLO . reopen Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. A Lighting Devices ➤ Lighting Switches folder. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans. you can load from the components from that location.rfa. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building.Load component families 11 NOTE The components used throughout this tutorial have been copied from the Imperial Library to the i families sub-folder. and so on). containing several switch types. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. distribution systems.480-208Y120 . and click Open. Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. In this case the key style is the type of space and. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Panelboard folder.Surface.

select Illuminance. you can look at the properties for one of the spaces. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 4 Click OK twice. select Electrical-Lighting. select Electrical. click to select the space. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the spaces within your project. For Type. enter Required Lighting Level for Name. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. The new parameter you have just created applies to all spaces in the project.Lighting to make it the active view. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. To verify this. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser.rvt. as described below. select Spaces. For Discipline. For Group. click the Training Files icon. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. move the cursor over the office in the upper-left corner. 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 275 . Under Categories. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Spaces under Electrical .Lighting in the Space Element Properties dialog. Under Parameter Data. double-click 1 .Open the provided dataset. click Add. and when the cross-hairs display. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Lighting Levels. Select Instance.

enter Lighting Levels. However. Click Schedule keys. ■ ■ ■ The Shedule Properties dialog displays. enter Space Lighting Requirements. click (Properties). and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. In the Element Properties dialog. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each space. there are many spaces in this project that have similar lighting requirements. The new rows are added with 1 through 8 as the default Key Names. 8 Click Cancel. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK.Lighting category. The key schedule displays in the drawing area. For Key Name. 276 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 12 Click OK. one for each type of space in the building. Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the space component. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. For Name.7 On the Options Bar. Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Spaces for Category. NOTE You can double-click column dividers to auto-fit column width to its content. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). click New 8 times to add 8 rows in the key schedule. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on space type. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each space type.

under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. and click Element Properties. according to the values in the following table: Space Type Private Office Open Office Main Entrance Lounge Restroom Conference Elec/Mech Stair/Circulation Required Lighting Level (fc) 30 45 45 25 30 35 20 20 When completed. 16 Zoom in on the large open area (not the main entrance) in the center of the floor plan. double-click the 1 . Defining Required Lighting Levels | 277 . In the Project Browser. scroll down to the Identity Data category. in the Element Properties dialog. click . right-click in the Space Lighting Requirements schedule.Enter a space type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of spaces in the project. and for Lighting Levels parameter. You can change the sort keys for the schedule.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. 17 Move the cursor over the space until a cross-hair displays. then right-click. the Key Schedule should looks like this: TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. Assign space keys to the spaces in the project 15 In the Project Browser. and select Open Office. click View Properties and.

While pressing Ctrl.Lighting 1 .Lighting category.19 Scroll up to the Electrical .Lighting 1 . The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Space Lighting Requirements key schedule.Lighting 1 . and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected spaces.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . 20 Click OK.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting. 21 Using the same method.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 45 fc. then open 2 . Office).Lighting Number 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 Name Office 101 Office 102 Office 103 Open 104 Mens Room 105 Elec/Mech 106 Ladies Room 107 Office 108 Office 109 Office 110 Office 111 Office 112 Office 113 Stairwell 114 Office 115 Office 116 Office 117 Key Name Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 278 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Lighting 1 . select multiple spaces of the same type (for example. continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in 1 . Level 1 .Lighting 1 . the value that you entered for this space type in the key schedule.Lighting 1 . then right-click one of the selections.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting and apply Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple spaces of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog.

Lighting 2 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels on page 280.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values Defining Required Lighting Levels | 279 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component.Lighting 2 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.Lighting 2 .Level 1 . In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the spaces in your project.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters.Lighting Number 121 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 Name Main Entrance 121 Office 201 Office 202 Office 203 Open 204 Mens Room 205 Elec/Mech 206 Ladies Room 207 Lounge 208 Office 209 Office 210 Office 211 Office 212 Stairwell 213 Conference Room 214 Office 215 Office 216 Key Name Main Entrance Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . For example.Lighting 2 . if required. you could create a key schedule named Space Variables.

280 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and click 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Space color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. For Space Type. click Edit/New. In this exercise you will create a space color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and place it in the drawing. click Color Scheme Legend. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Color Fills. and click OK. enter Required Lighting. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. select Spaces. for Title. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. for Name. select Required Lighting Level. For Color Scheme. selecting a space type for your new Space Variables parameter in a space’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. and click Element Properties. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ (Duplicate). 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. select Spaces for Category. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. select Underline. as described below. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans.according to space type. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the space components. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. select Required Lighting 10 Click OK. Under Title Text. 6 For Color. double-click the 1 . specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Consequently. select Show Title. click the Training Files icon.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click OK. 14 Click OK twice. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. Open the provided dataset. enter Required Lighting Levels.

Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project.5 fc range specified in the schedule. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. You can have more than one color scheme in the project. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 281 . Open the provided dataset.16 Make the 2 . 17 Using the same method. but only one per view. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for spaces.Lighting floor plan the active view. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each space against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. as described below. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect.Lighting. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 18 You can save the open file if you wish. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you create a space lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. activate the color scheme as you did for 1 . or for any parameter that you want to create for a space (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise).

select Number. click the Training Files icon. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. 282 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . select Electrical. For Name. enter Space Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Schedule Lighting Requirements. enter Average Estimated Illumination . 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. Create space lighting analysis schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. scroll down the Available fields list. For Discipline. For Type. select Spaces. Click OK. For Formula. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Calculated Value. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Illuminance. double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane Create a new schedule parameter 4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Lighting Delta. 2 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Verify that Ascending is selected.Required Lighting Level.

specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. select Not Between. verify that Fixed is selected. 19 You can save the open file if you wish. enter -5 fc and +5 fc in the text boxes. For Units. 15 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 13 Click OK twice. select 2 decimal places. 18 Click OK.8 On the Formatting tab. 17 Using the same method. under Basic colors. under Fields. 12 In the Color dialog. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 283 . select Lighting Delta. and click Field Format. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. For Rounding. click the red color chip. For Test. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Field. select Ceiling Reflectance. For Value. 14 On the Formatting tab. select Lighting Delta. 11 Click the Background Color chip. 16 Click OK. under fields. 9 Click Conditional Format.

rvt. click the Training Files icon. and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. and double-click Space Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. as described below. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each of the occupied spaces.5 fc range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. 284 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Open the provided dataset. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project. Floor Reflectance. expand Schedules/Quantities.20 Click File menu ➤ Close. electrical equipment. these spaces appear in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. Adding Lighting Fixtures In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. As a result. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Designing the Electrical System on page 284. you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each space’s lighting requirement. Average Estimated Lighting. there is no required lighting level specified. This is because the value is not within the +/. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you will create power and lighting circuits. NOTE Space components are placed in chases and plenums to permit reliable heating and cooling load analysis. and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. Name. and these areas will not be lighted. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. However. and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. NOTE Right-click a heading. As you select and place lighting fixtures. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Adding Lighting Fixtures. Only the Number. Once the equipment is in place. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the spaces as 0. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column. Wall Reflectance. Place the initial lighting fixture 1 In the Project Browser. and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. In this exercise. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance. and make connections to electrical equipment. Designing the Electrical System In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices.

6 In the Project Browser. click Lighting Fixture. and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. 8 In the 1 . double-click 1 . and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view. 11 With the cursor in the space in the upper-left corner of the plan. 9 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid.Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection. 7 On the Windows menu. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 285 . 10 In the Type Selector. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 3 Lamp.4 On the Windows menu.Ceiling Elec view. click Tile. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. click Close Hidden Windows. under Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. and arrange the windows as shown.

12 Click Modify. 286 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . select it. and on the Toolbar. click (Move). and click when Intersection displays. 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture. 15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture. click to specify the start point. and when Endpoint displays. 14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture.

18 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 287 .5 fc. and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of level 1. (Copy). select Multiple.In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. click 17 On the Options Bar. and on the toolbar. Copy and place additional lighting fixtures 16 Select the lighting fixture. the Lighting Delta for Office 101 is closer to the required +/. as shown.

If you select a component inadvertently. so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these spaces.Ceiling Elec. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. but is still not within the +/. 288 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 2Lamp. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each space with a 2-lamp fixture. To adjust the illumination level downward.Check the illumination levels against the Space Lighting Analysis schedule 19 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.5 fc range. The Average Estimated Illumination for Office 101. and in the Type Selector. 102. Point by point analysis is not currently supported. press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. and 103 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 30 fc. Change lighting fixture type 20 In 1 . select one of the lighting fixtures in each space.

Plenum and chase spaces will be blank. and go on to the next exercise. The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/. and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise.Ceiling Elec and 2 .5 fc range.Ceiling Elec views. Level 1 NOTE Lighting fixtures were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical spaces. Use the Space Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset. When you are finished. placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1 .21 Again. 22 Using the same method. only the Mechanical/Electrical spaces (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 289 . check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 should appear similar to those shown below along with the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.

and click Unhide All Columns. 290 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Level 2 23 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. right-click one of the headings.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. your Lighting Delta column for all of the spaces should be white. click in the Value column for Color Scheme. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected.Lighting to make it the active view. Open the provided dataset. right-click 1 . Place switches in spaces 6 In the Project Browser. Placing Lighting Switches on page 291. 10 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of space 101. under Schemes for the Spaces Category. In this exercise. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 24 You can save the open file if you wish. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. 9 On the Options Bar. click (none). 11 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the space as shown. click the Training Files icon. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Switches. and click to place the switch. double-click 1 . as described below. 5 Using the same method. you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans. 8 In the Type Selector. Placing Lighting Switches In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. 2 In the Element Properties dialog.With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole.Lighting. under Instance Parameters. 7 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. turn off the color scheme on level 2. click Device. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. and click Properties. 4 Click OK twice. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Turn off the color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. Placing Lighting Switches | 291 .

12 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining spaces in the 1 . 14 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. select Lighting Switches : Three Way. and in the Type Selector. 292 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Lighting view as shown. Level 1 13 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown. click Device.

as shown. 17 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown. Placing Lighting Switches | 293 . and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. select Lighting Switches : Four Way. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. 16 In the Type Selector.15 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan.

294 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown.Lighting to make it the active view. 22 Place a 3-way switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown. 20 In the Project Browser. 19 Click Modify. click Device. 21 On the Design Bar.18 In the open office area. and in the Type Selector. double-click 2 . select Lighting Switches : Three Way.

select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. click Device. as shown. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. 24 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise. and go on to the next exercise.23 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. in the Type Selector. and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown. On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. Placing Lighting Switches | 295 . placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset.

and click View Properties. click the Training Files icon. Hide lighting components and specify view ranges 2 Right-click in the drawing area. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 296 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Level 2 25 You can save the open file if you wish. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. as described below. Placing Power Receptacles on page 296. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.Power to make it the active view. Placing Power Receptacles In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. and double-click 1 . Open the provided dataset. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Receptacles.

Power. for Top. 16 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and edit the View Range to select Associated Level (Level 2). click Edit. 12 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 5 Click OK. 13 In the Type Selector. clear Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. scroll down to View Range. scroll down and. 8 Click OK twice. 14 On the Options Bar. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. 4 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. 15 In the left side of the plan. and for Offset. Placing Power Receptacles | 297 . Place wall-hosted receptacles 11 In the 1 . click Device. 7 In the View Range dialog. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. and click Edit. select Associated Level (Level 1). including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas. on the Model Categories tab. under Instance Parameters. place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown. 10 Using the same method. under Instance Properties. edit the Visibility/Graphics Overrides for the view to hide lighting fixtures and lighting devices. and click Properties. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. enter 10' 0".Power plan view. 9 In the Project Browser.3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Primary Range. and specify the top of the view range as 10' 0". right-click 2 .

1-Power 298 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

double-click 1 .Power. and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. click Device. 20 On the Options Bar. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. (Place on Work Plane). click for Plane. 19 In the Type Selector. Placing Power Receptacles | 299 . 18 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 21 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office.2-Power Place floor-hosted receptacles 17 In the Project Browser. and place a receptacle on the floor as shown. The current level is selected by default.

its connector is located below the level of the work plane. In the next steps. click (Copy). as shown. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles along the right side of the Level 1 open office. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles. 23 Select the receptacle and click plane (within the space). When placing a receptacle on a work plane. 27 Draw a pick box around the 4 floor-based receptacles. (Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the work 25 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. 24 On the Toolbar. click . 26 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point. you will flip the work plane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the work plane. select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure. This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures.22 Click Modify. and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor. as shown. it is important that the connector be within the space to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. 300 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

select Multiple 29 Using the previous procedure. . and click on the Options Bar.28 Draw a pick box around the 2 floor-based receptacles. and to the left of the men’s restroom. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles below. as shown. as shown. Placing Power Receptacles | 301 .

Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports on page 303. click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. TIP You can select all of the floor-hosted receptacles in the 1 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.Power view. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. Select all 1 . 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. 302 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . then copy and paste them in the 2 . and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. open 2 .30 Using the same procedure.Power as shown. place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2 .Power.Power floor receptacles.Power view. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.

Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Usage Reports. under Available Fields. and select Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A schedule is created similar to the one shown. enter Power & Lighting Usage. select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area 6 Click OK. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components. click the Training Files icon. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. scroll down the Category list. With the introduction of local energy codes. you can refer to this report rather than having to measure spaces and count fixtures. Open the provided dataset. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. as described below. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports | 303 . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. and for Name. because it is quite common in Revit MEP. 2 In the New Schedule dialog.In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected. 4 Click OK. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces.rvt.

Placing Electrical Equipment on page 304. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. 304 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). and work toward the higher voltage. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review.7 You can save the open file if you wish. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). 8 Click File menu ➤ Close.

enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. select 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : 45kVA. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. select 480/277 Wye.Open the provided dataset. 4 In the Type Selector. scroll down the Instance Parameters and.Power. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. click Modify and select the panel you just placed. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical space between the 2 restrooms. select 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click the Training Files icon. Add a transformer 10 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. as described below. click Electrical Equipment. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to the Electrical . and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical space to the right of the panel as shown. Right-click the panel. for Distribution Sys.rvt. 5 On the Design Bar. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected. 6 On the Options Bar. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Electrical Equipment. and click to place the panel as shown. and double-click 1 . under Electrical . 3 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. under Instance Parameters. click Element Properties.Loads category. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. 11 In the Type Selector. select Electrical Equipment. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 9 Click OK. Placing Electrical Equipment | 305 . click . and for Panel Name.Loads.Surface : 250A.

For Panel Name. and on the Options Bar. 306 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and for Panel Name. under Instance Parameters. select 480/277 Wye. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. for Distribution Sys. 23 Click OK. enter T1. scroll down to the Electrical .Surface : 100A. click . 21 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. under Instance Parameters. select 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and on the Options Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter. Since this is a transformer. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click OK.Loads category. click . 20 Select the panel you just placed. Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar.12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. enter L-1.Loads category. 18 In the Type Selector. select 120/208 Wye. select 120/208 Wye. scroll down to the Electrical . and place the panel to the right of the transformer. 19 Click Modify. select Electrical Equipment. for Distribution Sys.

and select panel H-2 for Panel. 26 On the Options Bar. The temporary circuit displays Placing Electrical Equipment | 307 . . 29 Select the transformer T2. click (Create Power Circuit). . click as shown. The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer. Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. 28 On the Options Bar. A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit. select panel L-2.Surface : 100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. In this case you are going to select something other than a panel. select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer. including the Secondary Distribution System for T2.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method. and click 30 On the Options Bar. 27 Click (Select Panel). add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical space in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Surface : 250A named H-2 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: 45kVA named T2 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel.

and click 39 Click . 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. and on the Options Bar. 37 Close the 2-Power view. select the H-2 panel. . 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces side-by-side. and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. 38 On the Options Bar. .31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. 34 In the 2-Power view. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. select the L-1 panel. and select the T1 transformer as the panel. click . and select the MDP panel. The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. click 35 On the Option Bar. 308 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

and data systems. . Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Circuits are used for power. and click 41 On the Options Bar. 44 Proceed to the next exercise.40 Select the T1 transformer. lighting. Creating Power Circuitry on page 309. and select the MDP panel. Creating Power Circuitry | 309 . as described below. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. 42 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click . Open the provided dataset.

5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner office. The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. For now. load (180 VA).Power to make it the active view. and voltage (120 V). Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit.rvt. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. 3 While pressing Ctrl. 4 On the Options Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 310 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit. click . and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1). 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan.■ Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Power Circuitry. select all the receptacles in the corner office. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1 . leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit.

The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). and click to select the circuit again. NOTE When all of the devices for the circuit have their distribution system specified as instance parameters. and press Tab. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the office. Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. press Tab. click for this circuit.A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. the Specify Circuit Information dialog is displayed. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner office so that it is highlighted. You use the Specify Circuit Information to specify the distribution system parameters for the circuit. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating Power Circuitry | 311 . and select panel L-1 as the panel NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar. 6 Click Modify.

1-#6. The editable parameters. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. which are the wire sizes for the load. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. 1-#12. 12 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. and ground wiring. 1-#12. click (Edit Circuit). 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter.10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. The currently specified values are 1-#12. Wire Type and Rating. respectively for this circuit. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. 312 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 1-#10. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. When editing a circuit. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. change the value from 20A to 50A. will be discussed in a later exercise. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. 11 On the Options Bar. neutral. all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. click (Circuit Properties).

and add it to panel L-1. and try to select panel L-1. as previously described. Creating Power Circuitry | 313 . If you select L-1 in the drawing. and then select panel L-1. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. and select panel L-1. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown. 22 Click OK. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. click . zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. . and click Element Properties. 25 On the Options Bar. and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. click The circuit is created. 16 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. click . creating power circuits. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1.Loads category. click . and assigning them to panel L-1 on a space-by-space basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building. 26 Continue creating circuits. Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. 24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. These will be connected in a later exercise. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to the Electrical . 19 Close the warning message. click . 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. click Cancel.15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. under Instance Parameters. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well.

Adding wiring to a project is optional. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. Increase the number of circuits on panel L-2 to 18. 28 Double-click 1 . 29 Select the L-1 panel. These will be connected in a later exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). and on the Options Bar. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. In the Edit Circuits dialog.Power view and assign them to panel L-2. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 314 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 30 Click OK. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits. Finally. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires on page 314. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits.27 Using the same procedures. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. create circuits in the 2 . As you saw in the previous exercise. In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. you have assigned only 17.Power to make it the active view.

re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. enter 3' 0" Under View Depth. select Associated Level. for View Range. select Electrical Lighting Plan.Lighting. 8 In the Apply View Template dialog. double-click 1 . 13 In the Filter dialog. Click 3 In the right pane. for Level. enter 3' 0" 5 Click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. under Names. and click OK. for Top. enter Electrical Lighting Plan. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and in the New View Template dialog.Lighting to make it the active view. and click Apply View Template. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. 6 Scroll down to Sub-Discipline. and for Offset. in the Value column. and for Offset. and click OK. under View Properties. click the Training Files icon. select Electrical Plan . Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected. Create an Electrical Lighting Plan template for Lighting Views 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 315 . right-click 1 . 4 In View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 7 In the Project Browser. enter -1' 0" For Bottom. 10 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. and for Offset. select Lighting. select Level Above. 11 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ For Show Type. click Edit in the Value column. click (Filter). and click OK. as shown. select <all>. Create lighting circuits 9 In the Project Browser.rvt. For Names. click Check None to clear all the check boxes. as described below.Open the provided dataset. select Associated Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans.

16 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown. click . This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation.14 On the Options Bar. 316 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 15 Close the message window and.

you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 317 . Splined wiring is similar to arc. select Wires. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. 20 On the Options Bar. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. when you create wiring manually. ceilings. ground) in the wire run. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. Later. When creating wires. Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. but with an additional vertex. or floors. In the next steps. click . Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 19 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. and click the switch to select the switches. neutral.17 On the Options Bar. and then select panel MDP as the panel for the . click circuit. This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. you can specify splined wiring. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. click (Filter). 21 In the Filter dialog. In this step. press Tab. click Check None. as in this step. click . lighting fixtures. and click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. you created arc type wiring.

27 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. and one ground conductor). click . and click OK. scroll down to the Electrical . 26 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the open office and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. When this occurs. 28 Create permanent wiring for each circuit. for Hot Conductors. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. and click OK.Loads category. under Instance Parameters.22 On the Options Bar. enter 2 as the value. right-click the MDP panel. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Mech/Elec space. and assign each circuits to panel MDP. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 318 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and click Element Properties. change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 22. enter 2. 24 Using the same method. one neutral conductor. and click OK.

31 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2. 30 Right-click panel H-2. and restrooms in the 2 . scroll down to the Electrical . These will be connected in a later exercise.Lighting view. 32 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices.29 For more practice. lounge. Otherwise. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 319 . assign the circuit to panel H-2. under Instance Parameters. Creating Switch Systems on page 320. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1 . and click OK. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. and in the Element Properties dialog. and assign each circuit to panel H-2.Loads category. then creating lighting circuits in 2 . conference room.Lighting view.Lighting. NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18.

and specify switch IDs for switches. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. as described below. 1 In the Project Browser. and panel information. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create a space schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs. fixtures. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Switch Systems. After creating the switch systems on Level 1. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires. assign lighting fixtures to switches. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.rvt. Creating Switch Systems on page 320.33 You can save the open file if you wish. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. Open the provided dataset. and double-click 1 .Lighting to make it the active view. 320 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. but does not prevent you from doing so.

click (Filter) to select only the lighting fixtures. After creating the switch system. on the Options Bar. you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. 4 Click (Select Switch for System). Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding switches). ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. (Edit Switch System). and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. and click to select everything in the system. click Finish to confirm your selections. press Tab. click The Switch System toolbar is activated. and on the Options Bar. Creating Switch Systems | 321 . you can highlight one of the lighting fixtures. With Multiple selected on the Options Bar. Then. When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. click (Create Switch System). click Multiple. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures.2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). 5 With the switch system still selected. select The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. 3 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Switch System toolbar. (Remove From System). TIP Because all of the lighting fixtures in the open office are part of the same lighting system.

click Finish. and click OK. (Select Switch). The Number of Fixtures field now displays 27 fixtures remaining in the system. click .1st Floor. 322 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms.West. 9 Click (Switch Properties). (Switch Properties). 8 On the Options Bar. click outside the ladies’ restroom. for Switch ID. enter Main Entrance . enter North Stairwell . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. The Switch ID is updated on the Options Bar. 15 Click 16 Click . and select the switch on the wall 14 On the Switch System toolbar. under Instance Properties. 11 On the Switch System toolbar. for Switch ID. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. under Instance Properties. click Finish. and click OK.7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms.

enter Space Number. Verify that Ascending is selected. and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. Click OK. and on the Options Bar. 20 Click . 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. For Name. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. Creating Switch Systems | 323 . and restrooms in the 1 . select Spaces. scroll down the Available fields list. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. and for Heading. select Number from the Fields list. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 26 On the Formatting tab. click .Lighting view. 21 Using the same method. click Finish. select Number. enter Switch Systems. stairwell. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties.18 On the Switch System toolbar. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.

Lighting view. continue creating switch systems in the 2 . double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the space containing that system. 30 For more practice. conference room. Specify Open Area .28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. scroll down the Available fields list. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. 324 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .2nd Floor for the switch ID. The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. restrooms. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. Otherwise. Create separate systems for the lounge. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. and private offices. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise.

3 In the corner office. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. click the Training Files icon. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 325 . move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit. generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining spaces along the left side of the plan. 2 Zoom in on the office at the upper-left corner of the plan. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. as described below. Open the provided dataset.Power to make it the active view. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. 5 Using the same method. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 1 . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.

326 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and delete both home runs. click Wire. 10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top office to specify the start point for the wire. 8 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper offices are visible.6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper offices. verify that (Arced Wire) is selected.

11 Click in the open area near the door for the office to specify the second point for the wire. 12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle office to specify the endpoint for the wire. as shown. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 327 .

NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. your layout should look similar to the following: Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel. if necessary. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the 328 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . when the wiring is completed. and using the same method. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower offices. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run. When completed. 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower offices are visible. The direction will be corrected.

and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. In the previous steps. 14 Click Modify. select Insert Vertex. a shared neutral.number of hot conductors. 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower office as shown. drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector. as the circuits in each office was added to the wiring run. and a shared safety ground). Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower office. 17 Right click the wire run. and click. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 329 .

Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference. adjusting its shape according to the vertex location. or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise. 19 For additional practice. you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1 .Power views. Completed 1-Power 330 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Power and 2 .Vertices let you route wires in your project views. The wire behaves like a spline.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 1 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Checking Your Design. 1 In the Project Browser. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises.Power to make it the active view. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows. Open the provided dataset. click the Training Files icon. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. In this exercise. Checking Your Design | 331 .rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. Checking Your Design on page 331. as described below. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs.

and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 5 Right-click a column heading. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. release the mouse button. and click Select. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. 7 In the System Browser. 4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser.2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner office is visible. and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. 332 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 8 In the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. 6 Right-click a column heading in the System Browser. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser.

This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. collapse Power. and expand Unassigned. The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP).Power.Lighting views and close any windows. Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 1. a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. Checking Your Design | 333 .Lighting and 2 . 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area.The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1 . 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. 10 Open the 1 . and 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 2.

click create permanent wiring.Lighting view have not yet been connected. clear Multiple. press Tab several times. to 334 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 17 On the Edit Circuits toolbar.The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2 . click to select the circuit.Lighting view. and on the Options Bar. until the power circuit is previewed. 13 In the 1 . click 15 On the Options Bar. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. click Finish. and on the Options Bar. 14 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2. 16 Click the title bar of the 2 . (Add to Circuit). You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level. 18 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. click . select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. In the System Browser.Lighting view.

select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. . 22 Click . and in the Mechanical/Electrical space. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. and click OK. under Instance Parameters. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. select Wires.Lighting view. 19 In the 1 . Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 24 In the Project Browser. for Hot Conductors. enter 2. press Tab. In the System Browser. click Check None. and click OK. select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. 20 On the Options Bar. click the title bar of the 2 . 21 In the Filter dialog.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. Checking Your Design | 335 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog.Lighting view. click . click 27 On the Options Bar. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible. 26 On the Options Bar. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. 25 In the drawing area. select panel L-1.

28 Click to create permanent wiring. 336 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category. Check Circuits 30 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.29 Using the same method. 32 Click to view details of the warning. create a power circuit for the 6 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view. 31 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. click Check Circuits. 33 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. Checking Your Design | 337 .

then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes.Power. 338 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Finally. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. as described below.This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. Open the provided dataset. In this exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 34 Close the Warning dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. Defining Circuit Loads on page 338. 36 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. and double-click 2 . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Circuit Loads. In the Project Browser. 35 You can save the open file if you wish. click the Training Files icon.

4320 VA). B. select panel L-2. Examination of the loads on Phase A. 5 Click OK.4500 VA. while Phase A provides 4860 VA.2 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. 3 On the Options Bar. and Phase C . and Phase C provides 3780 VA. Phase B 4860 VA. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 5040 VA on Phase B. 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. click Rebalance Loads. click . Defining Circuit Loads | 339 . The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A .

select the T1 transformer. 340 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and on the Options Bar. The 3 circuits that feed panel H-2 present a load of 18844 VA. double-click 1 .Power view. 12 Click OK. and the T1 transformer. The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. for panel H-2. enter 100A for the Trip value. click . the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. The remaining circuits feed the lighting circuits on Level 1. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 10 Select panel MDP.6 Select panel H-2. 14 In the Type Selector. the H-2 panel. you can use a 30kVA transformer. and present a load 6496 VA. you may see different values for the loads. After the loads are balanced. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. and present a load of 12960 VA. the actual load connected to it (12960 VA) is less than 15kVA. click 8 In the Project Browser. 13 In the 1 .Power. H-2 is a 100A panel. in the Mechanical/Electrical space. L-1 and MDP. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. Therefore. enter 40A for the Trip value. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. 9 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. and for T1. and on the Options Bar. . Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. 7 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. the 3 circuits feed transformer T1. so no further changes are required. Therefore. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. which will require a 40A circuit breaker.

double-click 2 . enter 40A for the Trip value. and click Element Properties. 1-#8. 16 In the Element Properties dialog.00A. 20 Under Electrical-Loads. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. click (Circuit Properties). enter 100A for Rating. 27 In the 2 . under Instance Parameters. Verify/adjust wire sizes 15 Right-click panel L-1. 19 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. 24 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. 21 Scroll down. select panel H-2. and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. click . Defining Circuit Loads | 341 . 22 Click OK. for transformer T2. select the T2 transformer. 1-#12.00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. in the Mechanical/Electrical space. Notice that it changes to 3-#1. 26 Click OK. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 18 With panel L-1 selected. 1-#12. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. and on the Options Bar. 17 Click OK. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA.Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. 28 In the Type Selector. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. 23 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100. 100. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. 25 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 1-#1.Power view.Power to make it the active view.

31 Click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click . and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. double-click 1 . 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Instance Parameters. 34 Close the Warning. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 35 On the Options Bar. 342 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit.Power to make it the active view. 36 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. Size the service entrance conductors 32 In the Project Browser. 29 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 37 You can save the open file if you wish. under Electrical Loads. This completes the Electrical Tutorial. you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. 33 With the MDP panel selected. click . enter 225A for the Rating parameter.00A.

navigate to Training Files ➤ Architectural. In this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded.rvt. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. However. However. you can choose to save your work. and select i Office Building. If the tutorial datasets are not present. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. hot and cold water piping. methodology. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. At the end of this tutorial. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. click Reload From. you will understand the process. In this tutorial.autodesk. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. 343 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. including plumbing fixtures. and sanitary piping. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. As you create the plumbing system. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After finishing each exercise. By following this workflow. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. go to http://www. if the link is lost.Plumbing Systems 7 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2009.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Water Closet . You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. In this lesson. click the Training Files icon. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Loading Plumbing Parts. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa 5 Click Open. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Flush Valve .rvt.Wall Hung.Floor Mounted. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa Urinal . planning is critical to a successful design. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families. 344 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 3 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing.

4 In the Type Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. select Tee For Tee. click the Training Files icon.6 In the Project Browser.Floor Mounted and Urinal . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems on page 345. click the Training Files icon. enter PVC Sanitary. 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Pipe Bend .rfa 11 Click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 You can save the open file if you wish. and click Duplicate. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click PVC 2. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. select Pipe Bend .DWV . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 In the Rename dialog.Glued. All of the loaded families. click Rename. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. select Pipe Transition . you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them.PVC: Standard Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 345 .Glued: Standard For Transition. select None For Cross.Sanitary . 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures. Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.PVC: Standard For Tap.Sanitary .Wall Hung.Flush Valve . are added under Families in the Project Browser. 2 Right-click PVC. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: Water Closet . and click OK. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Configuring Plumbing and Pipe Systems.rvt. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. and click Properties. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.Glued. 6 Under Mechanical.PVC . select Pipe Short Tee .PVC: Standard For Preferred Junction Type.rfa Pipe Reducing Short Tee . select Pipe Cross . for New. The selected component families are loaded into the project. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise.

you create systems to logically connect the fixtures.Glued: Standard is selected For Transition. and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. then click Duplicate. you add 2 toilets. 11 You can save the open file if you wish.PVC: Standard is selected For Union. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room. ZR (Zoom Region). 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Pipe Transition . You then modify the piping. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. Add Plumbing Fixtures on page 346. for Name. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Adding Plumbing Fixtures. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view.rvt.PVC . verify that Tee is selected For Tee. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. select Pipe Coupling . you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. In this lesson.■ For Union.PVC: Standard is selected 10 Click OK to close the Type Properties dialog. verify that Pipe Coupling . and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. Finally. enter PVC Sanitary Vent. verify that Pipe Bend .PVC: Standard For Tap. select Pipe Tee . 3 sinks. 346 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click the Training Files icon.PVC: Standard 7 Click Apply. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. select None For Cross. 9 Under Mechanical. verify that Pipe Cross . 13 Proceed to the next exercise.Vent .PVC: Standard is selected For Preferred Junction Type. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 3 urinals.

click Dimension. click Plumbing Fixture. and 3 sinks.The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.Floor Mounted : Private 1. a On the Design Bar. Position the first toilet 7 Position the toilet 6" from the upper wall. and click to place the toilet in the approximate location shown. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 347 . and 1' 6" from the right wall. 5 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. 3 wall-mounted urinals. 6 Click Modify.Flush Valve . 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.6 gpf in the Type Selector. 4 Select Water Closet .

and click. move the cursor over the center of the toilet. Wall faces is selected for Prefer. Clear Constrain Verify that Copy is selected Clear Multiple 348 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . The toilet is placed 6" from the upper wall of the toilet stall. c Click the face of the right wall. click 9 On the Options Bar.b On the Options Bar. enter 0' 6". and Individual References is selected for Pick. and click to place the dimension annotation. Add a second toilet 8 Select the toilet. enter 1' 6". and on the Edit toolbar. h Click the value for the blue dimension below the toilet. and press Enter. verify that (Aligned) is selected. d Move the cursor down. and press Enter. g Select the toilet. place a dimension annotation between the upper wall and the back of the toilet. j Delete both dimension annotations. do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Copy). The toilet is placed 1' 6" from the right wall. e Using the same method. f Click Modify. i Click Modify. click the value for the blue dimension to the right.

and on the Options Bar. select Wall centerlines Verify that Individual References is selected for Pick 17 Click the centerline of the left wall. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. 14 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room. 11 Move the preview of the toilet 5' 0" to the left (into the left stall). Place wall-mounted urinals 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.10 Click the center line of the toilet to establish a start point. and click. and place 3 urinals approximately as shown. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal. 18 Move the cursor down. and click to place the dimension annotation. 15 Click Modify. click Plumbing Fixture.Wall Hung : 3/4 Flush Valve in the Type Selector. do the following. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 349 . 16 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. and when the alignment snap displays and the preview is from the original toilet. 13 Select Urinal . 19 Using the same method. click to place the toilet as shown. click Dimension.

20 Working from left to right. 27 On the Options Bar click (Place on Face). place the leftmost urinal 1' 8" from the left wall. and in the Type Selector. click Plumbing Fixture.Island . click the value for the blue dimension. then move the cursor up. The urinal is placed 1' 8" from the wall of the toilet stall. select Sink . and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. click the centerline of each urinal in succession. 21 Select the rightmost urinal. 22 Using the same method. (Equal Control) 24 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. and enter 1' 8". select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. 25 While pressing Ctrl.Single : 18"x18". and click the blue above the dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. select the counter top. 23 Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. and click to place the dimensions annotation. 350 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 28 In the drawing area. and press Delete. Place sinks 26 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.

click Dimension. approximately as shown. 38 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet.3" Drain. 35 Delete the dimension annotations. 37 On the Option Bar click (Place on Work Plane). specify the distance between the center line of the outer sinks and the center line of the walls as 1' 10". and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. select Level : Level 2. Place the floor drain 36 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.29 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. specify the distance between the drain center line and the lower wall as 1' 6". as shown. and in the Type selector. 32 On the Design Bar. 33 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. then equalize the space between sinks. and click to place the floor drain. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 351 . 31 Click Modify. click Plumbing Fixture. 34 Using the same method specify the distance between the center line of the wall below the sinks and the center line of each sink. 30 Place 3 sinks. and for Plane.Round : 5" Stainer . select Floor Drain .

40 You can save the open file if you wish. Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Begin Creating the Sanitary System on page 352. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Level Offset 5 Click OK twice. under Extents. verify the view range settings: ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level. 4 In the View Range dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Starting the Sanitary Piping System. and click View Properties. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. and click Edit. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Bottom Offset Under View Depth. scroll down to View Range.39 Click Modify. 352 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 6 On the View Control Bar. urinals. click the Training Files icon.rvt. specify Fine for Detail Level. In this exercise. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser. and floor drain. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 42 Proceed to the next exercise.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. and floor drain. 19 On the Options Bar. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. specify -1' 0" 13 Click OK. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click View ➤ Piping. as shown. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. 15 Click the title bar for the browser. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols.The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. toilets. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. The urinals. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. click Mechanical Settings. click (Create Sanitary System). 18 Zoom in on the men’s room. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. select Sanitary from the System Type list. Click Window ➤ System Browser. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 9 In the right panel. and click Main. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 353 . specify -1' 0" 11 In the left panel. 16 Right-click in the system browser table heading. click Branch.

The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. click Sanitary 1. and click to place the base approximately as shown. for Offset. 27 On the Design Bar. 21 Click (Thin Lines) on the toolbar. 23 In the Select a System dialog. specify -4' 0" and for D. and a preview of the piping layout displays. 26 On the Options Bar.20 Zoom out to include the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room in the view. click (Layout Path). 24 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. 22 Select one of the components in the newly created sanitary system. click Solutions. and on the Options Bar. 25 Move the cursor over the chase. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. 354 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click OK. 28 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. click Place Base. and on the Options Bar. enter 1/8" for Slope. select 4".

You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). as needed. to view them. Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. 29 Select solution 1. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. and do the following: a Use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment down into the middle of the chase above the urinals. and on the Design Bar. click Modify. Customize the layout 30 The alignment of segments is critical when customizing a layout. It’s easier if each segment can be moved to a snap. Review the following steps prior to using them to customize the layout. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 355 .Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar.

and click to align the branch to the main segment. 31 Click Finish Layout. c Using the same method. Snap the main in the middle of the chase. 356 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . This makes it easier to locate a snap. select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal. and drag the segment down into the chase. d Move the cursor to the right to locate the snap above the center urinal. NOTE You press Ctrl to select multiple segments when you want to move more than one segment to the same location.b Move the cursor to the left to the junction between the main and the branch to the rightmost toilet.

The second tab highlights the fixture. When a fitting is reversed. as shown. c Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. and orientation of fittings: a Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. b Select each pipe segment in the system. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. The third tab should highlight the entire system. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.32 Examine the piping that was automatically created. and check the slope control. checking for the proper connectivity. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 357 . slope.

35 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. VG (Visibility/Graphics). Enter the keyboard shortcut. 34 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 36 Click OK. specify Fine for Detail Level. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.33 In the Project Browser. 358 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and double-click 3D Plumbing. 37 On the View Control Bar. click Show categories from all disciplines.

3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Connecting Sink Drain Lines. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt.38 You can save the open file if you wish. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 359 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System on page 359 to continue creating the sanitary system. adding the sinks in the men’s room. and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view.

the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 7 Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. verify that 1/8" /12" is specified for the slope. 360 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.4 Select the tee. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning. press the Space Bar once. enter 13. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. right-click the connector on the open leg. When you press the space bar. 6 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. and press Enter. and on the Options Bar.

12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. and select Pipe Plug-PVC : Standard in the Type Selector. and when the extension snap displays. 9 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. and select Pipe Reducing Wye-DWV-Glued : Standard in the Type Selector. and when the snap displays. and press Enter. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 361 . click Pipe Fitting. 10 Click Modify. 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Pipe Fitting. click to place the fitting.If you select the pipe. you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. 11 Select the fitting. click the blue size control for the wye leg. enter 2". click to place the fitting.

and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. 19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. and when the end of the pipe is even with wall centerline. 15 Using the method learned earlier. 362 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click to specify the end of the first segment of pipe. right-click the connector on the open leg. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. and that 1/8" /12" is specified for slope. click to specify the end of the pipe. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down to a point approximately even with the centerline of the wall below the sinks.14 Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. highlight the wye. and on the Options Bar. verify that Auto Connect is selected. 16 Select the wye fitting. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 17 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector.

20 On the Options Bar. and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. the vertical pipe extends above the level of the floor. press Space. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described in the previous exercise. enter 0' 6" for Offset. and click Modify.Glued : Standard. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Double Wye . click Apply. check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. 21 In the Project Browser.DWV . 24 On the Plumbing tab. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. If necessary. click Pipe Fitting. 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. and click to place the fitting. 22 In the 3D view. In this case. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 363 .

without having to enter ' and " symbols. 29 On the View tab Design Bar. as 27 Select the double wye fitting. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 28 Double-click 2 . in this step you can enter 0 8 (zero space eight) to specify 8". In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. TIP When entering dimensions. place a section below the sinks as shown. If necessary. and for Model Graphics Style. 31 On the View Control Bar. 30 Double-click the head of the section to open the section view. to orient the fitting. specify Hidden Line. and in the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. specify Fine. For example. click Section. click shown above.Plumbing to make it the active view. VG (Visibility/Graphics) to hide architectural components that will interfere with selecting plumbing components. 364 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 26 Click Modify. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches.The double wye is added to the vertical segment. 32 Enter the keyboard shortcut. specify 0' 8" for Offset. for Detail Level.

The fitting moves to the left when pipe is connected to the left leg. draw a 1' pipe from the right leg of the double-wye. draw the pipe up to the left. 37 Using the same method. 40 Select the double-wye fitting again. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 1 0 and press Enter. click None. then clear the check from Lines e Click OK 34 NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the double-wye. then to the right when pipe is connected to the right leg. 36 Click Modify. After adding the piping to the right and left leg. specify 0' 6". Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 365 . 39 Click Modify.33 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. it is necessary to restore the offset for the fitting. On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. for Offset. 41 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. draw the pipe up. click Pipe. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 0 6 and press Enter. and clear the check from any category c Clear Show categories from all disciplines. 38 Click the connector snap on the center leg. and click All again d Select any category. in line with the angle for the leg. do the following: a Click Show categories from all disciplines b Click All.

47 Click Modify. 45 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. double-click 3D Plumbing. and select the leftmost sink. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and on the Options Bar. 366 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .Plumbing. and in the Type Selector. and double-click 2 . press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. 44 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 48 Using the same method. 49 In the Project Browser. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary. and click to specify the end of the pipe.42 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ For Offset. and click Draw Pipe. 43 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. enter 1' 6". 50 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. and click Apply Verify 1/8" /12" is specified for slope 46 Drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall.

and on the Options Bar. 61 Select the double-wye. click Routing Solutions. 59 Using the same method. for D. While pressing Ctrl. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. and on the Options Bar. (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through 55 Select solution 9 of 16. select the double-wye and the 3 short segments of pipe connected to it. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. for D. and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. 58 Click Modify. 60 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. select the pipe from the left sink and the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 9 of 16. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. 53 While pressing Ctrl. and select a proposed solution. 57 Select solution 7of 7. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points). and on the Options Bar. You use the proposed solutions. specify 1 1/2". select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. specify 2". 56 While pressing Ctrl. click Routing Solutions.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 51 Routing Solutions works best when the segments being routed are the same size. 54 On the Options Bar. 52 Click Modify. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 367 .

Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar. and click Finish. 63 Click Window ➤ Toolbar ➤ Routing Modify to place the Slope and Justify tool on the toolbar. 65 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8" / 12". 64 On the toolbar. This is to be expected. for Slope. A warning displays and the pipe from the leg of the double-wye is highlighted to indicate the segment where the slope could not be applied. 368 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Close the warning.

The amount of adjustment with each keystroke is proportional to the zoom level. 70 In the drawing area.66 Using the same method. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. click to select the reference end of the pipe. (Add to System). Then. 72 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. and click Select. then click Finish on the Edit System toolbar. expand Sanitary. You can move fixtures by dragging. click Finish on the Options Bar. the piping to the middle sink is already sloped. right-click Sanitary 1. select all 3 sinks. modifying offset values. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 71 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. click Multiple. and on the Options Bar. Since the routing solution applied to the middle sink used the existing pipe (without adding a segment). and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. 67 In the System Browser. 68 On the Options Bar. NOTE In applications where the elevation of a sloped pipe is critical. click (Edit System). there is a smaller movement. This will set the elevation for the pipe’s reference end without changing the slope. you can specify the elevation of a pipe’s reference end in the Element Properties for the pipe. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. click Element Properties. When zoomed in close. If necessary. and under Instance Parameters. you can make minor adjustments to the system. right-click the pipe. specify the exact Offset. while pressing Ctrl. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. click 69 On the Edit System toolbar. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 369 . The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. specify the slope for the piping to the left sink.

75 Using the method learned earlier.PVC : Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions.DWV .) 370 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments. and select Pipe Bend .DWV . 74 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. 73 While pressing Ctrl. you can change these to the more commonly used Pipe Bend . Pipe Bend .Glued : Standard. highlight the leftmost sink. Now that the routing is completed. and in the Type Selector. select Pipe Bend . the entire system should be highlighted.Glued : Standard in the Type Selector.DWV . (After the third tab.Glued : Standard.When the piping was created for the sink drains.

and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. 78 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. and select the horizontal pipe. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. and carefully drag it away from the elbow. Refining the Sanitary Stack on page 371 to continue creating the sanitary system. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 1 In the Project Browser. 79 Proceed to the next exercise. while maintaining the same angle. skip the next 2 steps.rvt. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. click File menu ➤ Save As.76 If you want to save your work. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. otherwise. adjusting the sanitary stack. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Waste Stack Connection. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 371 . 77 You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon.

372 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 5 Select the vertical pipe segment. and select Pipe Reducing Wye .Glued : Standard. and when the Extension snap displays. and on the Options Bar. specify 6" for D (diameter). 7 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe. click Pipe Fitting. and press Delete. press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). Add a reducing wye to the stack 6 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.4 Select the elbow. and click to place the fitting.DWV .

and press Enter. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. click the value for the 45 degree leg.Plumbing. double-click 2 . enter 4 to change its size. and click the sanitary piping. select the wye. The wye is added to the vertical segment. 11 On the View tab on the Design Bar. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 373 . click Section. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward 9 Select the wye.8 Click Modify. If necessary. and click Modify. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 10 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.

for Detail Level. and draw the pipe in line with 45 degree leg and when the center line for the main segment displays. 13 On the View Control Bar. specify Fine. click Draw Pipe. and select the reducing wye fitting. and press Enter. enter -2' 6" for Offset. click to specify the end of the pipe. 374 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .12 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view. 16 Right-click the connector on the 45 degree leg. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment. 14 Zoom in. 15 On the Options Bar. press Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.

This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). and in the Type Selector. it will be necessary to move the piping after making the connection. click Draw Pipe. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Bend . 24 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. 20 Select the bend created by the routing solution tool. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 375 . when the location is critical. then enter 4 0 and press Enter to add a 4' 0" vertical vent pipe. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. 21 Right-click the open connector on the reducing wye. click Routing Solutions. The fitting moves toward the pipe being added after the pipe is drawn. select solution 3 of 3.NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the reducing tee. The exact position of the riser is not critical in this application. and on the Options Bar. 22 Move the cursor up and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the fitting.Glued : Standard. However. 23 Click Modify. 17 Click Modify. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. 19 On the Options Bar.DWV . 18 While pressing Ctrl.

25 You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. (If necessary. then down to connect with the sanitary main. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Refining the Urinal Lines on page 376 to continue creating the plumbing system.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. use the Filter tool to select only piping and fittings. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Urinal Waste Lines. running it inside the wall.) 376 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close.

specify 1/8" /12" 7 Drag the preview to the left approximately 8". specify 2" Click (Auto Connect) ■ ■ For slope. 9 Continue drawing the pipe run to the left. Refining the Urinal Lines | 377 . 8 On the Options Bar. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. click the connector snap. 11 Select the leftmost urinal. for Offset. click 13 In the drawing area. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector For D. 12 In the Select Connector dialog. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. 10 Click Modify. The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. and on the Options Bar. (Connect Into). click Connector 2 : Sanitary Round : 2" Out.3 Press Delete. starting at the level of the original pipe. 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. press the Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. click the pipe above the urinal. and when the snap for the center line of the leftmost urinal displays. and click OK. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal. click Draw Pipe. click to specify the end of the pipe. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 0' 6". and click to specify the end of the pipe. enter 0' 6" and press Tab. 6 On the Options Bar.

378 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 17 On the Routing Modify toolbar.14 Using the same method. 15 Draw a pick box around the 3 urinals and the horizontal 2" piping just added as shown.Plumbing to make it the active view. verify that 1/8" /12" for Slope. connect the remaining urinals to the sanitary main. 19 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Filter dialog. and check the slope and connectivity as described previously. (Slope). click (Filter Selection). Do not include the riser and fitting. clear Plumbing Fixtures and click OK. and on the Options Bar. click The slope is applied to the selected piping. double-click 3D. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 18 On the Options Bar. and click Finish.

21 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. 22 On the Options Bar.Resize pipes 20 In the Project Browser. specify 3" for D (diameter). and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 4" segment) as shown. double-click 2 . first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. However. you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. So. In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout.Plumbing to make it the active view. Refining the Urinal Lines | 379 .

and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. 31 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ North. select 3". click to place the plug on the tee. and in the Type Selector.Add a cleanout 23 Select the pipe between the 3" elbow and the left urinal. 24 Select the elbow. and when the extension snap displays. 26 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. double-click 3D. 27 Select the pipe to the urinal again.Plumbing to make it the active view. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 30 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. Redefine fittings 28 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. click Pipe Fitting. then select 2". and on the Options Bar. specify 3" for D (diameter).Sanitary . and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. specify 2" for D. 29 Select the 2" pipes connecting the urinal drains to the main. and on the Options Bar. 25 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. select Pipe PVC Plug : Standard. verify that Pipe Reducing Short Tee . for D. and in the Type Selector. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. 380 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 32 Select the vertical pipe segment between the toilets and the urinals.Glued : Standard is selected. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal.

33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.DVW .This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. Refining the Urinal Lines | 381 .Glued : Standard. 34 Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe. 35 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. and select Pipe Bend .

Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee. 1 In the Project Browser. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping. 382 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. click the Training Files icon. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. If necessary. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system.36 You can save the open file if you wish. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Vents to the System on page 382 to continue creating the plumbing system. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described previously. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

VG (Visibility/Graphics). select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. 7 Click Apply.4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. specify 2" for D (diameter). 6 On the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify. NOTE You must press Tab or move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. Apply a filter to the vent piping 9 Enter the keyboard shortcut. 10 On the Filters tab in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and in the Type Selector. click Pipe. 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. and specify 14' for Offset. Adding Vents to the System | 383 . specify 0" for Rise/12". do the following: a Click Edit/New.

specify Filter by as System Type ➤ contains ➤ Sanitary Vent. i In the Line Graphics dialog. g For Sanitary Vent. click the Color button. click Rename. select Sanitary Vent. and click OK. select IMPORT-DASHED (2) j Click OK twice. d Under the Filter Rules. click Add. Create additional vents 11 Double-click Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 2 . and click OK.b In the Filters dialog. and zoom in to view the urinals and toilets. 12 On the View tab on the Design Bar. 384 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click (Duplicate). select (green). and click Override. rename the filter Sanitary Vent. click the Lines column. e In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Vent piping throughout the plan appear as dashed green lines. and click OK. click Section. and click OK. h In the Line Graphics dialog.Plumbing to make it the active view. and place a section above the urinals and toilets as shown. select Sanitary from the Filters list. f In the Add Filters dialog. c Right-click Sanitary 1. and in the Color dialog. for Pattern.

14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. and for Model Graphics Style. specify 2" for D (diameter). 17 On the Options Bar. click to specify the end of the first pipe section. then drag the preview to the right and when the center snap for the previously created vent displays. Adding Vents to the System | 385 . and enter 1/8" /12" for slope. specify Fine. clear unwanted architectural components from the view as described previously. 15 On the View Control Bar. click to make the connection to the vent as shown. click Pipe. 19 Begin drawing the vertical pipe. 20 At a point above the toilets. and on the Options Bar. 16 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. for Detail Level.13 Double-click the section symbol to open the section view. and enter the keyboard shortcut VG. 18 Click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. specify Wireframe. verify the (Auto Connect) is selected.

specify 2".21 Click Modify. c For D. 25 Place another vent between the two rightmost urinals: a Click the midpoint of the pipe between the urinals. and click to make the connection. 386 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . b Begin the vertical pipe. under Instance Parameters. and click the + control to update the tee to a cross. 22 Right-click the new horizontal pipe. The vent is automatically created and connected with the earlier vent pipe. e If necessary. and click OK. and click Element Properties. 24 Select the tee that was inserted when you connected the vents. press Tab to display the connector. d When the snap for the center line for the cross displays. for Offset. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. f Click Modify. draw the pipe to the left to the open leg of the cross. enter 9' 6" to specify the elevation for the reference end of the pipe.

27 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping. Adding Vents to the System | 387 .26 Double-click 3D . use the Flip control to make the adjustment.Plumbing to make it the active view.

specify 2" for D (diameter). 29 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. 31 Right-click the tee. specify 2" for D (diameter). verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. then click Apply. and begin drawing a vertical vent pipe. 388 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 30 While pressing Ctrl. and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. 32 On the Options Bar. select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. move the cursor into the drawing area.Add a vent to the sinks 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. and specify 9' 6" for Offset. and on the Options Bar. and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks. 33 Click Modify. click Draw Pipe.

and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. 38 Select the horizontal vent pipe.34 Zoom out to view the vents from the toilets and urinals and the new vent from the sinks. 37 Drag the pipe preview. click 39 Enter 1/8" /12" for slope. Adding Vents to the System | 389 . and on the Routing Modify toolbar. click Draw Pipe. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. right-click the connector at the open end. A tee is automatically inserted at the joint. (Slope). 35 Select the vent. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. 36 On the Options Bar specify 0" /12" for slope. and click Finish.

3 In the Type Properties dialog. 390 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . right-click Standard. click Properties. for New. Create the Cold Water System on page 390 to continue creating the plumbing system. click the Training Files icon.rvt. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 42 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 Right-click Standard 1. 4 In the Rename dialog. enter Cold Water. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Cold Water Piping.40 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 41 You can save the open file if you wish. and click Duplicate. click Rename. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

19 In the Filter dialog.Plumbing to make it the active view. click Branch. click Mechanical Settings. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). and click OK twice. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. enter Hot Water. The default fittings for the hot water pipe are the same as those specified for the cold water pipe. then select Plumbing Fixtures. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. Create the Cold Water System | 391 . You now have the cold water piping at 9' 3" and the hot water piping at 9' 0". click Check None. specify Pipe Straight Coupling: Standard 6 Click Apply. specify Pipe Tee: Standard For Tap. 13 In the left panel. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. click View ➤ Piping. specify Pipe Cross: Standard For Transition. Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and in the right pane. specify Pipe Elbow : Standard For Preferred Junction Type. and click OK. in the right pane. click Main. which places the piping above the ceiling. click Main. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. and on the Options Bar click (Filter Selection). the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. 18 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. and double-click 2 . 12 In the table. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 While pressing Shift. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. in the right pane. 17 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. specify Tee For Tee.5 In the Type Properties dialog. and in the Name dialog. 10 In the left pane. click Branch. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. 11 In the left pane. specify None For Cross. 16 Press F9 to open the System Browser. then click Duplicate. and in the right pane. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. for Name. 14 Click OK. and avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. 9 In the table. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. Create the cold water system 15 In the Project Browser. specify Pipe Transition : Standard For Union. click the floor drain.

and in the Type Selector. select the domestic cold water connector. 34 Zoom in on the area between the middle and rightmost sink. click OK. Piping is added to connect the sink to the cold water system. specify 0" /12" for Slope. clear Casework. and click to end the run as shown. 29 Click Modify. 31 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. and click OK. 30 Enter the keyboard shortcut VG. 24 On the Option Bar. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. click Pipe. 26 On the Options Bar. specify 2' 6" for Offset. 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. 392 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. click Pipe. 32 Select the middle sink in the view. select Pipe Types : Cold Water. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. click Show categories from all disciplines. Create piping for the cold water system 22 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. 33 In the Select Connector dialog. and on the Options Bar. click (Connect Into). and click to specify the end the segment. 35 On the Plumbing tab. 23 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.

and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. just above the wall. select the cold water pipe. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. (If necessary. press Tab to avoid connecting to the sanitary piping. and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. 40 Zoom in on the area between the toilets. click Pipe. 39 Click Modify. drag the preview into the center of the wall behind the sinks. and click to end that segment. press Tab. 44 On the Options Bar. click to specify the end of the pipe. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. Create the Cold Water System | 393 . drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room.36 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the sinks. 37 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. specify 9' 3" for Offset. 42 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe in the chase. click the snap on the cold water pipe. and click Apply. specify 1' 2" for Offset. 38 On the Options Bar. 43 Drag the preview to the left. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals.) 41 On the Plumbing tab.

Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 52 Drag the preview to the left while maintaining the same angle. 47 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets. click to specify the endpoint as shown. and when the center line for the left toilet displays. 46 In the Project Browser.45 Click Modify. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture.Plumbing. double-click 3D. right-click the open connector. 48 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into). 49 Select the elbow behind the toilet. select the rightmost toilet. click Draw Pipe. click Pipe. and then click the vertical cold water pipe. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 50 On the Plumbing tab. 394 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click the + control to change it to a tee. 51 Select the tee.

56 Use the same method.53 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar click pipe. and click the horizontal cold Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and click the vertical cold water Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. . . and on the Options Bar click water pipe that you added to the tee. 55 Select the rightmost urinal. Create the Cold Water System | 395 . 54 Select the leftmost toilet. connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe.

All of the cold water piping is in place. the tee. as shown. The final steps in this exercise adjust the size of several sections of the piping. Adjust cold water pipe sizes 57 Use the View Cube in the upper-right corner of the view to spin the 3D . 58 Select the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. 396 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .Plumbing view as shown. and the horizontal segment to the sinks.

but leaving the branch to the urinals as is). Create the Cold Water System | 397 . specify 2" for D (diameter). 61 On the Options Bar. specify 1 1/2" for D (diameter). 63 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink).59 On the Options Bar. 62 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. 60 Select the cold water branch piping from the main. feeding the toilets and urinals (including the tees. as shown.

and zoom in on the sinks. 398 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click 2 .Plumbing. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. specify 3/4" for D (diameter). a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 66 You can save the open file if you wish.64 On the Options Bar. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater. create the hot water system. 65 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. Create the Hot Water System on page 398. 68 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Hot Water Piping.

click the title bar for the browser. and click Select. and click View ➤ Piping. (Add to System). click the water heater. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. click Check None. click System toolbar. select Water Heater : 40Gallon. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Filter dialog. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. click Finish. click the Training Files icon. click (Filter Selection). expand Domestic Cold Water. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). click (Edit System). select Plumbing Fixtures. expand Domestic Hot Water.2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. 12 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. and on the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. click Mechanical Equipment. 10 Double-click Water Heater.rfa. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and on the Edit 17 In the System Browser. and click Select. Create the Hot Water System | 399 . and click to place the water heater as shown. 16 On the Edit System toolbar. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. and in the Type Selector. The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system. to the left of the main cold water pipe. The Edit System toolbar is activated. and click OK. 14 In the System Browser. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click the main cold water pipe. 23 On the Plumbing tab. 20 Select the water heater in the view.18 On the Options Bar. 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. 25 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 400 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click Pipe. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater. add the water heater to the cold water system. and on the Options Bar. and in the Type Selector. 19 Using the same method. click Draw Pipe. and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. select the domestic cold water connector. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. click OK. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. right-click the connector. click (Connect Into). click when the hot water connector displays. specify 8' 6" for Offset. and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. click (Edit System).

and click to specify the end of the segment. click Pipe. 31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays.27 Click Modify. 30 On the Options Bar. and in the Type Selector. 33 Click Modify. Create the Hot Water System | 401 . 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. specify 2' 8" for Offset. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. 28 On the Plumbing tab. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown.

and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. click Apply. click Pipe. 41 On the Plumbing tab. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater. click Draw Pipe. click click the hot water pipe below the sinks. and In this case. (Connect Into).Plumbing. specify 2' 8" for Offset. 36 Right-click the open connector. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 402 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 40 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Options Bar. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. and on the Options Bar. and click to end that segment. the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. double-click 3D. 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. 39 Click Modify.34 Select the middle sink in the view. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.

44 In the Project Browser. 43 Click Modify. Create the Hot Water System | 403 . 45 Highlight a fixture in the view.Plumbing. This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. and click. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks.42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. double-click 2 . expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 46 You can save the open file if you wish. 47 Click File menu ➤ Close.

404 .

and size and tag the pipes. However. If the tutorial datasets are not present. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. you create views and pipe types. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.Fire Protection Systems 8 In this tutorial. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. As you create the systems. Designing Fire Protection Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and finally. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. Then. By following the recommended workflow. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. insert fittings. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. In this tutorial. you will understand the process. In this lesson. you can choose to save your work. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. However. 405 . manually modify the pipes and fittings. methodology. you create a wet and dry fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms. At the end of this tutorial. if the link is lost. go to http://www. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. click Reload From.autodesk. and select i Office Building. create schedules. During the fire protection design process.rvt. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2009. After finishing each exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 2 Right-click Standard. you modify the pipe type properties. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. Next. 3 Right-click the copy. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. for New. right-click the Design Bar. under Mechanical. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 5 In the Rename dialog. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. Next. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings. for Material. click Duplicate. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Properties. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. You create new pipe types. and click Duplicate. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Configure pipe conversion settings 10 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Open the i Starting the Fire Protection Project. including the new material property. 406 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. and click Fire Protection. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. 12 For System Type. click Mechanical Settings. select Main. 7 With the Type Properties dialog open.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. Next. 13 Under System Type. 9 In the Type Selector. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. select Carbon Steel. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. select Fire Protection Wet. Create new pipe types 1 In the Project Browser. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. click Rename. you create another pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. and click OK. enter Fire Protection Wet. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type.

select Spaces. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. or architectural components. for Offset verify 9' 0". verify that 9' 0" is specified. do the following: ■ Under Category. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. 14 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. So. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. For Offset. Click OK. structural beams. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. under Available fields. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. To remove a field. select Area. 22 While pressing Ctrl.■ For Offset. the pipe main will be offset from level 2. 16 Under System Type. 15 For System Type. ■ ■ Define columns 21 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 407 . for System Type Fire Protection Dry. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. select Branch. 20 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Remove. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Create a Space Schedule 19 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 17 Using the same method. and specify Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry for the Main and Branch piping. verify that 9' 0" is selected. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 23 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. select Fire Protection Wet. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. duct. However. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. 18 Click OK. and click Add. select it. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.

do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. For Formula. verify that Common is selected. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. 30 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. Verify that Formula is selected. verify that (none) is selected. Organize the data 28 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. verify that (none) is selected. For Type. Verify that Ascending is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Level 2. Under Level. 408 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. click Field Format. 26 In the Calculated Value dialog. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each space. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 130 square feet. For Field formatting. For And. select Level. 29 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Discipline. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. Create a calculated value parameter 25 Click Calculated Value. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Verify that equals is selected. 27 Click OK. enter Area/130. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). verify that Number is selected. select Number. For Then by.24 Select a field. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive.

each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per space data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. Next. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 409 . 32 You can save the open file if you wish. A new view called Space Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. select 2 decimal places. In this exercise. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Notice that only the data for the level 2 spaces displays. For Rounding. select Fixed. Click OK twice. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. you place the wet system sprinklers. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Placing Sprinklers on page 410. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 spaces. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. you created new views and modified view properties. In the next exercise. sorted according to space number. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. For Units. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. Although you rounded the data to 2 decimal places. Finally. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. As a result.31 In the Format dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. you created a Space Schedule for fire protection systems.

After placing the initial sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. 410 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . As you place the sprinklers. 4 In the Type Selector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans.Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. Place a sprinkler 1 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click Sprinkler. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. You will use the schedule that you created in the previous exercise to identify the required number of sprinklers per room. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Enter ZR. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers.Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. select Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 1/2" Pendent. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the spaces on level 2. 5 On the Options Bar. When this happens.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. Open the i Placing Sprinklers. and sketch a zoom region around Office 201 (located in the upper-left corner of the building). you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion or a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. and double-click 2 .

Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. 10 On the Options Bar. and after the intersection snap displays. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. 11 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tile as shown. Continue placing sprinklers 8 In the drawing area. The selected sprinkler displays in red.6 With the view zoomed. and click to place the sprinkler. and that Copy is selected. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 7 Click Modify on the Design Bar. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). click (Copy). select the sprinkler that you placed. Placing Sprinklers | 411 . You copy this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click to specify the copy start point.

12 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). and after the intersection snap displays. The copy selection border follows the cursor. click to specify the copy end point. and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. 412 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection.

verify Constrain is cleared.A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. click (Copy). 15 On the Edit toolbar. Next. Placing Sprinklers | 413 . and select Multiple. place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 202. Copy is selected. 14 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 201. click to specify the copy start point. Copy and array sprinklers 13 Zoom out to view the region around Office 201 and Office 202 (Office 202 is located immediately below Office 201). 16 On the Options Bar. This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and after the intersection snap displays. 17 In Office 201.

18 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 202. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays. 414 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

and after the intersection snap displays.19 Move the cursor directly down. Placing Sprinklers | 415 . click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler.

The sprinklers are placed. 416 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

because all of the sprinklers in Office 202 are equally spaced. 21 While pressing CTRL. A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. For Move To. 23 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. Verify that Constrain is cleared. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. Placing Sprinklers | 417 . 22 On the Edit toolbar. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). click (Array). select Last. Next. Furthermore. it is an ideal situation to use an array. click Modify.20 On the Design Bar. Clear Group And Associate. you can use the Array tool to finish the job. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 202. you array the other Office 202 sprinklers. TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool.

An outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. 24 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 202 sprinkler. 25 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid. to specify array end point. You first specify an array start point. 418 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . creating an array is a 2-step process. and after the intersection snap displays. then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). click to specify the array start point. click to specify the array end point as shown.NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool. and after the intersection snap displays.

The Office 202 sprinklers are placed. Placing Sprinklers | 419 .

click (Copy). clear Multiple. you place sprinklers in Office 203. 27 While pressing Ctrl. A border displays around the selected sprinklers indicating the copy selection. 26 Zoom out to view all 3 offices along the left wall. click to specify the copy start point. select both sprinklers in the corner office (Office 201). 30 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border. 420 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .Next. 28 On the Edit toolbar. and after the mid point snap displays. 29 On the Options Bar.

and after the mid point snap displays. click to specify the copy end point. Placing Sprinklers | 421 .31 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 203.

NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap. 422 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps.

Open 204. 35 On the Edit toolbar. 36 On the Options Bar. Create multiple sprinkler arrays 33 Zoom in to view Office 203 and part of the adjacent common area. 37 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. You copy this sprinkler to Open 204 and use it to create a sprinkler array. verify that Multiple is cleared. click (Copy). 34 Select the lower-right Office 203 sprinkler. you place sprinklers in the large common space.You have now placed the sprinklers for 3 offices. 32 Click Modify. Placing Sprinklers | 423 . Open 204. Next.

You could copy sprinklers. click to place the sprinkler. 39 Click Modify. For Number. enter 6 for the number of arrays. and after the intersection snap displays. The Office 203 sprinkler is copied to Open 204. 424 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. but creating an array is quicker. 43 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point.38 Move the cursor to the right into Open 204 as shown. you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 204. Next. For Move To. select 2nd. 40 Select the sprinkler that you copied. 41 On the Edit toolbar. Verify that Constrain is cleared. click (Array). Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. 42 On the Options Bar.

Placing Sprinklers | 425 . click to specify the array end point as shown.44 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. The array is created. and after the intersection snap displays. Zoom out to display the array.

If you make a mistake placing the array. select all the sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler in the Open 204 space. 47 On the Options Bar. click to specify end point for the second array. and after the intersection snap displays. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared.IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. 426 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . For Move To. 46 On the Edit toolbar. For Number. Next. you create multiple arrays based on this array. 45 While pressing CTRL. 49 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. Verify that Constrain is cleared. 48 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler as shown. verify that 2nd is selected. undo the step and try again. click (Array). Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. enter 4 for number of arrays.

click Expand. click the check box associated with each warning. 50 In the Revit MEP 2009 dialog. Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). 51 Expand the 3 Warnings. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors.The arrays are created. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 204 is complete Placing Sprinklers | 427 . and click Delete Checked to delete the 3 sprinklers.

click Sprinkler. 58 In the Type Selector. and click Modify. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical space (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright. Because this space does not have a ceiling. 428 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .Fire Prot to make it the active view. 57 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.Next. you will use a non-hosted sprinkler. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser.rfa file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. and double-click 2 . you place a sprinkler in the Mechanical/Electrical space. click Edit Family on the Options Bar. 59 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. Place non-hosted sprinklers 55 In the Project Browser. 54 Open the Sprinkler -Upright. you need to load them in the project. To modify a family type. 56 Enter ZR. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor. move the cursor to the approximate center of the space. 53 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. first. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. Load a new sprinkler family 52 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click the Training Files icon. The sprinkler family loads into the project. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). However. click to place the sprinkler.

select Wall Faces 65 Click the upper wall face. 67 Select the dimension. then click the wall face of the lower wall. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. Next you adjust the offset. 64 On the Design Bar. as shown. under Instance Parameters.Ceiling Fire Prot view. and notice that the sprinkler displays in the Mechanical/Electrical space. and when a dot displays click to specify the center. double-click 2 . it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the 2 . enter 10' 6". and on the Options Bar. and move the dimension to the left. NOTE Click the center of the sprinkler. for Offset. and press Delete. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. 60 Right-click the sprinkler.Ceiling Fire Prot. click the center of the sprinkler. Placing Sprinklers | 429 . click Dimension. Do not click the vertical line that displays as the reference. 63 In the Project Browser.The sprinkler is added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". Unconstrain the sprinkler when deleting the dimension. and click Element Properties. and because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 66 Click to center the sprinkler between the upper and lower wall. 62 Click OK.

Use sprinkler type: Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 1/2" Pendent for all rooms. center the sprinkler between the right and left walls. ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. You will create a Fire Protection Dry System in Server Room 215 in a later exercise. Round decimals up to the next whole number.68 Using the same method. then click Modify. Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 69 Using the placement methods that you have learned. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. Click to place the sprinklers on ceiling tile faces. 430 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . NOTE Do not place sprinklers in the stairwell or Server Room 215. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room.

(Pin) 72 In the Filter dialog.70 In the Project Browser. 71 Draw a pick box around the entire model. 73 You can save the open file if you wish. click to prevent further movement of the sprinklers that would cause misalignment. click Check None. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and click (Filter).Fire Prot. and on the toolbar. double-click 2 . then select Sprinklers. Placing Sprinklers | 431 .

2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed.74 Click File menu ➤ Close. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. However. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Connecting the Sprinklers on page 432. click the Training Files icon. and physically with piping. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure.Fire Prot to make it the active view. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 432 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and double-click 2 . and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Unlike logical connections (systems). Then you simplify the layout using tools from the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar to modify pipe branches after converting the initial layout to piping. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. Open the i Connecting Sprinklers. 1 In the Project Browser. you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. In this exercise. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. In the next exercise. After creating the logical connection.

6 On the Options Bar. click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. If the System Browser does not respond. All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. click in the drawing area to make it active. and click OK. Connecting the Sprinklers | 433 . select Sprinklers. click Check None. Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 203 and Office 211. You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. 7 In the Filter box. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 4 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. As you assign sprinklers to systems. then press F9. and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes. click System Browser. 8 On the Options Bar.Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and display pinned and in red. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.

click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. and click Select. all of the sprinklers in the system have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. In the System Browser. 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. expand Piping. The Layout Paths tools are activated on the Design Bar and Options Bar. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. and select the system or select the Fire Protection Wet 1 again in the System Browser. 434 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. select an initial piping layout. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. named Fire Protection Wet 1. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. right-click Fire Protection Wet. place the cursor over a sprinkler. Next. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. and a piping layout preview displays. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected.The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. press Tab. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected.

and for Offset. 21 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the stairwell. 18 Click OK. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 435 . and select solution 4. 15 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right keyboard arrow keys. and click to place the base component as shown. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 17 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. these settings will convert the base component to a 6" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). click Solutions. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. and on the Options Bar. When the layout is finished.NOTE The is selected. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 23 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. 14 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. click Solutions. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. click Place Base. Click (Previous Solution). click Settings. enter -12' 0". The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. (Layout Path) button is available on the Options Bar whenever a system component 13 On the Design Bar. 20 Zoom in on the stairway at the right side of the model. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. and on the Options Bar. select Branch. verify that 6"150 mm is specified for D. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. verify that Main is selected. verify that 9' 0" is specified. For Offset. The layout path solution displays.

the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. Modify the layout 24 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. 26 Select the vertical layout path segment. A (parallel movement control) displays. On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 436 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. click Modify. you modify the selected layout. 25 Zoom in on the vertical main. In general. then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.Next. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction.

27 Drag the parallel movement control to the left to a point to the right of the doorway for Office 216. Connecting the Sprinklers | 437 . 28 Select the horizontal branch pipe to the lower sprinkler in Office 211. and midway between the sprinklers above the office as shown.

feeding the sprinkler in Office 203. (elbow junction control) The piping for Office 203 is reconnected to the branch in the open area. (tee junction control) down to the intersection with the main piping just below 32 Scroll to the left. 30 Select the horizontal branch pipe.29 Drag the parallel movement control down until the pipe merges with the horizontal piping to the left. select the horizontal branch again. 31 Drag the it. and drag the down to merge it with the horizontal piping below. as shown. 438 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

However. 37 Drag the (tee junction control) up to the intersection of main and the branch above. there are situations where you must make modifications outside of the Layout Paths. click (Thin Lines). it is an opportunity to merge the piping into a shared branch. You can make many of these modifications using the Layout Paths tools. In general. So far. 34 Select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in the left office. Connecting the Sprinklers | 439 . Drag the lower branch piping up to merge it with the branch piping. you have been using parallel movements to combine piping. 35 On the toolbar. whenever there is a branch feeding a single sprinkler. as shown. Thin lines make it easier to see the various drag controls when using junction and elbow controls. 36 Select the horizontal branch feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. Next you combine the piping for the sprinklers in Office 216 by dragging each end of the pipe separately.33 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model.

or that offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. (elbow junction control) up to combine 39 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.38 Select the horizontal branch again. Either relocate the system components. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. click Finish Layout. 440 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . select a different layout solution. and drag the the branch piping.

as shown. on the Options Bar. click in Office 211. 42 In the Filter dialog. clear Sprinklers. draw a pick box to select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. (Connect Into). and click OK. then continue drawing the pipe up to connect the sprinkler. 44 Select the horizontal pipe. click (Filter). click to specify the end point. click draw pipe. right-click the connector at the open end. as shown. and verify that (Auto Connect) is selected on the Options Bar. 45 Draw the pipe to the right and when the snap below the sprinkler in Office 211 displays. 41 On the Options Bar. and the sprinkler in the open area. 43 Press Delete. 46 Select the sprinkler that was disconnected in the open area when the piping was deleted.Continue combining piping 40 Zoom in on Office 211. and click the horizontal pipe feeding the sprinkler 47 Drag the open end of the main piping up to connect with the horizontal piping as shown. including the cross and transitions from the main piping. Connecting the Sprinklers | 441 .

49 Draw a pick box around the horizontal piping and fittings between the sprinklers in Office 216 and the main in Server Room 215. including the pipe and the tee as shown. and drag the connector to the right to connect with the vertical pipe as shown. 50 While pressing Ctrl. select all the piping to the 2 lower sprinklers in Office 214. and drag the top connector up to connect with the horizontal piping in the open area. and press Delete.48 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. 51 Press Delete. as shown. 442 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 53 Select the horizontal pipe in Office 216. Reconnect the sprinklers in Office 214 and 216 52 Select the vertical pipe in Office 216.

click Pipe. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. then drag the preview to the connector snap on the right-most sprinkler. click to specify the end point for the pipe. and click to make the connection to the sprinkler. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 443 . Click Modify. Drag the preview down. ■ Continue dragging the preview down until aligned with the 2 lower sprinklers. verify that (Auto Connect) is selected. Click the horizontal pipe between the left wall of Office 214 and the upper-left sprinkler. 55 On the Design Bar.54 Zoom in on the office in the lower-right corner. and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the horizontal pipe.

■ Reconnect the piping for Office 214 to the main 56 Zoom in on the open piping above Server Room 215. and on the toolbar click 57 Click each of the open-ended pipes. (Trim/Extend). 444 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .■ Select the sprinkler to the left. On the Options Bar. click (Connect Into). and click the horizontal pipe as shown.

you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 60 You can save the open file if you wish. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. you create the dry fire protection system. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. Open the i Completing the Wet System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System on page 445. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. checked connectivity. and double-click the 2 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.Fire Prot view. and then you create piping to physically connect them. and select the tee fitting connecting the main to the upper horizontal branch piping. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 445 . 61 Click File menu ➤ Close. After creating the system. Next. In the next exercise. 58 Click Modify. click the Training Files icon.An elbow is inserted to complete the connection. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. you add the sprinklers in the upper half of the model to the existing wet system.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Check pipe connectivity 59 Highlight a pipe in the main for the system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. indicating connectivity throughout the system. The entire system should be highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in. and converted pipe fittings. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and press Tab twice. 62 Proceed to the next exercise.

fitting. The cross provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the upper half of the model. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar.Fire Prot view.3 Click the plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a cross. boilers. 446 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). 4 In the 2 . air terminals. you can select the pipe or duct. such as VAV boxes. 5 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). or sprinkler in the current wet system. and AC units. and so on) are logically connected by a system. mechanical equipment. and number of elements in the system. and pipe or duct is created. radiators. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. The Edit System toolbar displays providing system editing tools. system equipment. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. System tools display on the Options Bar. select a pipe segment.

You cannot select them.6 On the Edit System toolbar. 8 Place the cursor outside Office 201 in the upper-left corner of the building. For System Name. For System Equipment. verify that None is specified. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out). verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. verify that 30 is specified. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 447 . Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. click 7 On the Options Bar. Select Multiple. For Number of Elements. 9 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add To System). Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected.

solution 1 3. you must click Finish on the Options bar to complete the selections.The selected sprinklers display in red. and on the Options Bar. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. click Paths). click Finish to finish editing the system. 14 On the Options Bar. The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. click Finish to finish your selection of the sprinklers being added to the system. select Network. This is separate from the Finish for the System Editor. Number of Elements now displays as 65 (sprinklers) in the system. 12 Select a sprinkler in the upper half of the model. for Solution Type. On the Options Bar. verify that Solutions is selected. On the Options Bar. 11 On the Edit System toolbar. and click Modify. 13 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. (Layout 448 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 10 NOTE When you use multiple selections.

17 Select the vertical branch again. and drag the tee junction control to the intersection to the left as shown. and drag the elbow junction control to the left to combine the branch piping as shown. 15 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the model.The layout automatically provides a path from the upper layout to the cross created earlier. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 449 . 16 Select the vertical pipe to the lower sprinkler in the corner office (201).

Click the tee junction control again and continue the adjustment. 20 On the Design Bar.18 Scroll to the right and select the branch to the lower-right sprinkler in Office 208. 450 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . The piping for the upper half of the model displays. 19 Using the same method. drag each end of the branch to the left to combine it with the piping to the sprinkler just to above. as shown. click Finish Layout. The tee junction control will stop at the junction of the tee from the main piping.

In this exercise. and press Tab 3 times. The entire system should be highlighted. indicating connectivity throughout the system. you create the dry fire protection system. you added the remaining wet system sprinklers and logically connected them to the existing system. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System on page 451. a valve would isolate the dry system from the wet system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 22 You can save the open file if you wish. After creating the system. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 215. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. For this exercise. it is enough show how the system is created without adding a valve. and checked connectivity. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers.Check pipe connectivity 21 Highlight the pipe from the riser in the stairwell. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 451 . As with the wet system. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise. and the pipes for this system would not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. In the next exercise. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. In an actual dry system.

Be careful to select only the sprinkler. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. press Tab until the sprinkler displays on the status bar at the lower left corner of the window. and double-click 2 . 3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 216.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. Place sprinklers 2 Zoom in to view the 3 spaces at the bottom of the model. If necessary. Open the i Creating the Dry System. 1 In the Project Browser.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. 452 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. Verify that Copy is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. then move the cursor diagonally to the upper-right. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 453 . as shown. 8 Click Modify. click to specify the copy start point. 7 Move the cursor to the right into Server Room 215. The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. along the same horizontal ceiling grid.4 On the Edit toolbar. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. click (Copy). 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler. and click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler.

The system is created and listed in the System Browser. enter 1/8" / 12". verify that 9' 0" is specified.Next. verify that 1/2" is selected. click Pipe. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. Create the dry system 9 While pressing CTRL. 454 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . you change the sprinkler type.Fire Prot to make it the active view.Hosted : 1/2" Dry Pendent.Pendent . double-click 2 . select both Server Room 215 sprinklers.Dry . 13 In the System Browser. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. Create the dry system piping 15 In the Project Browser. and click Select The selected system displays in red. click System Browser. 14 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. 18 In the Type Selector. click (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign the sprinklers to it. For Slope. Confirm and validate the system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 16 Zoom in on Server Room 215. 19 On the Options Bar. The System Browser opens. For Offset. This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. select Sprinkler . 17 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry.

click to connect the pipe. when the snap for the lower-left sprinkler displays. and click. as shown. 22 Continue to draw the pipe to the left and.20 Click the horizontal pipe directly above the upper-right sprinkler. Do not connect to the upper right sprinkler. to specify a starting point for the piping 21 Draw the pipe preview straight down to a point even with the lower-left sprinkler. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 455 .

All categories are selected except the Lines category. click Edit. select Show categories from all disciplines.23 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. 28 Clear Show categories from all disciplines. and clear the Lines category. 25 Right-click an empty area in the drawing area. and click View Properties. You can confirm this in the 3D view or by checking connectivity. 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Click OK twice. The pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper-right sprinkler. and double-click 3D. expand Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 3D Views. Only the sprinklers and piping are visible in the view. under Instance Parameters. click All. as shown. Next. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click None. 456 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 27 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. on the Model Categories tab. and zoom in on the dry fire protection system. All categories are cleared. 24 In the Project Browser. select any category. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click All. and clear a check mark from any category.

The sprinkler connects into the pipe. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. 31 On the Options Bar. To follow good design practice. The slope value displays next to the slope control.30 Select the unconnected sprinkler. 32 Zoom the view. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 457 . the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes. click . and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. You can click the slope control to change the reference end for the slope. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. Then.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.Fire Prot to make the view active. In this exercise. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. you placed dry system sprinklers. indicating that they are connected.Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 33 Zoom out to display the entire model. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. 458 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click the Training Files icon. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. and press TAB 3 times. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Additionally. and double-click 3D to make the view active. highlight a pipe segment in the dry system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight. Open the i Modifying Pipe Diameters. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and double-click 2. Modifying Pipe Diameters on page 458. 3 In the Project Browser. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. You have completed the dry fire protection system. First. 2 If necessary. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When you tile 2 views. checked pipe connectivity. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. the active view is tiled to the left. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 215.

and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. starting at the upper-left corner of the building. it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs. click Check None. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection piping. 7 On the Options Bar.You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Changing the diameter. width. and click OK. 8 In the Filter dialog. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 459 . Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 6 The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. height. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. click .Fire Prot view. or width. width. or height. In the 2. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter.

11 Select any pipe segment and verify the 1 inch diameter on the Options Bar. 12 Place the cursor over a main pipe segment. 10 On the Options Bar. the elbow and the horizontal pipe to the main piping to remove them from the selection. select 1". zoom in on the supply pipe in the stairwell. and press TAB twice.9 Click in the 3D view to make it active. verifying that it is connected. 460 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 1 inch diameter except for the supply piping. and while pressing SHIFT. for D: (diameter). select the supply pipe in the stairwell. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights.

NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. click (Pin) to prevent the linked model from moving. draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe.Modify the diameter of the main 13 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. If branch segments are selected. TIP If you have difficulty selecting piping segments without moving the linked architectural model. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 461 . and on the toolbar. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection. select the model.

14 With the main selected. 462 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . the pipe fittings. while pressing CTRL. draw a pick box around the horizontal main. and the supply pipe.

18 On the Options Bar. for D. select Fine. NOTE If you select sprinklers with the pipes and pipe fittings. especially around the pipe fittings. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 463 . The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select the tee connecting the supply piping to the main. The following table shows the pipe diameter that will be used for each branch in the fire protection systems. and on the View Control Bar. use the pipes and pipe fittings. select Shading with Edges. 15 On the Options Bar. for D: 6".The main piping is selected and displays in red. (Filter) to select only 16 Double-click the 3D view. for Detail Level. 19 Validate the pipe run geometry. and for Model Graphics Style. Sprinklers Serviced 1. 17 In the 3D view. select 4". 2 3 4. Modify the diameter of branch pipes 20 The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.

The pipe diameter is modified. for Detail. and the 2 dry sprinklers in Office 215). select Fine and for Model Graphics Style. 26 Select the next pipe segment and tee to the right. The specifications requires a diameter of 2" for this pipe segment. 22 Enter ZR. for D:. and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 offices in the building. select 2". This piping services 6 sprinklers (4 in the corner office. Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. Be sure to include the tee at the right end of the pipe run in your selection.21 Click in the 2 . 24 Select the pipe segments and fittings that connect Office 214 and 215 directly to the main as shown. 23 On the View Control Bar. select Shading with Edges. 25 On the Options Bar.Fire Prot view to make it active. You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the requirements. 464 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

for D:. for D: select 1 1/2". 29 Select the pipe and tee that connects the first sprinkler on the branch. and on the Options Bar. Next. It’s easier to select the fitting above the first sprinkler in this branch from a 3D view. you continue to modify the pipe branch.This segment services 4 sprinklers. 27 On the Options Bar. zoom in on the piping to Office 216. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 465 . select 1 1/2". 28 Double-click 3D to make it the active view.

and after the segment highlights. 32 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 36 Place the cursor over the first pipe segment that connecting the branch to the main. and on the Options Bar. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. 33 On the Options Bar. select Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. 38 Place the cursor over the vertical supply pipe in the stairwell. Next. verify that Pipe Size Tag is loaded. 34 In the Tag dialog. zoom in on the branch that you modified in the preceding step. 35 Click OK. click to place the tag. press Tab until the pipe is highlighted place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell. Click Tags. you place a tag and include a leader line. Clear Leader. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected.30 Select the segment and fitting to the remaining sprinklers on this branch. NOTE Tags are view specific. for Pipes. Tag the pipes 31 In the 2 Fire Prot view. for D: select 1 1/4". 37 On the Options Bar. 466 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . under Category.

Sprinklers Serviced 1. 40 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. and finish placing the pipe tags. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 467 . Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 41 For more practice use the methods that you learned in this exercise to finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. Next.39 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows). and finish tagging the pipes. you finish modifying the pipe run diameters. 2 3 4.

you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. In this tutorial. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. In this exercise. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.42 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. For additional practice. The completed fire protection system is included in the i Completed Fire Protection System. 468 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. You added tags the pipes. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish.

Steam. alarm systems and others. you begin by modifying existing families to create new types. pipe fittings. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology.Creating Revit MEP Content 9 This tutorial expands your knowledge of the Family Editor by introducing several unique features in Revit MEP. as after this selection is made. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. telephone. you use the Family Editor to modify and create tags and annotation symbols. The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Pipe connectors are used for piping. it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline. duct fittings. ■ Duct connectors are associated with ductwork. In this tutorial. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Before using this tutorial. After learning to modify an existing family. but also to understand how the settings in the Family Editor affect the family. medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. including power. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly. not only for the geometry. Revit MEP operation and the behavior of your components depends to a great extent on how you create specific components. and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids. Revit MEP Content The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. In the third lesson. you create a new lighting fixture and 2 pipe fittings. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections. Although the exercises in this tutorial describe settings that are specific to a particular 469 . Family Editor Creating a family requires careful thought. you should have a working knowledge of Revit MEP and experience with the actual components that you will be modeling. and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. ■ ■ NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids.

rfa. 5 In the Format dialog. Create formulas for parameters. click the Format column. 470 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 7 Save the family. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Place connectors. 6 Click OK to close the Project Units window. for Rounding. select Electrical.mechanical. Set project units 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. You can create a component from scratch. For example. There are several ways to create a family with the Family Editor. The process you use to create the family will determine how a part flexes as geometric parameters are modified. or plumbing component. you may want to create multiple types within the existing family instead of creating a new family. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. and for Current.Downblast. it is easier to modify a component. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor Exhaust Ventilator . Save a copy of the family 1 Click File ➤ Save As. select 1 decimal place. there are times when it is best to create a new family instead of attempting to create a single family with types to address every application. instead of creating a new one. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Downblast . navigate to a folder of your choice. although it may be easier to modify an existing family. and then load it into the project. If a family you are creating is very similar to an existing family. You can modify an existing component. open it in the Family Editor. it is important to recognize how components interact to affect the overall design. Finally. and click OK. for Discipline. modify it as needed. click the Training Files icon. the heat released by a light fixture affects the cooling requirements for a space. Modifying a Fan Family In this exercise you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modify an existing family. Modifying Families In this lesson. you modify existing components to create new types and build custom component families. Map parameters Create multiple types within a family. At times. If you can find a component that is similar to the family that you want. and save the family as Exhaust Ventilator . electrical. Define shared parameters. 2 In the Save As dialog.

15 For Name. Modifying a Fan Family | 471 . and click OK. 12 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 14 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. select Motor FLA. enter Common For Type. 11 If you have not already created a shared parameter file. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. To reuse this tutorial. and click Select. under Parameters. select the Electrical Engineering. enter a File name (for example. and click Create. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. and click Select. click the Shared parameter option. under Parameters. click New. 17 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 16 Under Parameters. select the Type option. NOTE The parameter values stored in the shared parameter file will remain after completing this tutorial. you must remove the shared parameter text file created in the previous step.Create Shared Parameters 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select the Shared parameter option. 13 Browse to a folder. for Group parameter under. enter Text 18 Click OK. enter Motor HP For Discipline. Shared_Parameters) for the shared parameter file. under Groups. and click Save. click New. create additional shared parameters with the following properties: Name Voltage Motor FLA Power Phase Number of Poles Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Electrical Type Electrical Potential Current Power Integer Number of Poles 20 Click OK. Add shared parameters to the Family Type 21 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 23 In the Family Types dialog. enter MEP. 19 Using the same method. click Add. Click Yes. click Family Types 9 In the Family Types dialog. 24 In the Parameter Properties dialog. The new parameter is added to the Family Types dialog under the Electrical Engineering category. you will be prompted to choose a file from another project or to create a new file. click Add.

select the Type option.460 V .3 Ph 3 HP . under Parameter Data.8 7.25 In the Shared Parameters dialog. as defined below: Parameter Phase Number of Poles Motor HP Power Group Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Mechanical Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Type Type Type Type Create a parameter formula to calculate power 28 In the Formula column for Power. Create New Family Types 29 Under Family Types. add the following shared parameters to the family type. under Parameters. select MEP.4 Motor HP = 1/6 The value for Power is calculated from the parameter values specified. for Parameter Group. select Electrical Engineering. 3.8 Motor HP 1 2 3 34 Click OK. create additional Family Types with the following parameter values: Name 1 HP . and click OK.1 Ph. 32 Specify the following values for the shared parameters in the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Voltage = 115 Phase = 1 Number of Poles = 1 Motor FLA = 4. enter 1/6 HP . and click OK. click New.1 Ph 2 HP . 31 Click OK.208 V .208 V .5 4. 27 Using the same method. 472 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .115 V . enter the following formula: Voltage * Motor FLA * sqrt(if(Phase = 3. 26 In the Parameter Properties. 33 Using the same method. 35 Save the family.3 Ph Voltage 208 208 460 Phase 1 3 3 Number of Poles Motor FLA 2 3 3 8. 1)) NOTE Formulas are case sensitive… make sure you use the same case as the names of the parameters you created. 30 For Name. for Group parameter under. select Voltage.

See Connectors on page 561. including power.Add an electrical connector 36 Electrical connectors are used for a variety of electrical systems. and verify that is selected. Connections between components in a power system must have connectors with the same. system type. NOTE If necessary. The electrical connector that you add here will ultimately be used in a power system. See Connector Placement on page 567. TIP You can also hold the right mouse button. alarm systems and others. while pressing Shift. Click and drag the View Cube at the upper right corner of the view to spin the ventilator as shown. press Tab to cycle through the active faces until the narrow face at the base of the fan is highlighted. and dragging the cursor to spin a model.Balanced. 39 Highlight the narrow face at the base of the fan housing and click to place the connector on the center of the face. Connectors can be placed on a Face or on a Work Plane. 37 On the Design Bar. number of poles and the same voltage specified. select Power . telephone. click Electrical Connector. 40 Click Modify Modifying a Fan Family | 473 . 38 On the Options Bar.

. It also demonstrates the use of shared parameters and parameter mapping. (The exact location is not important. click list. 43 Select the Electrical connector created in the previous section.) 60 Click Modify. select 1 HP-208V-1 Ph. 474 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Load into Projects. and on the Options Bar. click Mechanical Equipment. click .3 Ph. 44 On the Options Bar.460 V . 45 In the Element Properties dialog. specify an associated family parameter for the following parameters: Parameter Number of Poles Apparent Load Associated (shared) Parameter Number of Poles Power 48 Under Electrical Loads. 42 In the Family Types dialog. 53 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. select Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. 64 Save the family. and double-click 2 . and again observe the Type Parameter values. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. The values should correspond to the values entered when you created the new family types.Downblast. 59 Move the cursor into the drawing area and click to add the Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. for Voltage. 54 Click Window menu ➤ Exhaust Ventilator .rvt displays in the drawing area.rfa to make the family the active view. click the Training Files icon. 47 Using the same method. 49 Click OK. for Load Classification. (It is not necessary to save the i Sample Project. 61 Select the fan. 58 On the Mechanical Design Bar. select HVAC. and click OK. Flex the part 51 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 55 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 56 The i Sample Project.Mech.) Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family This exercise demonstrates using various settings on the electrical connector to define a fan powered box with variable power requirements for electric heat and motor size. click 46 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. in the = column. click Family Types. and observe the values in the Type Parameters 62 For Type. 52 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 63 Click OK.rvt file. 50 Save the family. for Name.Map Parameter Values to Connector 41 On the Design Bar. 57 In the Project Browser. and in the Type Selector. select Voltage. select 3 HP .

3 On the Options Bar.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Apparent Power Phase 1. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 5 Click Family Types. 4 Click Yes when prompted to open the family for editing.Power. go back and complete the previous Modifying a Fan Family exercise. The MEP group was created in the Modifying a Fan Family exercise and the parameters created in that exercise are listed under Parameters. 11 Under Parameters. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. under Parameters. for Parameter group. you will need to complete that exercise to create shared parameters that are used in this exercise. 10 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. It this is not the case. click Edit Family. Open the family and create parameters 1 In the Project Browser. select MEP. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. 6 In the Family Types dialog. select the Shared parameter option. For Type. click the Training Files icon. 2 Select the VAV box. See Modifying a Fan Family on page 470. NOTE If you have not already completed the previous exercise. click New. click Add. select Power. and double-click 1 . and click Select. select Electrical. 9 Click Edit. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 475 . 8 In the Shared Parameters dialog. For Discipline.rvt. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select MEP. for Parameter group.

and click Select. Instance parameters have (default) appended to the parameter name. select Electrical Engineering. click Add. and click OK. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog. verify that Size 2 . add the following shared parameters to the family type. select Electrical Engineering. under Parameter Data. 19 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Group parameter under. under Parameters. 17 In the Family Types dialog.13 Using the same method. 15 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select the Instance option. select Apparent Power Phase 2. specify formulas for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Voltage. enter 3. as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor FLA Motor HP Motor On Phase Number of Poles Phase Voltage Group parameter under Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Instance Instance Type Type Instance Type Type Type 22 In the Family Types dialog.6 inch Inlet is selected for Name. enter 480. and click OK. Apparent Power Phase 1 is added as an instance parameter under the Electrical Engineering group in the Family Types dialog. select the Instance option. select Apparent Power Phase 1. select the Shared parameter option. for Group parameter under. 23 In the Formula column. under Parameter Data. 21 Using the same method. and click OK 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. For Phase. create the following additional shared parameters as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 2 Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor On Phase Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Type Power Power Power Integer 14 Click OK. 476 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

enter 1/6. For Motor On Phase. Motor FLA * 277 V. 30 Save the family as Parallel Fan Powered VAV. 0 VA). Use the same case for the names in formulas as the names entered when you created the parameters. 24 Under Electrical Engineering.rfa. enter Size 3 . 28 Using the same method. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 1. For Motor FLA. For Motor On Phase. enter 2. enter 1. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 2.4 29 Click OK to close the Family Types dialog.9 3. click new. For Apparent Power Phase 3. ■ ■ NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. For Apparent Power Phase 2. create additional types.2. Place connector and map parameters 31 Click and drag the view cube to spin the model around so you can see the controls box as shown. 25 Under Family Types. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 477 . 26 In the Name dialog.8 inch Inlet type: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles. enter 1.3. Motor FLA * 277 V. enter 1. enter 1/4. 0 VA). 0 VA). and click OK. For Motor HP.8 inch Inlet.2 5. enter 3. specify the following parameters for the Size 3 . enter 3. For Motor HP. specify the following parameter values for the Size 2 .■ For Apparent Power Phase 1. and specify the parameters for each size listed below: Name Number of Poles 3 3 3 Motor On Motor HP Phase (Default) 1 1 1 1/3 1/2 3/4 Motor FLA Size 4 – 10 inch Inlet Size 5 – 12 inch Inlet Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet 2. For Motor FLA.6 inch Inlet VAV: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles. 27 In the Family Types dialog. in the Value column. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 3. Motor FLA * 277 V.

For Apparent Load Phase 2. 34 Highlight the large face on the controls box. click in the Voltage. click in the column. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select Apparent Power Phase 2. and click OK. and click OK.Unbalanced. specify values for the following parameters: ■ For Number of Poles. and verify that is selected. click in the column. ■ 478 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click . select Number of Poles. and click to add the connector on the face. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select Power . click in the column. select ■ ■ For Apparent Load Phase 1. select Apparent Power Phase 1. click Electrical Connector. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.32 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. column. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 35 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 33 On the Options Bar. 36 Select the connector. For Voltage.

1000. and on the Options Bar. enter HVAC. select Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet. for Panel. ■ ■ 38 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog. 51 Click OK. click (Edit Circuit on Panel). The loads on phases A. For Electric Heat Power. click Load into Projects. . For System Type. and click Yes. and click OK. 42 In the Project Browser. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 479 .■ For Apparent Load Phase 3. and C are 2512. select Override parameter values of existing types. 52 Select the VAV box. enter 2. 46 Select the VAV box. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 If prompted. verify that Power . 39 Save the family. click in the column. and double-click 1 . and click . Flex the family 40 On the Design Bar. enter 3000.6 inch Inlet is selected in the Type Selector. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. 50 Select panel HA. B. 47 Verify that Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 2 . and on the Options Bar. 49 Click OK. For Load Classification. respectively. 45 Click Modify.Unbalanced is selected. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ For Motor On Phase. click 44 Click (Create Power Circuit). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. 48 In the Element Properties dialog. select panel HA. 43 Select the VAV box. and click . enter 1. and specify the following parameters: ■ For Motor On Phase. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. for Type. select Apparent Power Phase 3.Power. and 1000.

and click Yes. (Create (Select Equipment for System). and 3667. 62 Click OK. and in the drawing area. and on the Options Bar click Supply Air System). 56 Select panel HA. 59 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so you can see the air supply connector. and double-click 1 . verify that Calculated is selected for Flow Configuration. 4027. as shown. respectively. When the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. The loads on phases A. click . 54 Click OK. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. 67 On the Options Bar. click Load into Projects. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.■ For Electric Heat Power. click the VAV box.Mech. 66 Select the 4 supply air terminals in the left room. 57 Click OK. select 480 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . under Mechanical. Create a supply air system 65 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. 63 On the Design Bar.rfa. 60 Select the supply air connector. 55 Click Modify. and C have updated to 4819. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the aggregate air flow for the downstream components. B. Specify Flow Configuration for the VAV 58 Click Window menu ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV. 64 If prompted. enter 11000. select Override parameter values of existing types. click .

click Design Bar. and click Settings. enter 6' 0". 70 Click OK 71 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. 69 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. to select layout 6 of 6. For Offset enter 9' 0". Ductwork is created for the selected solution.68 Click (Layout Paths). verify the following Main and Branch settings: Main ■ ■ For Duct Type. verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. and on the Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 481 . click Finish Layout. Branch ■ ■ ■ ■ For Duct Type. For Flex Duct Type. verify that Flex Duct Round : Flex .Round is selected. For Offset enter 9' 0".

and select Properties. Because the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. When Flow Configuration is set to System the Flow Factor parameter is active. the new sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals. and press Enter to modify the air flow for the air terminal. In this case the first downstream zone would receive a flow of 8 gpm (0. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is updated to 750 CFM. expand Mechanical (1 systems) ➤ Supply Air ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV: Size 2 . 79 In the Element Properties dialog.4 specified for Flow and the other with 0. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. The Preset and System settings for Flow Configuration are used together to allow specifying a percentage of the system flow to be allocated to each downstream component. 76 Click OK. and the other would receive a flow of 12 gpm (0. 78 Again.6 specified for Flow. and select Properties. This allows specifying a different portion of the system flow to each downstream subsystem. Using the combination of Preset and System settings on connectors lets you distribute flow according to the demands of a particular space. enter 300.6 X 20 gpm). the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals—in this case 600 CFM (4 X 150 CFM). scroll down to Mechanical Airflow. 77 Double-click a tag associated with one of the air terminals supplied by the VAV. a boiler may have its supply preset to 20 gpm (system supply = 20 gpm) and the connectors at 2 downstream zone valves set to System. but one with 0.6 inch Inlet VAV. The Flow Factor parameter is specified as a value between 0 and 1. 73 In the System Browser. For example. with the total for all downstream components equal to 1.72 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser. and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is 600 CFM. 80 Click OK. 75 In the Element Properties dialog. 74 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. 482 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .4 X 20 gpm).

Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the first section. The final section demonstrates how to load. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Loads. 81 Close the Family and Sample Project files. 5 Click OK.208V MCB . 2 In the drawing area. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 483 . Modifying Electrical Equipment In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. select the connector. insert. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Number of Poles.rfa.Surface. and in the following section you modify a 480V/3Ph primary transformer to create a 480V/1Ph to 240V/1Ph secondary transformer.240V MCB . you must create 2 additional instance parameters for the component family. and then you use the new families in a project.rfa. For Voltage. you modify a 208V/3Ph panel to create a 240V/3Ph family. To create unequal percentages for several downstream subsystems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save As.NOTE Because Flow Factor and Flow Configuration are properties of the connector. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . under Electrical . all instances of the family in a project will have the same factor. 7 In the Save As dialog. you modify existing electrical equipment families to create new families. click .Surface. 3 On the Options Bar. and connect components of the newly created families in a simple project. enter 240. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorLighting and Appliance Panelboard . Modify an existing panel family 1 In the Project Browser. and then map the Flow Factor to the value specified for each instance of the component used in the project. enter 2.

you create a new family type.480V Primary.rfa. 16 In the Family Types dialog. Otherwise. select 112. 13 For Name. for Primary Number of Poles. click the Training Files icon. click the Training Files icon. click Family Types. 17 Under Electrical. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Single Phase Transformer . Modify an existing transformer family 9 Click File menu ➤ Open.5 kVA. click New. 11 Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorDry Type Transformers . click Electrical Equipment. Primary Number of Poles is 2.480-208-120V . for Name. 21 Under Electrical. 15 Using the same method. you use the modified families in a project. 20 In the Name dialog. delete all of the remaining types. you modify an existing family type. and click Electrical. the inch value will be applied to the foot value. NOTE If the Electrical tab is not available on the Design Bar.rvt. 22 Under Dimensions. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Length. 14 Under Family Types. verify that 15 kVA is selected. 484 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 23 Click OK. Notice that the new family type is selected for Name. 12 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. 25 In the Save As dialog. Next. 28 In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click the Design Bar. except for 15 kVA. verify the following: ■ ■ Primary Voltage is 480.8 Click File menu ➤ Close. 24 Click File ➤ Save As. Load the new panel and transformer families into a project 27 Click File menu ➤ Open.NEMA Type 2. enter 2. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 3 kVA. for Name. In the following sections. enter 0' 10 1/2" For Width. and click OK. enter 0' 8 5/8" NOTE You must enter 0 for the foot value. enter 0' 6 1/2" For Height. 30 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar.rfa.00 V. 19 Under Family Types. 29 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. click Delete. 18 Click Apply. Next.

240V MCB . select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . navigate to the folder where you saved the new families. TIP You can verify that the electrical families were loaded by expanding Families ➤ Electrical Equipment in the Project Browser. TIP You can press Spacebar to rotate a family if placement seems difficult. 35 In the Type Selector. click Electrical Equipment. and click Open. 36 Move the cursor over the wall. 34 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. click Load. select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. You can also click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and double-click 1 .rfa.Power to make it the active view. do the following: ■ Place a Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel on the wall to the right of the first panel.rfa and Single Phase Transformer .240V MCB .Surface. then while pressing CTRL.480V Primary. Test the new electrical equipment in a project 33 In the Project Browser.31 On the Options Bar. The new families are loaded into the project. 37 Using the same method. and after panel snaps to the inside face of the wall. NOTE The panel is a wall-hosted family—it can only be placed on a wall.Surface : 100A. 32 In the Open dialog. click to place the panel on the wall as shown. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 485 .

select 480 Wye. 40 On the Options Bar. select 120/240 Single. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Distribution Systems. For Panel Name. click . For Wires. select 277. 41 With the panel selected. For Phase. 45 Click Add. Create a system 39 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel. enter DP. 47 Click OK. for Distribution Sys. select the Single Phase Transformer. verify that Single is selected. select 480/277 Wye. 48 In the drawing area. 46 In the right pane. click Electrical Settings.Loads. 44 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. For L-L Voltage. 49 On the Options Bar.Loads. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: For Secondary Distribution System. under Electrical . L-G Voltage. 486 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .480V Primary : 15kVA transformer on the wall between the panels. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 480 Wye. Create a new distribution system 43 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. under Electrical . for Panel Name.■ Place a Single Phase Transformer . select 3. For Distribution System Types. select 480. enter T-LC. 38 Click Modify. Next. you create a system to logically connect the panels to the transformer. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. click ■ ■ ■ ■ . A new row is added in the right pane. and click OK.

Loads. This creates a logical circuit between the LC panel to the transformer. select T-LC. select 120/240 Single. Notice that 480 Wye is selected for Distribution Sys on the Options Bar. 59 On the Options Bar. select DP. enter LC. under Electrical . select the transformer. The DP panel is logically connected to the transformer 54 Click Modify. Click . and on the Options Bar. click a new circuit. click to create a new circuit.240V MCB . and click OK. 61 Close the Simple Room without saving. ■ 57 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ (Create Power Circuit) to create Click (Select a Panel for the Circuit). on the Options Bar. do the following: ■ For Distribution Sys. For Panel. 56 On the Options Bar. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 487 .Surface : 100A (LC) panel.Surface : 100A panel. . click 60 On the Options Bar. 58 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Panel Name. 52 With the transformer selected.240V MCB . for Panel. 53 On the Options Bar.51 In the drawing area. This indicates that the transformer is associated with that distribution system. 55 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

click Pipe Connector. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. (Model Graphics Style) ➤ Hidden Line. click (Temporary Hide/Isolate) ➤ Hide Element.Modifying a Water Closet This exercise demonstrates adding piping connectors to a water closet family and setting typical connector properties for domestic cold water and sanitary systems. Select the wall.Toilet . for System Type.Wall Mount Flush Valve. and verify that is selected. 1 The toilet is a wall-hosted component. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. you will be working at the back of the toilet. and the extrusion that represents the wall is visible in the view. click the Training Files icon.rfa. click 2 On the View Control Bar. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorCommercial . select Sanitary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 488 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 3 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so it is oriented as shown. so you must hide the wall in the view. and on the View Control Bar. However.

not the flow direction.6 Zoom in. The connector direction determines the direction from which it will accept connections from other components. and move the cursor over the larger of the 2 round extrusions at the back of the toilet as shown. and click to add the connector. click pointing away from the bowl. 10 Click . highlight the round face. 7 Click Modify. so that the connector direction is The arrow indicates the connector direction. 9 If the arrow is pointing in toward the toilet bowl. 8 Select the connector. Modifying a Water Closet | 489 .

in the location shown. select In. Select Allow Slope Adjustments For Fixture Units. select Fixture Units. enter 0' 1 1/2". specify values for the following parameters: For Radius. For Flow Configuration. 12 Click OK.11 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. For Flow Direction. Clear Allow Slope Adjustments 490 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 4. click 15 On the Options Bar. For Flow Direction. click ■ ■ ■ to specify connector direction. add a Domestic Cold Water system Piping Connector. 14 Select the connector. enter 0 3/4". 13 Using the same method. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Radius. select Out. and click Modify. .

enter 2. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser. and in the Save As dialog. 2 In the drawing area. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.Ceiling Mech. and double-click 1 . navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Toilet . For Fixture Units. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. select Fixture Units. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family | 491 .rfa. you modify a diffuser tag family to provide a type mark instead of the default instance mark. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 17 Click OK.Commercial Wall Mount Flush Valve. 18 Click File ➤ Save As. select a diffuser tag. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.5.■ ■ For Flow Configuration. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family In this exercise.

The sample text changes to 1t.3 On the Options Bar. and click Yes when asked to open the diffuser tag for editing. and click from label). The diffuser tag is composed of two labels separated by a horizontal line. 5 In the Edit Label dialog. (Remove parameter (Add parameter to label). select Mark. 6 Under Category Parameters. and on the Options Bar. under Label Parameters. click Edit Label. click Edit Family. select Type Mark. The Family Editor opens. Each label is associated with a parameter. 492 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click 7 Click OK. 4 Select the top label (1i).

Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family In this exercise. click Load into Projects. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 493 . R-1.rvt. in the Load into Projects dialog. and the return air diffuser type.8 On the Design Bar. you modify a light fixture tag family to include panel and circuit information. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. click Yes. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. The project becomes active and the diffuser tag updates to display the supply air terminal type. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 When prompted to overwrite the existing Diffuser Tag. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. If more than one project is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. without saving. select i Sample Project. S-1.

1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. and after listening dimensions display.Lighting. click Edit Family. and double-click 1 . and click Yes when asked to open the light fixture tag for editing. enter 0 1/8". 6 On the Options Bar. click Multiple. and press Enter to specify the copy end point. 7 Click the midpoint of the label to specify the copy start point. select a light fixture tag. 5 On the Edit toolbar. select the 1i label. The Family Editor opens. 8 Move the cursor straight down. click (Copy). 4 In the drawing area. 3 On the Options Bar. The light fixture tag is composed of a label that is associated with a parameter. 494 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 2 In the drawing area.

The label is copied. 9 Repeat the previous steps to create a second copy of the label. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 495 .

you modify 2 labels. select Type Mark. under Label Parameters. The middle label text changes to PNL and the label is associated with the Panel parameter. enter PNL in the Sample Value column. 11 Select the bottom line of the box. 12 Select the middle label. 496 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . for the Panel parameter. and drag it down so that the box contains all 3 labels. and click parameter from label). You need to modify this box.10 Click Modify. (Remove 15 Under Label Parameters. Notice that the bounding box contains only the first label. and on the Options Bar. click Edit Label. Next. 13 In the Edit Label dialog. 14 Under Category Parameters. 16 Click OK. The sample value is the text that identifies this label in the Family Editor. select Panel. and click (Add parameter to label).

and click (Remove parameter from label) (Add parameter to label). and click OK. select Override parameter values of existing types. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing are. select i Sample Project. and the light fixture tags update to display the panel and circuit information. select Circuit Number. ■ ■ Under Category Parameters. and click For the Circuit Number parameter. select Type Mark. modify the bottom label with the following Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Label Parameters. enter CKT in the Sample Value column The 3 light fixture labels are as shown.rvt. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 497 . 19 If prompted.17 Using the same method. in the Load into Projects dialog. and click Yes. click Load into Projects. Load the light fixture tag family into a project 18 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. If more than one project is open.

without saving. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. Templates also define the type of family (annotation. For example. Creating Families In this lesson you learn how features of the Family Editor allow you to build custom component families. model. such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture. The process of creating a component family includes the following steps: 1 Select the appropriate family template. There are various light fixture family templates available in Revit MEP. In some cases. or profile). and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. The hosting of a component is defined by the template used when the family is originally created. it is important that you start your lighting family with one of these templates. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. Creating a Light Fixture Family In this exercise you create an 8” ceiling hosted recessed downlight. the template also defines characteristics of how the family works.20 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. You cannot change these characteristics after you have created the family. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. titleblock. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 9 Save the newly-defined family. If you expect to render your lighting designs. as they have reference 498 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

The . these planes are Light Source Axis (L/R). Spot Tilt Angle. Locate IES data file 1 Using Windows Explorer. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\IES folder. Using this face hosted family provides the ability for the fixture to be hosted by. you may use a non-lighting family template. and copy the Ltl9815. The Linear template contains a model line representing the light source along the F/B axis. 7 Click OK.ies files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. Each family has additional parameters depending on whether it is a linear fixture. Create a new lighting family 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 6 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the Always Vertical option Select Light Source For Part Type.rft. objects in the linked file. these planes are Light Source Axis (F/B).ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). and Light Source Elevation.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. there are lighting templates for non-hosted. the family will have the additional parameters: Spot Beam Angle. and wall hosted objects.rft. a spot fixture. (This is the location from which the .planes that define the location of the light source. you can also specify a .rft) lighting templates. select Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. and Light Source Elevation.rft). 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. or a generic fixture. Tilt Plane. When you use a spot light template. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 499 . For spot light templates (Spot Lighting Fixture*. Spot Spread Angle. and double-click Front. When creating a lighting family. Using the generic face hosted and non-hosted lighting fixtures has the limitation that the hosting geometry cannot be cut.ies file. 5 Under Family Category.rft) and linear (Linear Lighting Fixture*. For generic (Lighting Fixture*. This file contains engineering data that can be used to calculate the coefficient of utilization of the fixture. This can be shortened or lengthened as necessary to model the linear lighting fixture. Additionally. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. and click Open. and move with. Lighting manufacturers often allow you to download .ies file is not used for rendering. ceiling hosted. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor.ies file.ies files from the Web for their fixtures. 3 In the New dialog. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. you must determine the correct path to the IES file as defined by the IESFileLocation parameter in the Revit. Light Source Axis (L/R). select Lighting Fixtures. When working in a linked file environment. 8 In the Project Browser. select the Normal option Clear the Shared option NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. such as Generic Model face based.

and Chain. then draw a vertical line segment down to the ceiling (8"). and draw a 4" horizontal line to the left of the center. 11 In the Save As dialog. 13 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. and finish with a 1" horizontal line segment to the left. 14 On the Options Bar.0" and zoom in very close to create the Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. click Lines. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and drag it up to a point 4" above the Basic Ceiling and Ceiling Plane as shown. enter 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. Start at the Center (Left/Right) vertical reference plane. 15 Zoom in on the Light Source Elevation. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. for File name. Define the fixture geometry 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. specify 0' 0". 500 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click . 4" above the Light Source reference plane. . and sketch the shape of the fixture as shown.TIP You may want set the scale to 6" = 1' .rfa. and for Offset. 9 Select the Light Source Elevation Plane.

Creating a Light Fixture Family | 501 . then click just above the line. and for Offset. enter 1/16". click .Next you will duplicate the original outline. move the cursor over the line. 19 Using the same method. press Tab to highlight the short line. 18 Click just above the upper horizontal line to add a line 1/16" above the existing line as shown. 16 Click Lines. click just to the left of the vertical line and just above the lower horizontal line to define the thickness for the fixture as shown. offset by 1/16" to define the thickness of the light fixture housing. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the short horizontal line at the base. 17 On the Options Bar.

clear Chain. click Lines. 22 Draw lines to close the outline at the top right and lower left as shown. 21 On the Options Bar.20 On the Design Bar. and for Offset. enter 0' 0". 502 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click and .

24 On the toolbar. click Axis. click (Trim). 26 Click Finish Sketch. but make sure it is coincident with the vertical plane. and clean up the inside corner as shown.23 Click Modify. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 503 . The length of the line and its exact location are not important. 25 On the Design Bar. and sketch the axis line for the revolve as indicated below by the dark line.

29 In the Light Source Definition dialog.Lighting ■ For Calculate Coefficient of Utilization. click Family Types. specify values for the following parameters: Under Electrical . select the (yellow) Light Source. not grey) 504 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . for Light distribution. and click OK. click (Photometric Web). select true (green check.27 Save the family. 31 In the Family Types dialog. click Light Source Definition. and on the Options Bar. click (Point). 30 On the Design Bar. Define family and connector properties 28 In the drawing area. for Emit from Shape.

enter 3200.ies in the ■ For Light Loss Factor. For Initial Intensity. click file browser . and is affected by the following fixture properties: ■ ■ ■ Coefficient of Utilization (Instance) Initial Intensity (Type) Light Loss Factor (Type) 32 Click OK. 33 In the Project Browser. and in the Initial Color dialog. click the Value column. enter CF42TRT Under Photometrics ■ ■ For Tilt Angle. enter 90 For Photometric Web File. enter 44. or a static value may be entered. select <Custom>. and on the Options Bar. expand View (All) ➤ 3D Views. and verify that (Place on Face) is selected. 35 On the Design Bar. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 505 .Balanced. for Color Temperature.85 for Value. click Simple for Method. For Initial Color.Under Electrical Loads ■ For Apparent Load. and in the Initial Intensity dialog. and click OK. select Power . for Color Preset. and double-click View 1. click the Value column. ■ ■ A fixture’s Coefficient of Utilization may be calculated based on the geometry of the space. click Electrical Connector. This illumination is based on the lumen method using the total lumen output of the lighting fixtures in the room. click the Value column. click the Value column. click Luminous Flux. Lighting objects in a space contribute to the room’s Average Estimated Illumination.21 VA Under Electrical ■ For Lamp. enter 0. and in the Light Loss Factor dialog. enter 3000 K and click OK. 34 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model to view the top of the fixture. and select Ltl9815. and click OK.

. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. select Apparent Load from the list. and click to place the connector on the top of the fixture. enter 0. and on the View Control Bar. enter Lighting ■ ■ 39 Click OK. 43 Select the yellow Light Source. (Light at the intersection of planes is able to pass through the ceiling.36 Highlight the face at the top of the fixture. 40 Save the family Cut a hole in the ceiling 41 Next you cut a hole in the ceiling. and click ■ ■ ■ . Although the hole is not necessary for construction documents. and double-click View 1. 506 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click in the column.Balanced is specified For Apparent Load. and select the 2 arcs that make up the outside edge of the trim (Temporary Hide/Isolate). click and select Hide Element. click Opening. click ring as shown. and click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog. For Voltage. it permits light to function as expected in renderings. verify that Power . 45 On the Options Bar. enter 277 For Load Classification. and in the Associated Family Parameter dialog. 44 On the Design Bar.95 For System Type. specify values for the following parameters: For Power Factor. 37 Click Modify. select the connector.) In the Project Browser. 42 Spin the model to view the bottom of the ceiling.

50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. In this exercise.46 Click Finish Sketch. 52 In the Project Browser. you will create a flange connector to model pipe flanges for model coordination. and in the Type Selector. The new lighting fixture is loaded into the project. Flex the light fixture 49 Click File menu ➤ Open. 55 Select the 4 downlights in the room. 54 On the Design Bar. Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external . Revit MEP provides a Flange Family | 507 . click 47 On the View Control Bar. and the wattage increases to 168. The lighting level increases to 33 fc. and double-click 1 . you learned: ■ ■ ■ (Temporary Hide/Isolate). select 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. The space tag indicates 22 fc and 135 W. and use a Lookup Table to define several sizes for the flange.Ceiling Elec. The flange will be based on a 150 pound pressure class slip on flange. and select Reset Temporary The basics of how lighting families work How to create a lighting family from a template Where to place IES files for use by lighting families Flange Family In this exercise.csv file. click Hide/Isolate. click the Training Files icon. 48 Save the family.rvt. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. 53 Click Window menu ➤ 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. click Load into Projects. 51 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room.rfa to make the family the active view.On the View Control Bar.

select Generic Model. See Lookup Tables on page 568 and CSV File Structure on page 569.csv file defines multiple sizes for this flange.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder.ini file. 4 Under Family Category. select Pipe Fittings. When installed in the default path. The Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. click Add.rfa. enter NR For Discipline. (This is the location from which the LookupTable files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.csv) file. select Dimensions Select Type 508 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select Pipe Size For Group parameter under. 10 Under Parameters.rft. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog.text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (. 8 Using Windows Explorer. Revit MEP looks in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables to retrieve size information. For Part Type. select the Transition option. 7 Click File ➤ Save.csv file. verify that Family parameter is selected for Parameter Type and specify the following parameter data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. Create parameters 9 Click Family Types. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. 6 Click OK. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. Clear the Shared option. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. and copy the Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. 2 In the New dialog. select Piping For Type. Select the Always Vertical option. and click OK. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 5 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear the Work Plane-Based option. and in the Save As dialog.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path.

0’. and double-click Ref. click .12 Click OK. 15 Specify formulae for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ND. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. enter D1 / 2 For R2. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. select Pipe Size. 13 Using the same method. LenA2. select the Family parameter option For Discipline. ND) For LenA2. ND) For LenA1. "D2". click Ref Plane. enter NR * 2 For R1.0". Flange Family | 509 . For Group parameter under. 0’. LenA1. 17 Save the family. 0’. For Type. ND) For D2. R2 and specify the following parameters for each one: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. enter 2" For Lookup Table Name = Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. and select 3” = 1'. ND. Define work planes 18 In the Project Browser. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. and for Offset. 19 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. "LenA2". 23 Click again to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the left of the center line as shown.csv Click Apply. "D1". 21 On the Options Bar. R1. 0’. 22 Click to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the right of the center line. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ For NR. select Dimensions. enter 0' 2". enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. create Instance parameters named D1. D2. select Piping. ND) 16 Click OK. LenA3. Level. 20 On the Design Bar. "LenA1". enter D2 / 2 For LenA3. Select the Instance option 14 In the Family Types dialog. enter LenA2 – LenA1 For D1.

26 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 On the Design Bar. click .24 Click Modify 25 Select the left plane and. under Identity Data. 31 Click Modify. click Dimension. enter Connector for the Name of the right plane. enter Pipe. and on the Options Bar. 30 Create another dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Pipe (left) plane. for Name. click (Aligned). 27 Using the same method. 29 Create a dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Connector (right) plane. 510 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

click the Value column. and set the Projection Line weight of each category to 5. clear Fine. and on the Options Bar. 41 On the Model Categories tab. 43 On the Design Bar. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane and the 3 vertical reference planes. 47 Select the 3 model lines. select the dimension between the left (Pipe) plane and Center (Left/Right) plane. click Visibility. and label it LenA2. under Other. and click OK. between the intersections with the right and left vertical planes as shown. 46 Click Modify. clear Chain. Flange Family | 511 . under Other. This option disables grips at the intersection of reference planes and specifies that the reference plane cannot be dimensioned to when you place a family into a project. click Model Lines. and select 33 In the Element Properties. for Is Reference. click . but be careful to sketch them on the reference planes. 34 Using the same method.32 Select the dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and right plane (Connector) and click . . The length is not important. 42 Click OK twice. and 44 Draw a vertical line on both the left (Pipe) and the right (Connector) vertical reference planes. 48 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. Define geometry 40 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and on the Options Bar. click the Value column for Label. 39 Save the family. click LenA1 from the list. 36 Click . 45 Draw a horizontal line on the horizontal plane. and select Not a Reference. 38 Click OK. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Object Styles.

50 In the Element Properties dialog. 49 With all 3 lines still selected. from endpoint to endpoint. for Reference. click . and on the Options Bar. move the cursor to the left. 52 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. 56 Using the same method. press Tab to highlight the endpoint. create dimensions for the overall length of each vertical line. and click to specify the endpoint for the dimension. under Other. and select Not a Reference. 54 Select the horizontal reference plane. and in Fine view the solid model elements are shown. click the Value column.NOTE Piping objects generally show as linework in Coarse and Medium view. 57 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 53 Move the cursor over an endpoint on the left vertical line. 51 Click OK. create dimensions for the right vertical line. we shut off the linework in Fine view. 512 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click . click . then select the other endpoint. Thus. 58 Using the same method. 55 Click . and on the Options Bar.

68 On the Options Bar. expand Elevations (Elevation 1). and enter 0' 5". 62 Using the same method. 66 In the Work Plane dialog. Flange Family | 513 . click Radius. under Other. for Label. 71 Select the circle. select the dimension for the right line and label it D1. click and . click the Value column. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. and select D2. 67 Click Lines. and click OK. click Set Work Plane. and click . 73 In the Element Properties dialog. 70 Click Modify. Create the first extrusion 63 In the Project Browser.59 Click Modify. . and select R2. 60 Select the dimension for the overall length of the left line. for Label. click . and in the drawing area. 69 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. 65 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. specify Reference Plane : Pipe. 64 On the Design Bar. click the Value column. and double-click Left. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click 72 Select the dimension line. and on the Options Bar. under Other.

514 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 88 Select the circle. click Radius. 77 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. for Visibility/Graphics. and enter 0' 10". 87 Click Modify. clear Coarse and Medium. select LenA2. Create the second extrusion 81 On the Design Bar. . for Extrusion End. and click 91 Click OK. click and . 75 Click Extrusion Properties. 84 Click Lines. 83 In the Work Plane dialog.74 Click OK. for Label. 79 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. under Other. and in the drawing area. click Set Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. . click Edit. and click OK. click the Value column. 76 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. in the 86 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. and select R1. 82 On the Sketch Editor tab on the Design Bar. and click OK. click column. under Constraints. 90 In the Element Properties. specify Reference Plane : Center (Left/Right). 78 Under Graphics. 80 Click Finish Sketch. 85 On the Options Bar. click 89 Select the dimension line.

and click OK. Add connectors 99 In the Project Browser. 97 Click Finish Sketch. verify that is selected. click Edit. for Extrusion End. click extrusions. and click OK twice. select LenA1. clear Coarse and Medium.0". for Visibility. and for System Type. and select Wireframe to view both in the 102 Spin the flange to view the face of both extrusions as shown. click column. 103 On the Design Bar. where the 2 extrusions meet. 94 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. (Model Graphics Style). 96 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. Flange Family | 515 . 93 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. select Fitting. 101 On the View Control Bar. expand 3D Views. and select 6” = 1'. 104 On the Options Bar. click Pipe Connector. 98 Save the family.92 Click Extrusion Properties. 100 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. 95 Under Graphics. 105 Highlight the large diameter face of the flange. and double-click View 1.

107 Click Modify. for Radius. under Dimensions. and click OK. 108 Select the connector. to change the direction of flow.106 Click to add the connector. if necessary. click and. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. 109 With the connector selected. enter 5". 516 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click . 110 In the Element Properties dialog.

111 Spin the flange to view the back of the larger extrusion. add a connector to the larger extrusion. Flange Family | 517 . 112 Click Pipe Connector. and using the same method.

you can use the same method to create a duct fitting family for air systems.113 Click Modify. First. and by defining fitting size parameters. click Link Connector on the Options Bar. You then create single line geometry for the elbow. test the fitting geometry. 117 Select both connectors. 518 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click and. 114 Select the connector. and on the Options Bar. 116 Click Modify. you create the physical fitting geometry by using reference planes and lines. 120 Save the family Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family In this exercise. After completing the pipe fitting family. select NR. 118 In the Element Properties dialog. click 119 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click OK twice. for Radius. 115 Select the first connector. and click the second connector. if necessary. in the column. under Dimensions. you create an elbow pipe fitting family. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. to change the direction of flow. click . and set the object visibility.

NOTE Fittings are among the most complex families to create. Select Generic Model. For Part Type. and save the family as Threaded Generic Elbow. 10 Maximize the Ref. 14 Select the 2 reference planes. 13 On the View Control Bar. one window for each open project remains open. select Pipe Fittings: 5 Under Family Parameters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. 6 Click OK. creating system families typically takes more time to complete. Level floor plan window. verify that Imperial Templates is selected. 2 In the New dialog. Verify that Always vertical is selected. Even if you have created parametric families before. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. under Family Category. Verify that Shared is cleared.rft. Configure the elbow pipe fitting family 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Work Plane-Based is cleared. if you have other projects open during a session. and select 6" = 1'-0". 9 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Save As dialog. click the current scale value. A new family file is created and new views open. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 519 . Level to make it the active view. However. It is recommended that you methodically follow the steps and periodically check your work against the exercise. It may take a longer to complete this exercise as compared to other exercises in this tutorial. You can also press CTRL+S. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Close Hidden Windows closes all of the hidden windows for a project. Click Open. 7 Click File ➤ Save. If necessary. on the Edit toolbar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Ref. They are not displayed when the family is used in a building model. navigate to a folder of your choice. Define reference planes Reference planes are used to define relationships between the geometric components within the Family Editor. and verify that both reference planes have been pinned. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. select Elbow. click .

21 Using the same method. enter Coupling. 22 Select the horizontal Center (Front/Back) reference plane. 16 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 17 Click to the left the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane to place a new reference line to the left of the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane. A tooltip and the Status Bar (which is located below the Design Bar) displays the object’s name. 18 Click Modify. click . for Name. and in the Element Properties dialog. enter 0' 1". and on the Options Bar. TIP You can identify an object in the drawing area by placing the cursor over the object.Pinning prevents accidentally moving the reference planes. and for Offset. add another vertical plane 2" to the left of the left (Fitting) plane. 520 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter Fitting. 15 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 19 Select the left plane. click . under Identity Data. click Ref Plane. for Name. 23 Add new reference plane 2" above the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown.

They are not displayed when the family is used in a project. Create reference lines and dimension them Reference lines are used to define the basic geometry of the family. For Offset. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected. click Reference Lines. 29 On the Options Bar. You create reference lines in order to create sweeps for the fitting geometry. for Name.24 Click Modify. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 521 . and click OK. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. (Line) is selected. 25 Right-click the new reference plane. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 28 On the Design Bar. Verify that Radius is cleared. and click Element Properties. enter Radius.

31 On the Edit toolbar. draw a horizontal line of the approximate length and location as shown. 37 Align and lock the left end of the right reference line to the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 522 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . align and lock the left end of the reference line to the left vertical reference plane (Coupling). click (Align). you draw an arced reference line. 38 Align and lock the right reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. draw another reference line to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane as shown. Next. and click the right end of the reference line to align the right end of the reference line to the Fitting reference plane. 32 Select the middle vertical reference plane (Fitting).30 In the drawing area. 33 Click to lock the end of the reference line to the Fitting plane. 34 Using the same method. 35 Align and lock the reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. 36 Using the same method.

44 Click Modify. enter 45.39 On the Design Bar. click the intersection of the Fitting and the Radius reference planes to specify the center of the arc. click Reference Lines. 43 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing the arc. verify that 0' 0" is specified. and press Enter to specify a 45 degree radius for the arc. 41 In the drawing area. and. ■ You may need to click ■ ■ For Offset. 42 Move the cursor directly down. 40 On the Options Bar. and after the endpoint snap displays. 45 Select the arc reference line. do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. Verify that Radius is cleared. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 523 . and zoom out to view 2 dimension controls ( ). click the right end of the left reference line to specify the first endpoint of the arc. select this sketching option from the list. (Arc from center and endpoints).

For Offset. By default. (Line) is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 47 Drag the permanent dimension annotation away from the arc reference line. 46 Click the dimension control that controls the overall dimension (located to the lower-right of the arc).NOTE Temporary dimensions have two dimension controls that allow you to convert the temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. Next. dimensions are temporary—they only display when selected. you draw a diagonal reference line. click Reference Lines. The dimension control located near the reference plane represents the projected length of that line relative to the reference plane. 48 On the Design Bar. 49 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the reference line end point at an approximate line length as shown. 524 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Verify that Radius is cleared. 50 Click the right end of the arced reference line to specify the diagonal reference line start point. The dimension control that is located perpendicular to the line being dimensioned represents the overall length of that line. and adjust the length of the witness lines as shown. 51 Draw a diagonal reference line to extend the arc at a 45 degree angle toward the Radius reference plane.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 525 . 54 Using the same method. on the Options Bar.While drawing the diagonal reference line. 60 With the Dimension tool active. 52 Click Modify. 53 Select the diagonal reference line. the Tangent Extension tooltip may display to indicate that the diagonal reference line is tangent to the arced reference line. 61 Position the dimension annotations and witness lines as shown. click (Angular). click Dimension. 58 On the Options Bar. and clean up the witness lines as necessary. Between the Fitting and the Center vertical reference planes. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Default linear style is selected. and add an angular dimension between the diagonal reference line and the right horizontal reference line (which is located below the diagonal reference line). 57 In the Type Selector. 55 Drag the dimension line down and to the right to move it out of the way. 56 On the Design Bar. verify that ■ ■ ■ (Aligned) is selected. zoom the view to display the 2 dimension controls. convert the temporary dimension for the overall length of the diagonal reference line to a permanent dimension. 59 Add the following aligned dimensions: Between the Radius and the Center (Front/Back) horizontal reference planes. Between the Coupling and the Fitting vertical reference planes.

select Dimensions. 66 Under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 67 Click OK. 65 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Select Instance to create an Instance Parameter. click Add.62 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. is listed under Dimensions in the Family Types dialog. verify that Family parameter is selected. Create family parameters and assign them to dimensions 63 On the Design Bar. 68 Using the same method. select Piping. For Discipline. The new family parameter. click Family Types. For Type of Parameter. 64 In the Family Types dialog. select Pipe Size. under Parameter Type. For Group parameter under. create the following family parameters: Name Discipline Type of Parameter Group parameter under Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Angle Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Instance/Type Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance LenA2 BdyRad CplRad NomDia NomRad Ang Piping Piping Piping Piping Piping Common 526 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . under Parameters. enter LenA1. LenA1.

For LenA2. Lookup tables are not used to determine pipe sizes as a result of using the Pipe Sizing tool—these pipe sizes are determined by various project-specific factors. in the Formula column. enter LenA1 * tan(Ang / 2). 71 In the drawing area. 72 On the Options Bar. enter NomRad * 2. 74 Press CTRL+S. for Label.Next. select each dimension and associate it to a family parameter as shown. For NomRad. enter 2". 75 Using Windows Explorer. Do not select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter as this will cause errors. 69 In the Family Types dialog. in the Value column. Fittings must have their connectors (which you place later in this exercise) on lines that intersect the Center (Left/Right) and Center (Front/Back) reference planes. select the LenA1 family parameter. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. NOTE Associate each dimension separately. Revit MEP uses this pipe size information to define pipe fitting size after you specify a pipe diameter. specify that following values and formulae: ■ ■ ■ ■ For CplRad.25". you specify values and formulae for the family parameters that you added. 73 Using the same method. the calculated length defines the geometry. 70 Click OK. NOTE When specifying formulae. in the Value column. enter 1. NomDia. The dimension is associated and controlled by the LenA1 family parameter. and copy the Threaded Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 527 . select the (left) dimension that is dimensioning the Center (Front/Back) and Radius reference planes. in the Formula column. Use a lookup table file to define multiple sizes A lookup table file is a CSV (comma separated value) text file that contains pipe size information. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation.

for Lookup Table Name. you must save the lookup table file in a plain text format. you can add them according to manufacturers’ specifications. 0. 78 In the Formula column. NomDia). If you encounter this type of issue. select Profile. 0. Level floor plan is the active view. "LenA1".ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). Revit MEP may not be able to read it and any family type parameter formulae that refer to that lookup table will most likely return a value of 0 and errors will occur. 80 Press CTRL+S to save the family. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. 0. and click Open. Next. in the Value column. copy the lookup table data from the problematic lookup table file and paste it into a new text file. This sweep uses the profile and the reference lines to create the elbow fitting geometry. 82 In the New dialog. verify that the Ref. However. enter Threaded Generic Elbow.csv lookup table file. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. "BdyRad".Generic Elbow. NomDia). enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. 83 In the Project Browser. 81 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.csv and click Apply.rft. NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. 528 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. This is the default path. Save the text file with the file name including the . 77 In the Family Types dialog. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. For BdyRad. you begin creating the fitting geometry. 76 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Family Types. The formulae are applied and the dimensions are adjusted. "CplRad". you specify formulae that use the lookup table file to determine pipe size. enter the following formulae: ■ ■ ■ For LenA1. NomDia). Create a fitting profile You create a fitting profile in order to provide a geometrical shape for the sweep extrusion. Next. if specific pipe sizes that you need are not present in the lookup table file by default. 79 Click OK. If the file is saved in a proprietary format. RELATED During fitting creation.csv file extension and copy it to the LookupTables folder. For CplRad.

93 Click to lock the circle to the horizontally.0". ■ (Circle). 92 Click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. and then click the circle center mark to align the circle horizontally. and click the dimension control ( The temporary dimension converts to a permanent dimension. 98 Zoom in to view the sketch. 88 Click Modify. draw a circle with any radius in the approximate location as shown. click the current scale. click . For Offset. 95 Select the circle. and select 6" = 1'. verify that Profiles is selected. 90 In the Element Properties dialog. Verify that Radius is cleared. 87 In the drawing area. align and lock the circle vertically. You may need to click ■ ■ and select this sketching option from the list. and click OK. ). 97 On the View Control Bar. 85 In the Type Selector. click Lines. 96 Click the dimension value. 86 On the Options Bar. The center mark displays allowing you to align the circle to the reference planes. enter 1". 89 Select the circle. 94 Using the same method. click (Align). Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 529 . 91 On the Edit toolbar. and on the Options Bar. zoom out. verify that 0' 0" is specified.84 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. select Center Mark Visible. under Graphics. and press ENTER.

under Parameters. click New. select the dimension. The dimension is now associated to and controlled by the Rad family parameter. 104 Using the same method. For Type of Parameter. click OK. For Group parameter under. enter Rad. Fitting. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Next. click Family Types. click Add.99 On the Design Bar. Verify that the Type option is selected to create a Type parameter. select Dimensions. select Piping. 100 In the Family Types dialog. 103 Name the new family type. 106 In the drawing area. 102 In the Family Types dialog. The new family parameter is listed under Dimensions. 530 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . create a family type named Coupling. you create a new family type. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. and click OK. for Label. 105 In the Family Types dialog. 101 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Family Types. 107 On the Options Bar. select Pipe Size. For Discipline. The new family type is listed in the Name list. under Parameter Data. select Rad. Click OK.

The object does not need to be fully contained within the border. click . 117 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. click . Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 531 . for Rad. select Fitting. Next. Each sweep is based on the profile that you created and loaded into the project. you load the fitting profile into the project. and click OK twice. Create sweeps using reference lines The elbow fitting geometry consists of 2 couplings connected by the fitting body. the cross-picking border only needs to intersect an object in order to select it. under Dimensions. 112 In the Associate Family Parameter. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. an object must be fully contained when using a pick box (drag left to right). 115 Under Dimensions. You create sweeps using the reference lines as sweep paths to create the fitting geometry. Associate family parameters to a profile parameter You associate family parameters to the Rad profile parameter for each family type in order to control the radius of the elbow fitting geometry. TIP Remember that when you use cross-picking (drag right to left) to select an object.108 Click File ➤ Save. and click Properties. 113 In the Type Properties dialog. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. 109 On the Design Bar. 110 In the Project Browser. you create the fitting geometry. and save the family as Threaded Pipe Profile. This allows for parametric changes in the fitting geometry to occur. for Rad. Next. select BdyRad. In contrast. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. right click Coupling. select CplRad. 116 In the Associate Family Parameter. click Load into Projects to load the Threaded Pipe Profile into the Threaded – Generic Elbow family. click Apply. Notice that the Threaded . 118 In the drawing area. 114 For Type.Generic Elbow project becomes active.rfa. and click OK. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Threaded Pipe Profile.

127 On the Options Bar. clear Reference Lines and Reference Planes. 122 On the Design Bar. Verify that the X. and click OK. Only the reference lines and reference planes display. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 128 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Y. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. and Angle options are specified at 0. 123 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select the left horizontal reference line. 124 In the drawing area. click Finish Path. 125 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. 126 In the drawing area. 121 On the View Control Bar. 120 In the Filter dialog. click (Filter Selection). 532 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Finish Sweep.119 On the Options Bar. click the red dot on the horizontal reference line. click Pick Path. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list.

132 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 533 . Verify that the X. 135 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. 130 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 131 In the drawing area. Y. and Angle options are specified at 0. Next. click the red dot on the arced reference line. you create the geometry for the fitting body. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Fitting from the profile list. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 129 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 134 On the Options Bar.The geometry for the left coupling is created. select the arced reference line. click Finish Path. 133 In the drawing area. click Pick Path.

139 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. Next. Next. and click OK.The geometry for the fitting body is created. 138 With the 3D view active. The elbow fitting geometry is created. add a solid sweep. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. you create the right coupling geometry for the elbow fitting. The fitting geometry displays. enter VG. clear all annotation categories. and select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list to the right reference line to create the geometry for the right coupling. you verify the fitting geometry. 534 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 137 In the Project Browser. 136 Using the same method.

140 While pressing SHIFT and the middle mouse button. 142 Press CTRL+S to save the family. and click OK. (Filter Selection). 144 On the Options Bar. Create detail level geometry Detail level geometry is the geometry that displays when you select a detail level. you draw model lines to create the single line fitting geometry. Level to make it the active view. In this section. 141 In the Project Browser. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 535 . click Check None. 145 In the Filter dialog. First. Coarse and Medium detail levels display pipe and pipe fittings as single line. This fitting geometry displays when the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are used. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 143 In the drawing area. select Other. click The 3 sweeps are selected. The Fine detail level displays pipe and pipe fittings as double line. double-click Floor Plans ➤ Ref. In Revit MEP. and verify the fitting geometry. you need to hide some of the geometry in the family to make it easier to create model lines for the single-line display. drag the cursor to spin the model. 146 On the View Control Bar.

149 On the Options Bar. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 148 In the Type Selector. 536 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. do the following: ■ For Plane. Select (Pick Lines). 150 In the drawing area.Only the reference planes and reference lines display. click Model Lines. 147 On the Design Bar. select the left horizontal reference line. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. Verify that Lock is cleared. ■ ■ ■ For Offset.

156 Click Modify. click to lock the model line to the reference line. and lock the model line to the arced reference line.A model line is created over the reference line. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 537 . you highlight through the vertical hierarchy of objects (from top to bottom). and on the Options Bar. 152 With the Model Lines tool active and using the same method. 157 Select the permanent dimension. select the arced reference line to create an arced model line. This converts the overall angle temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. 155 Zoom out. TIP You can identify objects that are located under other objects by placing the cursor over an object and press Tab. A tooltip and the Status Bar display the name of the object. and click the dimension control ( ) that is located at the lower-right. for Label. select Ang. 154 Select the arced model line to display its temporary dimension. Each time you press Tab. 153 Click Modify. This associates the angle dimension of the arced model line to the Ang family parameter. 151 With the model line selected.

NOTE Do not lock the diagonal model line. and associate it to the LenA1 family parameter. 165 In the Type Selector. 163 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Revit MEP warns you that locking the alignment would over constrain the sketch. 159 Using the same method. you dimension the diagonal model line. If you lock it. and modify the witness lines as shown. 169 Relocate the dimension annotations. 168 Using the same method. If necessary. 166 In the drawing area. click Dimension. and modify the witness lines as shown. 162 Using the same method. Next. 161 Select the diagonal model line. create a diagonal model line by picking the diagonal reference line (located at the right end of the arced model line). verify that Angular Dimension Style : Linear angular style is selected. and finally move the cursor and click to place the dimension.158 Relocate the dimension annotation. press Tab to locate the model line. 160 Click Modify. 538 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . then click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. 164 On the Options Bar. 167 Click Modify. click the diagonal model line. convert the diagonal model line overall length temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. associate the new angular dimension to the Ang family parameter. click (Angular). NOTE Make certain that you select the model line and not the reference line.

173 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types.170 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Next. 171 Press CTRL+S. Flex the part 172 On the Design Bar. The part flexes to become a 90 degree elbow fitting. you flex the part to validate the design. enter 90. and click Apply. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 539 . for Ang. under Dimensions.

Everything except for model lines and reference planes are selected. Next. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and click OK. Check all constraints and verify that model lines were created and properly constrained. click (Filter Selection).NOTE If the part does not flex and errors occur. 175 In the drawing area. 177 In the Filter dialog. 540 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click OK. 176 On the Options Bar. you create tick marks. clear Lines (Pipe Fitting) and Reference Planes. this is usually caused by a constraint issue. 178 On the View Control Bar. Add tick marks and dimension them You create tick marks to indicate the end of the fitting when viewing the fitting in either the Coarse or Medium (single line) detail level. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in view. 174 Restore the Ang parameter to 45. Lines (Pipe Fittings) are the model lines.

181 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. 183 At the right end of the fitting. draw a model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the horizontal model line as shown. verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. 182 At the left end of the fitting. Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 541 . Line length is approximate. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. draw another model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the diagonal model line as shown. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 179 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Model Lines. 180 In the Type Selector.Only model lines and reference planes display. Verify that Radius is cleared. do the following: ■ For Plane. TIP You draw this model line on top of the Coupling reference plane.

Again. Next. dimension the bottom half of the left model line. 184 On the Design Bar. you dimension each side of the 2 tick marks. The top half of the model line (tick mark) is dimensioned. 188 Using the same method. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Linear is selected. 187 On the left end of the fitting. length is approximate. dimension both halves of the right model line (tick mark) by clicking the diagonal model line first. 542 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Dimension. and then clicking an endpoint of the model line (tick mark). 186 On the Options Bar. 189 Using the same method. 185 In the Type Selector. click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane and click the top end point of the model line (tick mark). then move the cursor to the left and click to place the dimension. NOTE You must click the reference plane first to dimension this model line. verify that (Aligned) is selected. The 2 tick marks are drawn.

You cannot select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter. 198 Relocate the dimension annotations. 195 Click the diagonal model line and then click the right model line tick mark. 194 On the Options Bar. 193 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The dimension are as shown. Next. You may need to zoom out to locate the lock. click (Angular). Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 543 . and on the Options Bar. and lock it to 90 degrees. NOTE You must associate each dimension separately. 190 Click Modify. associate the other 3 model line dimensions to the CplRad parameter. 191 Select the lower dimension for the left model line. 197 Select the angular dimension. click Dimension. move the cursor down and click to place the dimension.You place 2 dimensions for the right model line. 192 Using the same method. 196 Click Modify. and modify the witness lines as shown. for Label. select CplRad This associates that dimension to the CplRad family parameter. you create an angular dimension between the diagonal model line and the right model line tick mark.

544 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. The elbow fitting flexes into a 90 degree elbow that has a 3 inch diameter.199 On the View Control Bar. and for NomRad enter 1 1/2". 202 In the Family Types dialog. Flex the part 201 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. enter 90. for Ang. 200 Press CTRL+S to save the family. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ . and click Apply. click Family Types.

verify that Coarse and Medium are selected. and click OK. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. 208 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click (Filter Selection). Next.203 Continue to flex the fitting by changing the Ang and NomRad parameter values. NOTE If errors occur while flexing the fitting. You may want to refer to the Threaded Generic Elbow. This specifies that the single-line fitting geometry will display when only the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are selected. 206 In the Filter dialog. 207 With the model lines selected. 205 On the Options Bar. Next. the NomRad value that you specified required a pipe diameter that is not included in the lookup table file. you specify the 2-line geometry for the Fine detail level setting. you specify this single line geometry to a detail level setting. Next. Only model lines are selected. select Lines (Pipe Fittings). Specify object visibility You specify object visibility to determine the type of elbow fitting geometry that displays for each detail level setting. clear Fine. and click OK. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 545 .csv lookup table file for the valid pipe diameters or add new pipe diameters based on the manufacturers’ specifications. on the Options Bar. you set object visibility. You created the detail level geometry for the elbow fitting and flexed this geometry to validate it. click Check None. 204 In the drawing area. click Visibility.

click None. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.209 In the drawing area. Next. 220 Spin the model to view the faces at the ends of the fitting. click to place the primary connector. and click OK. 218 In the Filter dialog. click Pipe Connector. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the view. and verify that Face) is selected. Add connectors 215 In the Project Browser. 217 On the Options Bar. 210 On the Options Bar. 211 In the Filter dialog. 222 On the Options Bar. and after the edge highlights. click Visibility. You begin by placing the primary connector. click (Filter Selection). 212 With the sweeps selected. select Dimensions. Only the 3 sweeps are selected. select Fitting from the system type list. on the Options Bar. verify that Fine is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. you add connectors to the elbow fitting family. 214 Press CTRL+S. clear Coarse and Medium. click None. select Other. (Place on 223 Place the cursor on the edge of the right face of the fitting. The fitting displays. 216 In the drawing area. and click OK. and click OK. 546 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click (Filter Selection). 219 On the View Control Bar. 213 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. The 2-line fitting geometry will display only when the Fine detail level setting is selected. 221 On the Design Bar.

the primary connector must be placed on the face that is on the X-axis. and that if all connectors are not properly rotated and linked.The primary connector is placed. You place the primary connector on the right face because this face is on the X-axis. 224 Using the same method. Notice that crosshairs display indicating that this is the primary connector. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 547 . You can verify this by viewing the face in a floor plan view. Unexpected behavior can result if the primary connector is not properly placed relative to the other connectors. place a connector on the left face of the fitting. NOTE When you place fitting connectors.

225 Click Modify. 229 On the Options Bar. For Angle. ■ ■ For Radius. In the Element Properties dialog. click Link Connector. Notice that values are assigned to both associated parameters. select Ang. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click the other connector. verify that Fitting is selected. This allows the fitting radius to change after you specify a pipe diameter or perform pipe sizing. The connector angle constraint and radius dimension are now associated to parameters. 548 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Next. click OK. Although the connectors are round. it is the recommended that you rotate them so that they are oriented vertically. Rotate connectors 231 In the 3D view. and that these parameters cannot be edited in the Element Properties dialog. select ■ . Next. you specify connector properties. Notice that the connectors are oriented horizontally. select the 2 connectors. do the following: For System Type. 230 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. you rotate the connectors. The 2 connectors are linked. under Instance Parameters. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. ■ The connector radii change. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. Next. The 2 selected connectors display in red. you link both connectors. select NomRad. It also allows the fitting angle to change as a result of modifications to the pipe layout. click . 226 Select the primary connector (indicated by crosshairs). 228 In the drawing area. click . and click OK. 227 On the Options Bar.

click to specify the rotation start point. The connector orientation determines the correct orientation of the objects that are automatically inserted on the part. and on the Options Bar. Although this is not as important for round connectors. where the part geometry is clearly visible. You may find it easier to rotate connectors in a 3D view. 235 Move the cursor clockwise 90 degrees. the rectangular duct fitting will be inserted improperly. and click to specify the rotation end point. creating an unexpected result. 234 Move the cursor over the model line and to the left of the connector arrow. it is extremely important for rectangular connectors such as those on rectangular duct fittings.IMPORTANT Connector rotation is a critical part of connector placement. If rectangular connectors are not rotated properly. and after the intersection snap displays. 232 Spin the fitting to view the entire primary connector. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 549 . 233 Select the connector. Remember that for rectangular connectors. click (Rotate). the rectangular connector must be oriented so that the width is assigned to the face that is on the X and Y axes. The height is not on these axes.

This also flips the connector arrow. 236 Using the same method. you verify the connector arrow direction. The primary connector is rotated and now has a vertical orientation. 237 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 550 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . You will learn more about connector arrows in the next section.NOTE Do not use the flip arrows to flip the connector with respect to its reference plane. Next. rotate the secondary connector so that it has a vertical orientation.

In most instances. and locate this template file. opens.Mech view is located under Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.rte template. IMPORTANT Connector arrows indicate the direction of a duct or pipe (extrusion) when it is being created to complete a connection. It does not indicate flow direction. Because Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 551 . This is the default view when a project. verify that the path points to the Systems-Default. If the template file path does not point to the Systems-Default.Mech mechanical floor plan is the active view. 244 In the Project Browser. The elbow family is loaded into the new project and the new project becomes active. Click OK. 242 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded Generic Elbow. This template may not be the Systems-Default template. NOTE If you click on the Standard toolbar. TIP You can also set the project template file path for all new projects on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Options). and click OK. you load the threaded elbow family into the new project.rte template file. verify that each connector arrow indicates an outward direction from its connector as shown.Verify connector arrow direction 238 In the 3D view. Next. You can modify the connector arrow direction by selecting the connector and clicking the flip arrows. Otherwise. Under Create New. verify that the 1 .rfa . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Template file. 239 Press CTRL+S. select the project that you just created from the Load into Projects dialog. then click Browse. The 1 . 241 In the New Project dialog. verify that Project is selected. If more than one project is open.3D View to switch back to the threaded coupling family. based on the systems default template. click Load into Projects. Test the elbow fitting in a project 240 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. a new project is created based on the current project template. a connector arrow points outward away from the object to which the connector is associated. 243 On the Design Bar. the duct or pipe when created will pass through the object geometry instead of away from it. The Systems-Default template creates views for all system types allowing you to model different systems in one project.

it is associated with the mechanical discipline, both ducts and pipe can be created in the 1 - Mech view. 245 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. Next, you assign the new threaded generic elbow fitting to a pipe type. 246 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. 247 On the Options Bar, click .

248 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 249 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Elbow, select Threaded – Generic Elbow: Threaded – Generic Elbow, and click OK twice. 250 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter) select 3”. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Verify that the Offset elevation is specified at 9' 0"

251 In the drawing area, draw some piping, using various angles and offset elevations. NOTE Remember that if errors occur during fitting insertion, it is usually because the specified pipe diameter was not in the Threaded Generic Elbow lookup table file. 252 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, click Coarse, Medium, and Fine to see how the new elbow fitting geometry displays in both the floor pan and the 3D views.

You have verified that the threaded elbow fitting was correctly inserted, that the pipe was created in the correct direction away from the elbow, and that the detail level geometry displayed properly. Next, you check connectivity. Check connectivity 253 Place the cursor over the piping, and press Tab to check connectivity. The piping highlights indicating that it is connected. 254 Click Modify. Hide shape handles 255 In the Project Browser, double-click the 1 - Mech view to make it the active view. 256 In the drawing area, select an elbow from your test piping layout.

552 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

257 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the elbow. Notice that triangular and dot shape handles display on the elbow along with the 2 connectors.

258 Drag the upper triangular shape handle upward as shown.

Notice that this shape handle modified the fitting geometry.

Other shape handles can modify aspects of the fitting such as location. These modifications can violate the design intent of the elbow fitting.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 553

IMPORTANT Shape handles are not used for Revit MEP system families but they display by default when you create a new family. If shape handles are not hidden and they are inadvertently dragged during your modeling session, the geometry or placement of the family will be adversely affected. This can create unexpected results, especially for duct fittings. This is because, unlike pipe fittings, duct fittings use formulae that reside in the family rather than in an external lookup table file to determine size. It is highly recommended that you hide all shape handles for Revit MEP families before using them in a project. To hide the shape handles in a system family, you need to open the family in the Family Editor and specify the Is Reference instance parameter as Not a Reference for all reference lines and all reference planes that are used for that family. 259 Press CTRL+Z to undo the modification. 260 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded - Generic Elbow.rfa - Floor Plan: Ref. Level to switch to the elbow family floor plan view. 261 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing, including reference planes.

262 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

263 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Reference Planes, and click OK. Only the reference planes are selected. 264 On the Options Bar, click .

265 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and click OK. 266 Using the same method, specify Not a Reference for all reference lines. 267 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 268 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. If more than one project is open, in the Load into Projects dialog, select the test project in which you tested the elbow fitting, and click OK. 269 After a message informs you to overwrite the existing version of the threaded generic elbow, click Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. The test project becomes active. 270 In the 1 - Mech floor plan view, zoom in and select an elbow from your piping layout. Notice that all shape handles are hidden.

554 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

The threaded elbow is ready to be used in a project. RELATED Although the physical geometry of this fitting is accurate, it is inconsistent with a real-world threaded elbow in that the connectors on this elbow fitting are on the outer face of the threaded portion of the fitting. This prevents the pipe from engaging the fitting. You can use the Hidden Line model graphics style to verify this. If the part were modeled so that the pipe engaged the fitting, proper performance of Revit MEP would be impacted due to the way hidden lines are calculated and drawn.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family
It is likely that you will need to create annotation symbols that are not part of a building model. For example, a common symbol in MEP drawings is a New to Existing Connection callout. In this exercise, you create such an annotation. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 2 In the New dialog, select Generic Annotation.rft, and click Open. 3 Maximize the window, and in the drawing area, zoom in to view the note (located near the intersection of the reference planes). This note contains key points to remember when creating an annotation family. 4 Select the note and delete it. 5 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the intersection of the 2 reference planes. Draw lines 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 8 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Clear Chain.

(Draw), and

(Line) are selected.

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

9 Click the intersection of the 2 reference planes to specify the line start point, move the mouse to the right, and after listening dimensions appear, enter 0 1/8, and press Enter. This creates a 1/8" line to the right of the intersection. The line is over the reference line. 10 Using the same method, draw 3 more 1/8" lines located above, below, and to the left of the intersection as shown.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 555

TIP You can also mirror the opposite lines instead of drawing them. 11 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select the 2 reference planes. 12 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left under the drawing area), click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. This hides the reference planes allowing you to better view the lines.

Next, you create the filled regions. Create filled regions

13 On the toolbar, click

(Fine Lines).

14 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design, verify that Lines is selected. 16 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 17 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Select

(Draw) is selected.

(Arc from center and endpoints). and, select this sketching option from the list.

You may need to click

Click Radius, and enter 3/32".

18 Zoom the view, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the arc.

556 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

19 Move the cursor directly up and over the end of the upper vertical line, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the start point of the arc.

20 Move the cursor over the right horizontal line, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the end point of the arc.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 557

An arced line is drawn.

21 With the Lines tool active, on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Click

(Draw) and Chain are selected.

(Line).

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

22 In the drawing area, click the upper end point of the arced line, then click the intersection of the 4 lines, and finally click the lower end point of the arced line.

558 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

A chain of 2 lines is drawn. 23 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. This filled region is created.

24 Using the same method, draw a filled region on the opposite lower-left quadrant.

Next, you draw a circle around the 2 filled regions. 25 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Lines. 26 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Click

(Draw) is selected.

(Circle).

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 559

■ ■

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Click Radius, and verify that 0' 3/32" is specified.

27 In the drawing area, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the circle. 28 Click Modify.

29 Click File ➤ Save, and save the family as New to Existing.rfa Test the annotation symbol in a project 30 Click File menu ➤ Open. 31 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. 32 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.rvt. 33 Click Window menu ➤ New to Existing.rfa - Drawing Sheet to switch to the new annotation symbol family. 34 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 35 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 36 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar, click Symbol. 37 In the Type Selector, verify that New to Existing is selected. 38 On the Options Bar, click .

39 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 40 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow Filled 15 Degree, and click OK twice. 41 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 42 In the drawing area, zoom in, and click to place the annotation symbol in the project. 43 Press ESC twice. Next, you modify the symbol leader. 44 Select the leader to display shape handles.

560 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

45 Drag the middle shape handle up to modify the middle of the leader.

46 Drag the end shape handle to modify the annotation symbol as shown.

47 Select the symbol, and drag the cross-arrows to relocate the symbol. 48 Click File menu ➤ Close. You do not need to save the project.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts
A defining feature of Revit MEP content is the concept of connectors. Connectors allow Revit MEP content to participate in specific systems and facilitate calculations for a variety of parameters.

Connectors
The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family.

Duct connectors are associated with ductwork, duct fittings, and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections, including power, telephone, alarm systems and others.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts | 561

Pipe connectors are used for piping, pipe fittings, and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids.

The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Steam, medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly, as after this selection is made, it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline.

Connector Properties
The discipline assigned to a connector determines the connector’s properties. The following tables show the different connector parameters, by property group, for each discipline and a brief description of their functionality.
Electrical Constraints Edge loop centered Graphics Size on screen Electrical - Loads True Load Phase 3 Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 3) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 2) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 1) x (Power Factor). Percentage of power attributed to this connector. Active only when Power is specified as System Type. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 3). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >2. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 2). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >1. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor. Connector placement method (read only).

True Load Phase 2

True Load Phase 1

Power Factor

Apparent Load Phase 3

Apparent Load Phase 2

562 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Apparent Load Phase 1

Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 1). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current). Active only when Balanced Load is True and System Type is Power. The voltage specified on the connector. Active only when the System Type is Power. Possible values are: Data, Power - Balanced, Power - Unbalanced, Telephone, Security, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Controls, Communication. Possible values are: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. Possible values are: Lagging, Leading. Possible values are: 1, 2, or 3.

Apparent Load

Voltage

System Type

Load Classification Power Factor State Number of Poles Identity Data Index Primary Connector

A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s electrical data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. A description of the connector

Connector Description

Mechanical (HVAC) Constraints Edge loop centered Angle Connector placement method (read only) Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Flow Factor Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

Connectors | 563

Loss Coefficient Flow Configuration Flow Direction System Type

Active only when the Loss Method is Coefficient. Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Possible values are: Supply, Return, Exhaust, Other, Undefined. Possible values are: Not Defined, Coefficient, Specific Loss.

Loss Method Mechanical - Airflow Pressure Drop Flow Dimensions Shape Height

Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss. The amount of air flowing at this connector.

Possible values are: Rectangular or Round. The height of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The width of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The radius of the connector when the Shape is defined to be round.

Width

Radius

Identity Data Index Primary Connector A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s HVAC data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only) A description of the connector

Link Connector Index Connector Description

Mechanical (Piping) Constraints Edge loop centered Connector placement method (read only).

564 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Angle

Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Fixture Units Active only when the System Type is Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, or Domestic Cold Water and the Flow Configuration is Fixture Units. K Coefficient (K Factor) is only editable if Loss Method is specified as “K Coefficient”. Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Volumetric flow rate of fluid through connector. Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Bidirectional is active only when the Flow Configuration is Calculated. Possible values are: Not Defined, K Coefficient from Table, K Coefficient, Specific Loss. Possible values are: Checked or unchecked. Possible values are: Undefined, Hydronic Supply, Hydronic Return, Sanitary, Domestic Cold Water, Domestic Hot Water, Fire Protection, Other. Possible values are: Bell Mouth Inlet or Reducer, Inward Projecting Pipe, Outlet, Square Edged Inlet. Active only when the Loss Method is K Coefficient from Table. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

K Coefficient

Flow Factor

Flow Pressure Drop Flow Configuration Flow Direction

Loss Method

Allow Slope Adjustments System Type

K Coefficient Table

Dimensions Radius Identity Data Index A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). The nominal size of the connector.

Connectors | 565

Primary Connector

Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s piping data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only). A description of the connector.

Link Connector Index Connector Description

System Types
When a Revit MEP component that is not a member in a system is selected in a building model, the Options Bar displays create system buttons. The specific buttons depend on the component and the type(s) of connectors in the family. If there are multiple connectors of the same type and you want to connect to a specific connector, you can right-click on the connector control to create the appropriate type.

Electrical
When a component with an electrical connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Power, Data, Telephone, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Communication.

Duct
When a component with an Duct connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific HVAC system (from left to right: Air Supply, Air Return, Exhaust).

Pipe Connector
Pipe connectors are used with hydronic systems, plumbing systems, fire protection systems. When a component with a hydronic pipe connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific hydronic piping system (from left to right: Supply, Return, Other.

When a component with a plumbing (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, Domestic Cold Water, Other).

When a component with a fire protection (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Wet Sprinkler, Dry Sprinkler, Other).

566 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Load Classifications
Revit MEP maintains information about loads associated with the rooms in a project. As devices and equipment are placed in rooms, Revit MEP keeps track of the loads based on load type: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. The loads associated with the room can be view in the Element Properties for each room, and displayed in schedules.

Connector Placement
Connector placement options allow you to specify two basic connector placement methods:

Place on Face This option (Edge loop centered=true) will maintain its point at the center of the edge loop. In most cases this is the preferable method for placing a connector. Typically the Place on Face option is easier to use, and is suitable for most cases. Place on Work Plane This option allows placement of the connector on a selected plane. For many cases it would be possible to imitate the place on face option by specifying a plane and using dimensions to constrain the connector to the desired location. However, this method generally requires additional parameters and constraints to be used effectively.

Connectors | 567

NOTE Fittings (pipe and duct fittings) expect the instance origin of the family to be the intersection of the connectors. In most cases for fittings, there is a point on the fitting where all of the connectors (if extended into the fitting) will collide. Fittings expect this collision to be placed at the original intersection of the Center (Front / Back), Center (Left / Right), and Reference Level work planes. For this reason, it is good practice to pin these reference planes before beginning to build the family. Do this by selecting the reference plane(s) and clicking the Pin icon on the Edit toolbar.

Hosts
Objects that are placed in a model are often hosted by other components. Hosting components include ceilings, floors, roofs, and walls, as well as lines, and faces. Even components that are not hosted by one of these components are still hosted by the level on which they reside. When creating a family from a template, it is important that you consider what type of hosting behavior you want for the family. For example, you may intuitively think that a new light fixture should be ceiling hosted. However, there may be cases where you want to use that family in a wall mount configuration, or even freely suspended. You cannot change the hosting of a family after it is created; the hosting setting is hard-set based on the template from which the family originated. Plane hosting provides the ability for the family to be hosted by walls, floors, or ceilings, and provides a high level of flexibility. Plane hosted elements will even move with their hosting elements through linked models. Non-hosted families are actually hosted by the level they are inserted on and provide the ability for the element to be placed anywhere. Their height is defined relative to their level, but there is no association established with elements, linked models or otherwise. When using linked files, only face-hosted families will be able to be hosted by the linked file’s geometry.

Templates
As described above, the hosting of an element is defined based on the template that is used when the family is originally created. Templates also determine the type of family as an annotation family, model family, titleblock family, or a profile family. In some cases, the template also defines particular characteristics of how the family works, such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. NOTE You cannot change these characteristics once you have created the family. For example, you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture, or redefine an annotation symbol to be a model element. You must start the family with the appropriate template.

Lookup Tables
Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external .csv file. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. Revit MEP provides a text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (.csv) file. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.ini file. The syntax for the text_file_lookup function uses the following format:
result=text_file_lookup(LookupTableName, LookupColumn, DefaultIfNotFound, LookupValue) Where: Is:

568 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

result LookupTableName LookupColumn

the returned value. the name of the CSV file to lookup. the name of the column from which the result value is to be returned. the value that will be returned if LookupValue is not found. the value to find in the first column of the table.

DefaultIfNotFound LookupValue

CSV File Structure
The first row of values in the CSV file is for header information, to describe the contents of subsequent columns. The headers are of the format ParameterName##ParameterType##ParameterUnits Acceptable parameter types are: NUMBER, LENGTH, AREA, VOLUME, ANGLE, and OTHER For example, a column may have the following header: TotalArea##AREA##INCHES to represent the total area in square inches. The first column in the file contains a description. The Lookup Function processes the information in the file starting with column 2.

Parameter Mapping
Many properties for objects, such as the depth of an extrusion and the voltage of a connector, can be mapped (associated) to a family parameter or to a shared parameter to provide flexibility to the family. The associated parameter can be defined as an instance parameter or a type parameter. Parameters are mapped by clicking (small button) in the column in the Element Properties dialog for the object. When an object’s parameter is mapped to another parameter, its Value column cannot be edited. The example below shows that the Power Factor and Number of Poles parameters are currently not mapped to a parameter. Their values can be edited directly in the Value column. The Apparent Load Phase 1 and Voltage parameters are mapped to other parameters, and their values assume the values specified for the parameters to which they have been mapped.

Parameter Mapping | 569

Category
Revit MEP components fall into general categories (pipe fittings, lighting fixtures, and so on). The Family Category specified when a family is created determines which Family Parameters are activated. The settings for these family parameters affect the behavior for the part and identifies the type of component. In Family Editor, the Family Category and Parameters settings are found in the Settings menu. Depending on the Family Category and the type of template that the family was derived from (host-based, generic model, detail component, generic tag, and so on), different Family Parameters apply. The following table lists each Family Category, and indicates the applicable Family Parameters. Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver- Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation Shared

Air Terminals Communications Devices Data Devices Duct Accessories Duct Fittings Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixtures Fire Alarm Devices Generic Models Lighting Devices Lighting Fixtures Mechanical Equipment Nurse Call Devices Pipe Accessories Pipe Fittings Plumbing Fixtures Security Devices

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X

X

X X X X X X

X X

X X

570 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver. there are times when this is not appropriate. However. line. The part type serves 2 functions: ■ To only allow replacing a particular part with a similar part in a building project. Equipment. Duct Accessories. Hood. ■ If a family category provides a Part Type parameter. The ASHRAE Duct Fitting database is integrated with Revit MEP. Transition. This allows calculating fitting losses based on a loss table. For example.Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation X X X Shared Sprinklers Telephone Devices X X X X X X Family Parameters ■ ■ ■ Light Source: See Light Source on page 571. the part type must be defined. Entry. you can specify the shape of the light element (point. and the light distribution (spherical. for fittings it would not be valid to replace a cross with a transition. So there is a level of filtering built into the Type Selector for Revit MEP. Obstruction. Exit. Junction. You can also define photometric characteristics. To accurately look up the correct fitting in the database. Maintain Annotation Orientation: Use this option when the family has a nested annotation family. Undefined. The following table shows which part types apply to which family categories: Family Categories Air Terminals. and Initial Color Control. or photometric web). spot. the Part Type values available depends on the family category. Duct Mounted Equipment. Part Type: See Part Types on page 571. To determine the part type family. Elbow. Fan and System Interaction. each lighting fixture family has one light source. Duct Fittings. When light source is selected in the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and determines the behavior for the parts in the family. Pipe Accessories. you can adjust the position and brightness of each light source to achieve the desired lighting effects. Part Types The Part Type parameter provides additional subclassification of a family category. In general. Plumbing Fixture Part Types Damper. Initial Intensity. as is the case with receptacles and switches. To create a lighting fixture that uses multiple light sources (such as a chandelier or a set of track lights). such as Light Loss Factor. Valve Light Source | 571 . Mechanical Equipment. Light Source A light source is the part of a lighting fixture that emits light (such as a light bulb). rectangle. hemispherical. create a nested family. Pipe Fittings. In a project. circle). Generally the Type Selector allows you to replace a family of one category with any other family of the same category.

Nurse Call. the automatically generated wiring branches to the switch. Telephone Devices Part Types Normal. Nurse Call Devices. such as an inline filter Transition: Shape or size change Undefined: No specific functionality Valve: Valves and similar accessories Data Panel: Panels used to connect devices with connectors of System Type Data. Transformer. Duct Mounted Equipment: Smoke detectors. Data Panel. Switch: Control device such as a switch where wiring is typically not drawn through the devices. cross. inline fans Hood: Kitchen. Electrical Fixtures. Panelboard. and Communication.Family Categories Communication Devices. grills. Lighting Devices. wye) Obstruction: Anything that causes a pressure drop. and light fixtures. Switch Junction Box ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Damper: Used to control flow volume. grates Exit: Point at which fluid leaves the system Equipment: Generic equipment Fan and System Interaction AHUs. Controls. Panelboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. fire alarm components. Junction Box: Wire management devices through which wiring is generally drawn through the device. Normal: Devices such as receptacles. Security Devices. As indicated in the image. Lighting Fixtures. steam generators Elbow: A bend or elbow type fitting Entry: Point at which fluid enters the system: louvers. the automatically generated wiring branches through the junction box. ■ ■ ■ ■ 572 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Switchboard. Fire Alarm Devices. As indicated in the image. lab or other exhaust hoods Junction: Intersection of 3 or more segments (tee. Electrical Equipment. Fire Alarm. Telephone. Data Devices. Security.

Transformer: Used to interconnect Panelboards and/or Switchboards of differing voltages.■ Switchboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. ■ Part Types | 573 .

574 .

a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. slight modifications to the building design have been made. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. exterior fire stairs. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. We wish to thank BNIM Architects.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. lofty ceilings. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. balconies. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. NOTE For training purposes. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2009. 575 . and a roof garden.

576 .

elevation.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 10 In this tutorial. you learn how to create views from a building model. including plan. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. section. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. how to create section and elevation views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You learn how to create new views from existing views. 577 .

Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.rvt. 578 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files.

right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. expand Floor Plans. Duplicating Plan Views | 579 . 7 In the Project Browser. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 2 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. 4 In the Project Browser.Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.

double-click Vicinity Plan. 580 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. and click OK. 11 Under Floor Plans. 13 In the Project Browser. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 12 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. enter Vicinity Plan.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser.

Duplicating Plan Views | 581 . and click 1''= 80'-0''.14 On the View Control Bar. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. click the current scale. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. Next.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 582 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .16 Right-click. 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt.

4 On the Options Bar. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt. select 1/8''=1'-0''. click Elevation. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 583 . 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. for Scale. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.

Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 584 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify. click Modify.

14 In the Type Selector. select Section: Building Section. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click South East. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. enter South East. 10 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 585 . under Views (all). right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. ■ Move the cursor down. 15 On the Options Bar. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Elevations. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. select 1/8''=1'-0''. and click OK. for Scale. click Section.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser.

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. 586 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 587 . Click the midpoint of the section line. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and click to place it. click Split Segment. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.

21 On the Design Bar. 24 Select gridline F. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. using the blue circular drag grip. click Modify. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 23 On the View Control Bar. expand Sections (Building Section). 588 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and double-click Section 1.

25 On the Design Bar. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. To create each view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 589 .

select 1/4"=1'-0''. 590 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Resulting callout view . under Floor Plans. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan. for Scale. double-click Level 1. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. click Callout. 3 In the Type Selector.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and select the callout boundary. click Modify. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. Creating Callout Views | 591 . 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair.

9 In the Rename View dialog. 592 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .■ Select the middle grip. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. and click OK. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename.

double-click Section 1. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. click Callout. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. select Detail View: Detail. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. Creating Callout Views | 593 . 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. under Sections (Building Sections). ■ Move the cursor diagonally down.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. select 1 1/2''=1'-0''.

17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. 594 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . expand Detail Views (Details). double-click Roof Overhang Detail. under Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser.

the elevation markers. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. You change the appearance of the section mark head. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 595 .

10 On the floor plan. clear any others. select the current project.Filled. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. select Custom-Section Head. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. click Training Files. Section Tail – Filled. . and click OK. select the section line. 596 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open.rvt. click Duplicate. 12 For Section Tag. for Section Head. Section Tail .rfa.Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK twice. click Edit/New. and can be applied to the section line. select Section Head . double-click Level 1. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. enter Section Head – Custom. click Load into Project. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Name dialog.Custom. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

26 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 Click OK. On the floor plan. On the floor plan. For Dimensions ➤ Width.rfa. and on the Options Bar. select 3. select Circle. scroll to Section Line. notice the circular elevation markers that display. 15 Under Category. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click Open. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 597 . enter 3/4'' Circle. 17 Under Category. 27 Click OK twice. select Custom-Callout Head. select 3/4'' Circle. and click OK. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. click Duplicate. Click OK. . scroll to Section Marks. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. For Line Weight. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. for Elevation Tag. enter 3/4''. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click the Annotation Objects tab. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. click Training Files. and select 3. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 22 In the Name dialog. and select 2. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. 21 In the Type Properties dialog.

Click OK. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 In the Name dialog. 39 Click OK twice. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 598 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. For Corner Radius. 40 Press ESC. and click OK. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Load into Project. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 36 In the drawing. select the callout. 43 Under Category. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. scroll down to Callout Boundary.30 On the Design Bar. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. clear all others. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. for Callout Tag. and click OK. enter 1/4''. and select 7. click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click Duplicate. select the current project. .

you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. masking regions. 46 Under Category. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. Creating a View Template In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. select Dash. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 599 . you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. expand Callout Boundary. and select 4. You learn to create view templates. click Training Files. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and apply it to multiple elevation views. filters. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. and visual overrides. view regions. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. To accomplish this.45 For Line Pattern. 49 Click OK.

The crop region displays as red. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (Hide Crop Region). under Elevations. 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab.Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 5 On the View Toolbar. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar. clear Entourage. under Visibility. click Zoom to Fit. 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 600 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and features blue triangular grips and break marks. and double-click East. 4 On the View Control Bar.

under Elevations. and click Create View Template From View. double-click North. Callouts. 14 In the New View Template dialog. 16 In the Project Browser. grids. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK. right-click East. and section lines are now hidden in the view. and click OK. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 13 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. Creating a View Template | 601 .10 Under Visibility. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. levels. 12 On the View Control bar. elevation markers. 15 In the View Templates dialog. click OK.

rvt. edit the crop region as before. 602 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. click Apply.rvt. 18 In the Select View Template dialog. and click Apply View Template. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. double-click Penthouse.17 In the Project Browser. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 19 Using the same method. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click North. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. and the exterior area on the south side of the building.

View Range and Plan Regions | 603 . NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Under View Depth. select Penthouse. for Bottom. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for View Range. select Level Below (Level 4). and click Properties. double-click Roof Plan. click Edit.2 In the Project Browser. under Extents. Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. right-click. for Level. under Floor Plans. select Level Below (Level 4). Click OK twice.

for Level. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 10 On the Design Bar. 604 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Bottom. click Lines. select Level 4. select Level 4. right-click. click Plan Region. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Extents. Under View Depth. and click Properties. click Edit. select Roof Plan.6 In the Project Browser. for View Range. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Click OK twice.

18 Click File menu ➤ Save. for View Range. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 605 . you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. select Unlimited. click Finish Sketch. select Unlimited. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Move you cursor diagonally. under Extents. click Region Properties. in this case. Under View Depth. In the left corner of the building. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). for Level. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. for Bottom. 13 On the Design Bar.11 On the Options Bar. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. Click OK twice. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click Edit. 16 On the Design Bar.

13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. click (New). Select contains. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and double-click Level 1. 16 Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. under Basic colors. under Filters. Enter Hr. select the red color. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK.rating of the walls. for Color. After you apply the filter. 9 Click OK. 14 In the Color dialog. click the Filters tab. click Override under Patterns. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select Fire Rating. click Edit/New. 17 Using the same method. 11 Select Rated Walls. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. enter Rated Walls. 7 In the Filters dialog. click Add. and apply a color. for Rated Walls. expand Floor Plans. 5 In the Filters dialog. 606 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Solid Fill. 12 On the Filter tab. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Categories. and click OK.rvt. 10 On the Filter tab. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. under Views (all). apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. for Pattern. select Walls. under Projection/Surface. click <No Override>.

The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise.18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View | 607 . The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. click Remove. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.

4 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 5 On the View menu. click Show Crop Region. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click. as shown. 608 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. and click Rename.

12 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 11 In the Type Selector. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 8 Select the crop region. click Masking Region. Masking Portions of a View | 609 . select Invisible lines. click (Rectangle).7 On the View menu.

You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. 610 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Finish Sketch. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress.Level 1. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.14 On the Design Bar.rvt. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. right-click Unit 18 Plan . under Floor Plans. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 1 In the Project Browser. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise.

7 Under Cut. right-click. and click Override. right-click. and click Rename. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click 1/4''=1'0''. click the current scale. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. click <No Override> to apply a color. click black. under Visibility. and click OK. for Color. 4 On the View Control Bar. Working with Visual Overrides | 611 . select Walls. click in the Patterns field. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Pattern Overrides. for Pattern. and click OK. 11 Click OK twice.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. select Solid fill. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.

16 Under Visibility. 612 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . clear Floors. under Visibility.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Modify. 18 Right-click. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Grids. and click OK.

25 Click OK twice.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. By using the previous method to make the selection. select Dash 1/16''. 23 In the Color dialog. click <No Override> to apply a color. for Pattern. for Color. 20 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 21 Under Projection/Surface. click Override. Working with Visual Overrides | 613 . 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. click a purple color. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. under Lines. and click OK. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default.

614 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 30 On the Design Bar. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 29 In the Color dialog. right-click. click Projection Lines.Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. and click OK twice. select the sofa. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 28 For Color. click . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. click Modify. select a bright green color. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click By Category Override.

click . you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 33 On the View Control Bar. right-click. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 615 .32 Select one of the lamps. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. how to add views to the sheets.

right-click. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. click Training Files. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 616 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal.rvt. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. and click View. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. click Sheet. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets.

click Modify. 3 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. For Sheet Name. For Sheet Number.Unnamed. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . and select the title block.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. on the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. Click OK. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all). 5 When the title block highlights. enter A101. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. enter Site Plan. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. click Modify. Creating Drawing Sheets | 617 .

For Project Status. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Click OK. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. for Project Address. click Edit. enter Freighthouse Flats. under Other. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. Smith. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. For Client Name. 2009. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter For Approval.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Project Name. 618 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter 2009-1. For Project Number. enter J. enter 15 May. MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown.

you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.Elevations A105 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.rvt. and click OK.rvt. you add views to these sheets. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. select the new sheet name. Adding Views to Sheets | 619 .Layout Plan A104 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 17 In the Project Browser. for Name. and click OK. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. enter Floor Plan. right-click.Stairs In the following exercise. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and click Rename. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Elevations A106 .Sections A108 .Elevations A107 .

and click to place the view.Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A102 .Floor Plan. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. under Floor Plans. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 6 In the Project Browser.Elevations. under Elevations (Building Elevation). select Level 1. 4 On the Design Bar. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. The red border around the view no longer displays. and drag it to the sheet. click Modify. 620 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click A104 . 2 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. under Sheets (all). drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet.

align it with the East elevation. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click to place it.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. double-click A107 . drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). click Modify.Sections. 8 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). click Modify. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. and click to place it. Adding Views to Sheets | 621 .

NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and on the Options Bar. 16 Select title bar. select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and click OK. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Under Floor Plans. for View Scale. move the cursor over it. double-click A108 . . 19 On the Design Bar.Stairs. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. click Modify. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. zoom in to the grip. 622 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all). and press TAB until it highlights. and click to place it. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.

View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. In order to do this. double-click Level 1. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 623 . 21 Zoom to the stair callout. you must first activate the view on the sheet. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. and then make changes and deactivate the view. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans.

click Modify. under Sheets (all). 2 Select the building section view. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. enter 54'.Sections.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click. 624 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 5 On the Design Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. double-click A107 .rvt. and click Activate View. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER.

double-click North. 7 In the Project Browser. and click Deactivate View.6 Right-click. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 625 . under Elevations (Building Elevation).

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. 626 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. double-click Level 1. Click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Properties. select the new sheet name. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. You modify the view to hide the view title. enter Title Sheet. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. right-click. 7 Place the camera as shown. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. After you create the sheet. under Floor Plans. click Camera. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. For Sheet Name. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. enter T. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser.8 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. The camera view displays.rvt.

select Far Clip Active. Under Camera.8 On the Options Bar. For Target Elevation. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. enter 420'. Under Extents. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . for Eye Elevation. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. enter 60'. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. Click OK. enter 5'. 11 On the View Control Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 627 . For Far Clip Offset.

and then click OK. Under Model Crop Size.Title Sheet. for Height. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 628 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . on the Options Bar. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. under Sheets (all). double-click T . 14 Under 3D Views.13 In the Project Browser. select Scale (locked proportions). enter 25''. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. click Size. Click Apply. 15 With the view selected.

The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. select No. under Graphics. enter Viewport/no title mark. 25 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 Select the view on the sheet. click Edit/New. . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 629 . click Modify. and close the exercise file.17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 24 Click OK twice. 22 In the Name dialog. for Show title. click Modify. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate.

630 .

You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. Tagging Objects In this lesson. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. in your Revit MEP 2009 projects. such as doors and windows. expand Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Tagging and Scheduling 11 In this tutorial. click Training Files. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. such as room and window schedules. Because of the open style floor plan.rvt. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. You also learn to create different types of schedules. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP.Level 1. 631 .

and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. as shown: 5 Using the same method. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. and click Room and Area. as shown: 632 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room Separation. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar. move the cursor to the right. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.

9 In the Tags dialog. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 633 . Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.6 Using the same method. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. click Load.

click it. click Training Files. The room tag number displays in blue. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 634 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 In the Tags dialog. type 8'. click Room. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. and press ENTER.rfa. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. indicating that it can be edited. type U18-1. click OK. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 14 For Offset. click Modify. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the room and tag. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and select the room tag.

Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. ■ 21 On the Design Bar.18 Click the room text label. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 23 Using the same method. and press ENTER. type Kitchen. click Modify. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 635 . click Room. Dining. 22 Click the room text label. Click to place the new room and tag. and press ENTER. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. place rooms and tags. Sequential letters are also supported. type Entry.

The rooms are already placed. on the Model Categories tab. 29 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar.Level 2. click Modify. and moving clockwise. but they need to be tagged. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). expand Lines. and click OK. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. under Floor Plans. click Room Tag. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. 636 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Unit 18 Plan .Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Room Separation. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.

click Tag ➤ By Category.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Level 1. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you learn how to place door and window tags. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. in the Project Browser. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. expand Floor Plans. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. clear Leader. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 637 .rvt. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family. 638 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . type U18-2. and click OK. click Modify. for Mark. and press ENTER. under Identify Data. type U18-1. and on the Options Bar. (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Properties). 6 Click the door tag for the entry door.■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 639 . and drag it down to center it in the doorway. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.rfa. click Tag All Not Tagged.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and click OK. select Door Tags. expand Floor Plans. click Load. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the Tags dialog. and double-click Level 1. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.Level 2. 15 Under Category. 640 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag. select Window Tags. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click OK. verify that All objects in current view is selected. 20 In the Tags dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser. click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. click Tag All Not Tagged.

6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. select Leader. expand Floor Plans. Tagging Other Objects | 641 . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Yes to load a tag. click Training Files.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 4 Select a dining room chair. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. 26 Under Floor Plans. and modify the tag placement and display. tag all untagged windows. double-click Level 2. 28 Using the same method. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. click Tag ➤ By Category. select the edge to which the leader connects.Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 29 Save the file. 5 At the confirmation prompt.

clear Leader. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 9 Click Modify. 13 Optionally. 11 Select the tag for the table. and drag it up to form an angled leader. and drag it above the chair tag. and on the Options Bar. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 642 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 12 Click the elbow control. 14 Click Modify.

click Modify.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. select Furniture Tag : Standard. Tagging Other Objects | 643 . under Floor Plans. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Tag All Not Tagged. and on the Design Bar.Level 2. and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. 18 On the Design Bar. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

23 Save the file. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. select Furniture Tags. 21 In the Filter dialog. and click Modify. click Check None. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 644 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . you learn to add schedules. click (Filter Selection). 22 In the Type Selector. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. and click OK. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise.20 On the Options Bar.

you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Window Schedule | 645 . Finally. Next. a schedule that lists every window in the building. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. in which windows are listed by window type. that is.

add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. type Building Window Schedule. 9 Click OK. 646 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click the Fields tab. and click OK. 6 Under Available fields. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt. select Comments and click Add. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. under Category. and double-click Level 1. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Windows. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. click Schedule/Quantities. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 For Name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 Using the same method. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields.

and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. click Close. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. However. you are prompted to open one that does. click Show. 13 In the Project Browser.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. expand Schedules/Quantities. right-click the schedule. in large building models with many views. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. this can be a time-consuming process. If no open view shows the selected element. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. and click View Properties. Creating a Window Schedule | 647 . and on the Options Bar. NOTE By clicking Show.

under Other. and click View Properties. change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule. clear Itemize every instance. click Edit. for Sorting/Grouping. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. click Edit. Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule.15 In the Element Properties dialog. 648 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . for Sorting/Grouping. 23 Click OK twice. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Sort by. The window schedule is displayed. and press ENTER. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog. sorted by type mark. select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. under Other. The window type schedule is displayed.

you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head.rvt. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. expand Schedules/Quantities. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. unlike shared parameters. double-click Level 2. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object.24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. and sill conditions for a window can be found. In this case. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 649 . as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. jamb. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. and double-click Building Window Schedule. under Floor Plans. you cannot use them to tag objects.

6 Using the same method. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. click OK. 12 Click OK twice. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 5 Click OK. under Other. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. right-click Building Window Schedule. 650 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . For Group parameter under. select Construction. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. for Fields. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. so that they are listed before Comments. type Head Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog. and click Properties. click Add to create the new parameter. under Available fields. for Name. click Edit. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category.3 In the Project Parameters dialog. select the following fields.

Jamb Detail. type Window Details. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. select Head Detail. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. type 2/A107. and without releasing the left mouse button. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. and Sill Detail. You then hide the column used for the filter.rvt. click in the Head Detail header.Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. TIP To select all 3 headers. 17 Save the file. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers.Level 1. select Doors. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. Under Name. for Head Detail. for Jamb Detail.Door Schedule. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 651 . and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. type 1/A107. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Group. under Type Mark A. click Schedule/Quantities. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and for Sill Detail. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. type Unit 18 . For example. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. type 3/A107. 14 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans.

652 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Type U18 in the third field. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18.■ For Phase. verify that New Construction is selected. select Hidden field. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 11 Under Field formatting. 6 Under Available fields. select the following fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. select Family and Type. expand Sheets (all). but is not included as a column in the schedule. click the Fields tab. and click OK. and double-click A102 . The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only.Unit 18. select Mark. Select contains in the second field. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). 4 Click OK. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with.

click Unit 18 .13 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 653 . Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. and drag it to the sheet.Door Schedule.

select Rooms.20 Save the file. 8 Click OK. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. 654 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. and click Add. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Number. 7 Under Text. under Category. right-click in the Design Bar. and click View.rvt. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 5 Using the same method. to the right of Header text. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. click Schedule/Quantities. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. under Available fields. select Bold.

and press ENTER. for room 101. For 104. and press ENTER. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. type Storage. type Corridor. 11 Using the same method. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. type Building Entry. For 103. 101-106. for Name. next to Rows. type Stair. and press ENTER. The room Number is U17-46. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. For 105. select Storage. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 106. select Corridor. 10 Edit the number to be 101. add 5 more rooms. and press ENTER. For 102. click New. Creating a Room Schedule | 655 .

Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. draw the horizontal line. click the bright green swatch. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 656 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Override. click the Lines field. click the Color field. under Projection/Surface. under Visibility. you add room separation lines. For Room Separation. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Level 1. For Weight. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. Under Custom colors.13 Save the file. First.rvt. and modify room names. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. In the Line Graphics dialog. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. under Floor Plans. In the Lines field. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. place rooms from a program list. click Room Separation. and click OK. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. expand Lines. 4 Click OK twice. select 9.

9 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar.8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Room. click Modify. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 657 .

select 101 Building Entry. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right).Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. for Room. 14 For Offset. for Room. type 8'. 658 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 On the Options Bar. select 102 Storage.

These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 17 On the Design Bar. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 659 . 16 Using the same method. 20 While pressing CTRL. double-click Room Schedule. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. under Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. under Schedules/Quantities. and zoom in to the Corridor. place the following rooms.

under Category. for Rows. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 24 Open the Room Schedule. Floor Finish. select Rooms. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. type Units. and click OK. click 23 On the Design Bar. and click Add. and Wall Finish. 27 Select Schedule keys.21 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. and click OK. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. click Modify. while pressing CTRL. clear Room Bounding. and for all 3 finishes. select Base Finish. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 660 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click New. 31 For Key Name. click Schedule/Quantities. (Element Properties). Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 30 On the Options Bar. under Available fields. type As Selected.

The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. select Room Style. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. under Identity Data. for Room Style. 43 In the Filter dialog. and click Properties. under Other. 37 Open the Room Schedule. 33 In the Project Browser. select Units. 44 On the Options Bar. select Units. 42 On the Options Bar. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. for Available fields. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Level 1. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 661 . and click Add. under Schedules/Quantities. click (Filter Selection). 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click (Element Properties).32 Using the same method. under Floor Plans. 36 Click OK twice. for Fields. click Edit. select Rooms. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. and click OK. right-click Room Schedule. click Check None. 38 Under U17-8.

Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. select Service. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. (Duplicate). select Room Style. click 5 For Title. click OK. and apply it to the Level 1 view. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. select Public. click OK. 103. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. and 106. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 104. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. type Room Type. and double-click Level 1. at the warning prompt. 662 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . under Graphics. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. under Views (all). right-click Level 1. click the Color Scheme field. expand Floor Plans. for Name. type Room Type. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 9 In the Project Browser. 48 Save the file. for Color.rvt.46 Open the Room Schedule. and click Properties. For rooms 102 and 105. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined.

select the color legend. 17 On the Design Bar. click Edit Color Scheme. under Schemes. 14 Click OK twice. click the value in the Color column. click Color Scheme Legend. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Edit. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 19 On the Options Bar. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. select Room Type. clear Visible. under Visibility. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Modify. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 663 . 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and clear Room Separation. and click OK. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. expand Lines.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

click Edit/New. under Custom color. 664 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 29 Click OK twice. under Graphics. type 1/4''. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Show Title. 28 Under Title Text. select blue. respectively. 23 Using the same method. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. type 1''. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. and click OK. on the Options Bar. for Swatch Width. 24 Click OK. (Element Properties). 30 On the Design Bar. for Size.22 In the Color dialog. click Modify.

33 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 665 . position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. under Sections. double-click Building Section. under Graphics. and select Properties. click Edit.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. for Color Scheme. under Sections. and click OK. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. click Color Scheme Legend. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. 35 Click OK twice. select Rooms. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. select Room Type. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. right-click Building Section. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. under Visibility.

42 In the Filter dialog. select all the rooms in the stairwell. and click OK. select Rooms. under Identity Data. and click OK. for Room Style. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Public. for Room Style. click . under Identity Data.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. and click OK. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 666 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . (Filter Selection). click Check None. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 While pressing CTRL. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 41 On the Options Bar. 46 Click . select Units.

Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. click New. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 667 . TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. under Key Name for the new row. 54 While pressing CTRL. excluding the stairwell spaces. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. under Identity Data. under Schedules/Quantities. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. select Service. for Room Style. 51 On the Options Bar. double-click Room Style Schedule. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. type Suites.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. and click OK. and click . for Rows.

under Volume Computations. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. select Suites. verify that At wall finish is selected. but not beyond it. The color fill will extend to the roof.55 Click . The color fill extends to the roof. for Room Style. select the room on the left side of the top floor. and click OK. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. and click OK. 668 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 59 Under Room Area Computation. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. under Identity Data. select Areas and Volumes. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog.

select the stairwell room. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 669 . 64 In the Element Properties dialog. type 0’ 0” . 67 On the first level. 70 For Limit Offset.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. the dining room. for Upper Limit. 71 Click OK. 68 Click . for Upper Limit. and the living room. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). select Level 2. select Loft. and click 65 For Limit Offset. . 72 On the Design Bar. type -10”. 66 Click OK. under Constraints. click Modify. under Constraints. 69 In the Element Properties dialog.

670 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.73 Save the file.

click Family and Type. select Roofs.Insulation on Plywood Deck . select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. select Family and Type. click Modify. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. Creating a Material Takeoff | 671 . add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. and click Add. 4 In the Type Selector. select Material: Description. 3 While pressing CTRL. under Category. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist .EPDM.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. under Available fields. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. For Then by. Select Grand totals. 9 Using the same method. 5 On the Design Bar. Clear Itemize every instance. and click OK. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.

22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. under Other. under Available fields. 19 For Type. click Estimated Cost. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. select Material: Area. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. Under Field formatting. type Estimated Cost. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1. 20 For Formula. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. click the Formatting tab. click Edit. 17 Click Calculated Value. select Calculate totals. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. select Calculate totals. and click Add.50 1. 21 Click OK. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. select Material: Cost. and click OK twice. 23 For Field formatting. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2). for Material: Cost. and under Fields.75 672 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Properties. The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Click OK. select Currency. for Name. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.25 4. for Fields.

Scheduling Shared Parameters | 673 . and are defined and stored in an external file. adding the shared parameters to a family. You draw a travel path line. for Currency. 26 In the Project Units dialog. regardless of category. tag the line. 29 Select Use digit grouping. 27 In the Format dialog. you create a shared parameter file. for Rounding. you create an exiting plan for the building. select $. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. creating a generic tag to tag the family. not just for currency. which inserts commas after every three digits. 30 Click OK twice. 28 For Unit symbol. Digit grouping. can be used for any number-based parameter. In this lesson. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and schedule the total distance of each path. 31 Save the file. The cost fields are formatted correctly. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. click the Format value. ensuring consistency across families and projects.50 The Estimated cost is calculated.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost . and reporting the shared parameters. either within family components or within the project template. These shared parameters can be added to any family. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters.

2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. type OfficeStandardsParameters. for Name. 11 Click OK twice.rvt. click Create.rvt. type Travel Distance. type Exiting. 674 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Name. click New. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click Save. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. click Training Files. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name. and click OK. for Type of Parameter. type Path ID. click New. under Groups. 7 Under Parameters. under Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click New. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 9 Under Parameters. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. click Training Files. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for File name. select Length.txt.

select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. for Group parameter under. and click OK. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. otherwise the family loads into the current project. and select Instance. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line. 10 Using the same method. 13 Click Apply. following the equals symbol (=). 3 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. select Constraints.rvt.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 12 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. under Parameter Type. click Add. click Load into Projects. click Add. Click Training Files. 15 If necessary. under Parameter Data. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. under Dimensions. and click OK. If you have multiple projects open. type Length. for Travel Distance Formula. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project.rfa. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 675 . you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. select Shared parameter. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. in the Load into Projects dialog. 9 In the Family Types dialog. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 8 Select Instance. click Family Types. group it under Dimensions. under Parameters. and click OK. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click Select. 4 In the Family Types dialog.

click Label. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. click (Add Parameter). click Training Files. and click OK. select Travel Distance. click parameter(s) to label). 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Travel Distance. and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag. 19 On the Design Bar. 676 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 25 In the Edit Label dialog.Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol.rft. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Select. 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. under Category Parameters. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click Label. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. 24 Click OK twice. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. under Parameters.

for File Name. click Modify. select Path ID. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 677 . 35 Save the file. 32 In the Save As dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog.rfa. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. and click OK.rvt is selected. and press DELETE. 29 In the drawing window. and click Save.28 On the Design Bar. verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. type Travel Distance Tag. and move it down.

Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.Placing. 678 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 6 Move the cursor to the right. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. select Chain. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. double-click Exiting Plan . under Floor Plans.Level 1. After the lines are tagged. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. above the exterior door as shown. and click in the center of the corridor. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. click Component. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.Tagging. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.

click Component. 8 On the Design Bar. and click outside of the building. through the door. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Placing. 12 On the Design Bar. verify that Chain is selected. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader. move the cursor near the right corner. double click Exiting Plan . for Path ID. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 679 . click Modify. and click (Element Properties). 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. type 1-1. under Floor Plans.Level 2.7 Move the cursor down. 17 On the Options Bar. 13 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Tagging. 10 On the Options Bar. under Constraints.

680 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Move the cursor down. click Component. 21 On the Design Bar. and click above the door to the stair. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 20 On the Design Bar. and click in the stair.19 Move the cursor up through the door. move the cursor to the left. click Modify. and click.

under Constraints. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 681 . and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. type 2-1. under Category. 32 In the New Schedule dialog.Tagging. 30 Using the same method. and click OK. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.24 On the Design Bar. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. type Level 1 Exit Distance. click Modify. 28 While pressing CTRL. for Path ID. . click Modify. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 33 For Name. click Tag ➤ By Category. Placing. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 27 On the Design Bar.

35 Click the Filter tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Properties. select Path ID. select Travel Distance. in the second field. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. 682 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 36 For Filter by. under Available fields. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and click Rename. select contains. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Path ID. 43 In the Project Browser. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. for Filter. 49 Click OK twice. 44 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. and click OK. while pressing CTRL. and click Add. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. for Filter by. 50 Save the file. in the third field. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 41 Under Fields. under Schedules/Quantities.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 46 In the Project Browser. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. and in the third field. type 2-. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and under Field formatting. select Path ID and Travel Distance. 38 For Sort by. 42 Click OK. type 1-. 45 In the Rename View dialog. select Calculate totals. type Level 2 Exit Distance. in the first field. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. under Other. 39 Clear Itemize every instance.

select Walls. and click Properties. for Assembly Code.Partitions . right-click the Design Bar. and click . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 683 .Interiors ➤ C10 . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click OK. right-click Generic . and select C1010145 . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. expand C . under Categories. click the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities.Fixed Partitions. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.6''. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 4 Under Available fields. and click View.Partitions ➤ C1010100 .Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. under Identity Data. select the following fields. 10 In the schedule.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. 9 Click OK twice. click the Value field.

7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. click Create. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 6 Click Finish. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. type Revit_Project. click Training Files. for Database Name.mdb). select a location for the database file. 11 Click OK 3 times. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. and click Next.mdb. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 9 Under Directories. the database display may be different than that shown. 8 In the New Database dialog. 3 Click New. and click OK to create the database. click OK. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. and click Next. under Database. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. click the File Data Source tab. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 684 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 1 On the File menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.11 Close the exercise file.rvt. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.

tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. Additionally. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 685 . Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. For example. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category.Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. 13 Close the exercise file. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. in addition to the Id column. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements.

686 .

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'.Annotating and Dimensioning 12 In this tutorial. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2009 projects. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 687 .

you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. 688 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .

3 On the Options Bar. type 1/4'' Head . Under Constraints. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. expand Views (all). Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 6 Click OK twice. select Shared. and double-click South. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'. click Training Files. click Edit/New. and click OK.Shared Elevation. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. In the Name dialog. 8 Select the Level 1 line. However. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Elevation Base. If you did that now. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. Relocating a Project | 689 . click (Element Properties).rvt. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. The levels in the project are not shared.

you specify the new location of the project. The base elevation now reads 325'. select Level : 1/4'' Head . By typing 325' in this step. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project.Shared Elevation. 12 In the Type Selector. 10 On the View menu. and press ENTER. type 325'. The south elevation is displayed. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 690 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. 13 On the Design Bar.By selecting the Level 1 line. click Modify.

the Penthouse level.The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. Relocating a Project | 691 . The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. under Elevations. 15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL. and the Roof Plan level. select Levels 2-4. as well as other views of the building model. double-click North. 14 In the Project Browser.

and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and angular dimensions. click File menu ➤ Save As. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. You place linear. multi-segmented. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. On the Design Bar. Dimensioning on page 692. select Level : 1/4'' Head . In Revit MEP. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.Shared Elevation. 692 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. 16 If you want to save your changes. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. In this case. Dimensioning In this lesson. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. 17 Proceed to the next lesson.■ ■ In the Type Selector. radial. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. permanent dimensions are created automatically. click Modify.

and are created by selecting individual reference points. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Creating Dimensions | 693 . select it. expand Views (all). and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall. click Dimension.Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. dimensions are aligned. By default.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. snap to wall centerlines.

694 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 5 Move the cursor above the view. and click to place the dimension. and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. select it.4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view.

Creating Dimensions | 695 . Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. and select it. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. click Dimension. click Modify.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. 7 On the Design Bar.

15 After you select the reference points on the final planter. above the plan view of the building.11 Using the same method. 14 Move the cursor to the right. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. select the right side of the curtain wall. 12 On the Options Bar. and select its left exterior face. but below the first dimension that you placed. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. for Prefer. select the right endpoint of the planter. 16 Move the cursor up. select Wall Faces. 696 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. under Graphics. select Ordinate.3/32" Arial . for Dimension String Type.3/32" Arial . Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog.Ordinate. enter Linear .Baseline. and click OK. select Baseline. click Duplicate. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Creating Dimensions | 697 . 21 In the Type Properties dialog. The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. 25 In the Name dialog. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. enter Linear . for Dimension String Type. . 18 On the Basics tab. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. click Duplicate. 27 Click OK twice.

698 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .3/32" Arial . under Dimension Value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text. enter Planter. 33 Under Text Fields. to the left. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above. . 30 In the Type Selector.29 Select the dimension string. or to the right of a permanent dimension value.3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style. below. select Linear . select Linear . for Below. verify that Use Actual Value is selected. for example Text dialog displays. The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.Baseline. 34 Click OK. and in the Type Selector.

38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. 37 On the Design Bar. and specify a point to place the dimension. click Modify. select Wall faces. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.35 On the Design Bar. For Prefer. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall. click Dimension. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. and select it. Creating Dimensions | 699 . click Modify.

for Suffix.42 Select the radial dimension.. and click OK. click the dimension text. 46 On the Basics tab. click Modify. 700 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . type Typ. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog. 44 With the dimension still selected.

Creating Dimensions | 701 . This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. verify that Wall faces is selected. 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter. For Prefer.Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. 49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). click Dimension. 50 Select the horizontal line. 48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

54 Proceed to the next exercise. you select only the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 702.52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. 702 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. and double-click Level 3. 53 On the Basics tab. and click to place the dimension. click Modify. When you dimension the wall. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. select Entire Walls. select Wall centerlines. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. Click OK. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references. select Openings.Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. and select Widths. and click to place the automatic dimension string. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 703 . Click Options. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. For Pick. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings.

you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. expand Views (all). However. For example. in some cases. expand Floor Plans. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. and double-click Level 1. for a multi-segmented dimension. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. When you place dimensions.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. Controlling Witness Lines on page 704. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall.7 On the Basics tab. 704 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Controlling Witness Lines | 705 . 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. verify Wall centerlines is selected. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. select Individual References. For Pick.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select it. click Dimension.

and click to place the dimension. 706 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . move the cursor down. and select it.7 Using the same method. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. select the bottom right endpoint. 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 10 Using the same method. select the right edge of the planter.

select it. Controlling Witness Lines | 707 . click Dimension. select Wall centerlines. 13 On the Options Bar.11 Move the cursor down. and specify a point to place the dimension. Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab. and when the wall centerline highlights. for Prefer. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan.

and drag the dimension down the wall. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed.15 Moving the cursor to the right. 18 While pressing SHIFT. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. 19 Release SHIFT. 708 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. click Modify.

and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. drag it to the right. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 709 . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. text font. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 709. and using the same methods. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. you change the dimension tick mark.20 Click the blue middle grip. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. After you create the new family type. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. 22 On the Basics tab.

710 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics. and click OK. and select the lower dimension. click Edit/New. for Tick Mark. click Duplicate. 2 Click (Element Properties). zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. type Office Standard. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 5 In the Name dialog. select Arrow 30 Degree. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.

select another font. For Text Font. 7 On the Basics tab. click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. 9 In the Type Selector. type 1/8”. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 711 .■ ■ Under Text. select CityBlueprint. ■ Click OK twice. click Modify. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. and select the bottom dimension. for Text Size. 10 On the Basics tab. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system.

You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. select the angular dimension on the planter. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. and how to add leaders to the text notes. Creating Text Annotation on page 712. create a new angular dimension type. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. 712 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .11 Using the same method. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 713 . zoom to the planter near grid line 5. but below the upper dimension string. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click (None). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Leader. click Text. 3 On the Options Bar. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. and click and drag to create a text box.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4.

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. type EXISTING BUILDING. and click OK. type 1/4''. 10 In the Name dialog box. 11 Under Text. click Modify. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. type 1/4'' Arial Notes. and click OK. under Graphics. select Arc Leaders. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. click Edit/New. and click OK. for Text Size. If so. 714 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click . click Duplicate.5 In the text box. 7 Select the text box.

A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 715 . 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. click Text. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. and type Planting Bed.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. click Modify. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. ■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). 15 On the Design Bar. Click (Add Left Arc Leader).

click Modify. for Text Font. and click OK. Under Graphics. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select CityBlueprint. 716 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. Click Rename. 24 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. type Standard Notes. click Modify. click Edit/New. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. Under Text. for Leader Arrowhead. In the Rename dialog. for New. Click OK twice. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. over the Planting Bed text. for Leader. Wall. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. 31 Click in the text box. click to place the text box. and type 18'' Conc. click (Arc). 26 In the Type Selector. click Text. 27 On the Options Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 717 . and click Modify. select Text: Standard Notes.

32 If you want to save your changes. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 718 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click File menu ➤ Save As.

plywood. 719 . you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. add detail components. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. like a standard door header condition.Detailing 13 In this tutorial. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2009. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. you trace over the building model geometry. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. and metal studs. These components display at the required scale. In order to detail from the building model. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. In the callout view. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view.

6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. select As underlay. click Detail Component. After you add components. and click OK. and insulation objects.rvt. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. which means that all detail components. The roof overhang detail displays. region objects. Exact location is not important. 720 | Chapter 13 Detailing . You load detail components. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click the detail callout head. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as well as detail lines.Detailing the View In this exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the alert dialog. click Training Files. you detail the view of the roof edge. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. They are also view specific. and click Open. navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the drawing area.rfa. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view.

Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. click Repeating Detail. Detailing the View | 721 . click Edit/New. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. for Pattern ➤ Detail. enter Corrugated Metal Siding.8 Delete the component. 16 Click OK twice. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 10 On the Options Bar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click (Element Properties). 17 In the drawing area. select Corrugated Metal. and click OK. enter 1' 4". 15 For Spacing. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point.

Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click Detail Component. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.rfa. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. click Load. verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected. click Training Files. click (Move). 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. and click Open. 22 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click Modify. 24 In the Type Selector.19 On the Design Bar. 722 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. ■ ■ Click Modify.

Because you still have several components to load. and click Open. 31 To properly orient the component. click Training Files. 29 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. Detailing the View | 723 . you load them as a group from a single file. click OK. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.rvt. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 33 In the Type Selector. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. click Detail Component. and place it in the detail view as shown. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components.

The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 724 | Chapter 13 Detailing . select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8". and click Modify. 37 Click Modify. select Chain. click the Flip instance arrows. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. 38 Select the horizontal segment.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 35 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.

42 Click Modify. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. and on the Edit toolbar. (Move). click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Detailing the View | 725 . For Offset. enter 5 1/2". Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point. select to near side. as shown. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. click Insulation.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar.

■ Click Modify. 51 Click Modify. 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component. select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2". 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. and lock the component. click Detail Component. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 45 In the Type Selector. 726 | Chapter 13 Detailing . as shown. 47 In the Type Selector. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. select Plywood-Section : 3/4". select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12.

click Detail Lines. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. you add lines to your detail. select Thin Lines. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines on page 727. enter 1/4". they are view specific.rvt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Detail Lines | 727 . 5 Select the vertical plywood component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 4 Click Modify. 7 In the Type Selector.52 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. meaning they display only in this view. as shown. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component. Like detail components. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist. 2 In the Type Selector. For Offset.

16 On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines. click Detail Lines. click (Draw). 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component. Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. select Chain. as shown. and draw the detail lines as shown. enter 1/4".10 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 728 | Chapter 13 Detailing . as shown. and press ENTER. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component. and clear Chain.

the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. and click Properties. select the Penthouse level line. right-click. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select Thin Lines. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 24 On the View Control Bar. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 18 In the Type Selector. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. select Do not display. and click OK. draw the detail lines as shown. Adding Detail Lines | 729 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 22 In the Project Browser. When you turn the display model off. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area.

Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. select Vapor Barrier. enter 1/2". 30 In the Type Selector. press SPACEBAR as necessary. click Detail Component. and press ENTER. 730 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. 29 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select Break Line. For Offset.

select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. and click to place the dimension. Enter the text. specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale.32 Click Modify.rvt. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Adding Text Notes on page 731. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. you add text notes to complete the detail. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. click Dimension. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Text Notes | 731 . Adding Text Notes In this exercise. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. 3 On the Options Bar.

and click Rename. right-click. click Select All Instances. click 6 In the Filter dialog. Creating Detail Components on page 732.7 Click Modify. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click. and save the exercise file. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select a text note. and click OK. and click the dimension text. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. for Suffix. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. (Filter Selection). 9 In the Dimension Text dialog.Keynotes. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area.. enter Roof Overhang Detail . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. enter Typ. and click OK. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. on the Options Bar. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and press DELETE. under Text Fields. 732 | Chapter 13 Detailing . right-click. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Roof Overhang Detail.rvt. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. 8 Select the dimension line. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.

in the Type Selector. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component. click Training Files. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. while pressing CTRL. 16 Click Modify. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. pressing TAB. and selecting the chain. and click Open. select Medium Lines. 7 Click Modify. Creating Detail Components | 733 . select all the coping linework.rft. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 14 Click Modify. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 15 Use a window to select all linework.The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.

18 In the Save As dialog. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for File name. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 734 | Chapter 13 Detailing . double-click it in the Project Browser. click Detail Component. click Load. click Training Files. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 Using a window. While pressing SHIFT. enter Roof Edge. 22 Click Modify. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 30 In the drawing area. navigate to your preferred location. 25 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. select the coping. and the component can be placed in the detail. 21 To place the component. clear Detail Items. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. and click Save. 31 Using the same method used previously.Keynotes view is not the open view. The original linework remains selected. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. click Detail Component.rfa. and click Open. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 28 On the Options Bar. delete the underlying linework. click Load into Projects. click . 24 On the Options Bar.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 26 Press DELETE. Adding Keynotes on page 735. 27 On the Design Bar.

3/4" Plywood. click Keynote ➤ Element.rfa. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project.D11. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.Adding Keynotes In this exercise. Click to place the leader arm. use keynote 07645. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Keynotes | 735 . Roof Edge4. and click OK. 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation. In the Keynotes dialog. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. For the metal coping. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. and click Open.B5. you place keynotes on objects. click Training Files. 2 In the alert dialog.C1. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rvt. use keynote 06160. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them.

click Keynote ➤ Element. For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard. use keynote 06110. select Corrugated Metal. click Edit/New. 12 On the Design Bar.D1. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. navigate to 07645.6 Click Modify. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component.F1. use keynote 06160. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.20 Ga.G1. use keynote 09250. For the 2x6. 7/8" Corrugated Steel . 11 Click OK 3 times. select the metal fascia with drip edge. 15 In the Type Selector. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 737.A8. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click in the Value column. 17 Keynote the component. and click . For the 2x8. click Detail Component. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. 18 Save the file. use keynote 06110. For the 2x12. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. You do this in order to keynote the component. FasciaProfile_1.F1. 736 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. using keynote 07460. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. For the 3/4" Plywood Siding. 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties). use keynote 06110. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar.I1. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.D11.

rvt. 15 Click Modify. and click Save. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 737 . 22 On the Options Bar.rft. and select the right end point. select Medium Lines. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. click Detail Component. click Load. 5 In the drawing area. and click (Element Properties). 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 6 Lock the line. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 9 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 13 In the Type Selector.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. select the left end point of the reference line. navigate to your preferred location. 4 In the Type Selector. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. for File name. and click Open. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Modify. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component. 11 Press DELETE. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 16 Select the component. 19 In the Name dialog. select Medium Line Detail Component. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click Detail Component. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based. click Duplicate.

(Move). 41 Select the component just added. and assign it keynote 07260.A5. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. and click . 47 Select the component. enter EPDM Membrane. name the component Air Barrier. and click . and click OK. select i_Light Line Detail Component. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 38 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Selector. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 48 Using the same method used previously. 31 Select the component. click Detail Component. invisible. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. and assign it keynote 06110. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. click Training Files. i_Invisible Line Detail Component. 44 On the Design Bar. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. click Detail Component. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 46 Click Modify. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. against the 3/4" plywood. 738 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Duplicate. on the Edit toolbar. and i_Light Line Detail Component.23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Edit/New. and hidden) used in the view. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light.A1. 49 With the component selected. and click Open.G1. and click the lower end at the break line. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. and click . 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. name the component 2 x 8 Framing. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 42 Using the same method used previously. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. click in the Value column. You add the components to the project and keynote them. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 40 Click Modify. 30 Click Modify. click Detail Component. 34 In the Name dialog. 37 Click OK 3 times. 29 In the drawing area. and click . 24 While pressing CTRL. 25 Next.

select i_Hidden Line Detail Component.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 739 . leaving the detail component lines. click Detail Component. 52 In the Type Selector. 53 On the Options Bar. 55 Click Modify. and click . 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. select Chain.

58 Using the method used previously. 2 x 8 Framing. and assign it keynote 07260. select Invisible Lines. click Detail Component. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. select the component.A4. click Keynote ➤ Element. 61 In the drawing area.rfa. and Vapor Barrier. 68 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component. 63 In the drawing area. 67 In the Type Selector. 60 On the Design Bar. 64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 740 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Load into Projects. name the component Vapor Barrier. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Air Barrier. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa.

navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial.69 Select the component.A9. click to place the leader. ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 741 .A1. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460.txt.rvt.A1. and click OK. click Keynote ➤ Element.. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. add a keynote for the component. and click OK. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. under Keynote Table. 72 Save the file. and press TAB. Each keynote displays as a simple number. and click . 70 Using the method used previously. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes. and click Open. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. In the Type Selector. and click to place the note. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). and close the text editor. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.A4. click File menu ➤ Save. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. The database file opens in a text editor. 3 In the text editor. select Absolute. and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes. Enter 07460. select all the keynotes. navigate to 07463. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 741. Enter 07463. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 71 In the drawing area. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. 11 Click Modify. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. name the component Batt Insul. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and press ENTER. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. 9 In the drawing area. and assign it keynote 07210. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. and press TAB. under Path Type. click Browse. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP.txt.

i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. For Colors. The detail that you import is in DWG format.■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. These details do not update with changes to the building model. select 3" = 1'-0". You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. select Black and White. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.Center to Center is selected. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. For Positioning. click Training Files. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 14 Save the file. 13 Click Modify.rvt. for Scale. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. After you create a drafting view. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.dwg. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. you learn how to create a drafted detail. 742 | Chapter 13 Detailing . verify that Auto . as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. and click OK.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Reference Callout | 743 . 6 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Modify. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail.rvt. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. right-click Drafting 1. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Reference Callout on page 743. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). click Callout. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Rename. select Reference other view. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 6 Select the callout. 3 On the Options Bar.■ Click Open. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. and click OK.

and double-click the callout. 744 | Chapter 13 Detailing ./Details. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. click Edit/New.Elev. enter Detail . and click Properties.No Reference. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 10 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 12 Click OK twice. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. double-click A105 . The callout is updated with the sheet information. delete the existing value. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. click Modify.No Reference). for New./Sect. right-click EPDM Metal Coping.Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 745 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. for Name. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. enter Header @ Sliding Door. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail.rvt. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.18 Save the file. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 745 . Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. click Detail Component. and click OK. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0". Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . On the Options Bar. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. 14 Click OK 3 times. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click . select Wide Lines. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. Board. 11 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 On the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown.5 In the Type Selector. Draw a rectangle as shown. select Gypsum-Plaster. select the left and bottom edges of the region. and enter 5/8". 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Select the left edge of the region. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. for Name. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. click Finish Sketch. 19 In the Type Selector. select the width dimension. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 746 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Edit/New. enter Gyp. 17 Click Modify. click Region Properties. and click OK. 18 While pressing CTRL.

click 22 On the Options Bar. Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point. and on the Edit toolbar. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6. and click above the top of the region as the end point. Move the cursor up. (Draw). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 747 . 24 Select the mirrored region.Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror).

click Duplicate. and select the right edge of the wood region. for Name. 33 Click OK 3 times. 30 In the Name dialog. select Wood . for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Filled Region. 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . click Edit/New.Finish. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog.Finish. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. Draw a rectangle as shown. click (Rectangle). 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Select the right edge of the lower 2x6. and click OK. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 748 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. in the Type Selector. click (Align). On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Wood .25 Click Modify. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that the thickness is 3/4".

Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click Finish Sketch. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Filled Region. sketch the new region as shown. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. and press ENTER. 39 In the Type Selector. 42 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. 40 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. For Offset.37 On the Design Bar. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 749 . verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2". click Finish Sketch. enter 1/4". 38 On the Design Bar. click .

enter 0. Move the cursor down 1'. Move the cursor right 1". and click to select the point. 750 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Move the cursor left 1". For Offset. 47 Click the reference plane. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. click 48 Click Modify. and click to select the point. click Filled Region. enter 3/8". 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). For Offset.46 On the Tools toolbar. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. (Align). and click to select the point. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. Select Chain. and press ENTER.

and right edges of the door panel region. 58 In the Type Selector. enter 1/8". select Medium Lines. top. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 751 . 60 Select the left. 56 On the Design Bar. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. and select the bottom horizontal line. For Offset.54 On the Tools toolbar. Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Sketch.

69 Select the bolt.61 Click Modify. select the height dimension. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. and press ENTER. and click Open. enter 3". 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 62 Select the left detail line.rfa. 752 | Chapter 13 Detailing . TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. click Load. 68 Click Modify. 65 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. click Training Files. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.

79 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 753 . 80 On the Options Bar. select Wide Lines. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 78 On the Design Bar. select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6. 76 In the Type Selector. 74 Select the expansion bolt. click Detail Lines.rfa. click Load. click Detail Component.70 On the Design Bar. 71 On the Options Bar. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click Open. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side. click . 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. use the images as a guide.

754 | Chapter 13 Detailing . drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 84 On the Design Bar. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 85 On the Options Bar. 87 Click Modify. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and on the Edit toolbar. (Mirror). click . 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.82 Select the rectangle. click Detail Lines.

select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. and on the Edit toolbar.89 On the Design Bar. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click Detail Lines. 92 Select the line. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 755 . Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. click (Mirror). as shown. 90 In the Type Selector.

enter 1/8". 102 In the Type Selector.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. select the length dimension. click Detail Lines. 756 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. click . draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 97 On the Options Bar. 101 On the Design Bar. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. select Break Line. and press ENTER. 99 Click Modify. and click to place the arc as shown. 95 On the Design Bar. 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. click Detail Component.

105 In the drawing area. and click OK. click Dimension. click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. the new style displays only inches. 107 Select the dimension line. 109 In the Type Properties dialog. Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot. 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. and on the Options Bar. for Text ➤ Units Format. The dimension display is updated. and click Modify. click Duplicate. enter Detail Linear . click Dimension. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. Select Suppress 0 Feet.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. click in the Value column. For Rounding. click Edit/New. 113 Click OK 3 times. . 110 In the Name dialog. 106 Click to place the dimension. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default. 114 On the Design Bar.3/32" Arial. select To the nearest 1/16". Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 757 . 111 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Dimension.115 In the Type Selector. enter See Schedule. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension. drag the text for the smaller dimension. select Replace With Text. and click Modify. for Below. and then click the dimension text. 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown.3/32”Arial. and enter Varies. 758 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. 119 In the Dimension Text dialog. 123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . 121 Click OK. select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial. 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. under Dimension Value. 120 Under Text Fields. 117 Select the dimension line. using the Drag Text grip.

Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C. and click the dimension text. select Replace With Text. 127 In the Dimension Text dialog. 129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B. 130 Click OK. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A. 128 Click OK.125 Select Modify to end the command. under Dimension Value. 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 759 .

and click to place the text. 760 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Board. select the gypsum board region on the left. 133 In the drawing area.Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 139 Save the file. click to create an arced leader. 138 On the Design Bar. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 134 Enter Gyp. 135 Select the note. and on the Options Bar. click Modify to end the command. 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 132 In the Options Bar. and click Modify. click Text.

Creating a Note Block In this exercise. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Finishing the Sheets 14 In this tutorial. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. 761 . you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. and double-click East. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

click Modify. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 7 On the Design Bar. click Symbol. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. type 1. 8 Select the keynote. 5 On the Options Bar. 762 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Hexagon. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. for Number of Leaders.rfa. click Training Files.

click (Copy). on the Options Bar. Creating a Note Block | 763 . 12 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. for Text. 13 Select the tag. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties).9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. type Seal existing doors and insulate. under Identity Data. and click above the tag to place the copy.

click (Element Properties). 764 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 17 Click OK. 19 With the tag selected. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. on the Options Bar.14 With the copy selected. type B. type Repair existing door surround. (Mirror). 15 For Text. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. on the Edit toolbar. 18 Using the same method. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. and click. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. 16 For Tag. click Copy. and on the Options Bar.

Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.21 On the Design Bar. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 765 . Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Tuckpoint as required. 22 Optionally. Remove all existing windows. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean existing concrete loading dock. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair existing door surround. and moving counter-clockwise. Clean exterior brick wall. using the table as a reference. Repair as required. click Modify.

type Mark. Clean cut and repair wall as required.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and for Alignment. for Header text. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 766 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . On the Sorting/Grouping tab.Elevations. for Sort by. expand Schedules/Quantities. for the value. 27 In the column header (text). 26 Click OK. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. and select Bold. and click Add. expand Sheets (all). type 1/4''. and click OK. type Exterior Construction Notes. On the Appearance tab. under Available fields. select Exterior Construction Notes. select Center. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. format. type Description. 29 In the Project Browser. select Tag. and click Add. for Note block name. Select Text. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and drag it to the sheet. select Tag. Create. On the Formatting tab. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. and double-click A103 . verify that Arial is selected. 28 In the Project Browser. for Heading.

Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.Title Sheet. double-click T . 1 In the Project Browser.31 On the Design Bar.rvt. 33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Modify. under Sheets (all). you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using Drawing Lists | 767 .

in the second field. select Sheet Number. On the Filter tab.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. select Sheet Index. select Sheet Number. under Available fields. expand Schedules/Quantities. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click Add. select does not equal. The drawing list displays. 6 In the Project Browser. type T. under Sheets (all). for Sort by. Select Sheet Name. and in the third field. and click Add. for Filter by. select Sheet Number.Title Sheet. 768 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and drag it to the sheet. ■ 4 Click OK. in the first field. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. 7 In the Project Browser. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. 5 In the list title field. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. double-click T .

On construction documents. windows. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model. Training File Using Legends | 769 . annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. door frame schedule. For the text. and so on). 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. doors. click Modify. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it.9 On the Design Bar. 11 Save the file. Finally. On construction documents. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. and door frames.

9 For Text Font. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. type 1/8''. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 770 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. and click OK. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. type Typical Symbol Legend. 10 For Text Size. select Arial. click . click Symbol.rvt.Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote . 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. for Name. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. and click OK twice. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. type Legend Text. and click OK. 6 On the Options Bar.Open Level Head . you create a text type with the necessary size. click Edit/New. for Name. click Text.

16 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. expand Sheets (all).Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. expand Legends. verify that is selected. and for Leader. and double-click A101 . and click to place it. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet.Site Plan/Floor Plan. 14 Working from the top down. Creating a Symbol Legend | 771 . type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser.

23 Save the file. 772 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.17 In the Type Selector. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. double-click A102 . 22 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. and click to place it.Unit 18. click Modify. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 18 On the Design Bar. under Sheets. click Modify. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. 21 In the Type Selector.

You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. and on the Options Bar. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 3 For Scale. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. click Modify. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.rvt. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. For Host length. select Section. 8 On the Design Bar. for Name. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 9 Select the second wall. and press ENTER. Creating a Component Legend | 773 . 2 In the New Legend View dialog. type 3'. type 4th Floor Wall Types. For View. 7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select 3/4'' = 1'-0''. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Family. click Legend Component.

12 On the Options Bar.Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click to add text without a leader. click Text. 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 774 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. for Leader. 11 In the Type Selector.

18 Type the following text. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking. 16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. Creating a Component Legend | 775 . 19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. The text note with leader is added to the legend.Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar. click to add text with a single-segment leader.

23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. select 4th Floor Wall Types. drag it onto the sheet. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. and drag it to the new sheet.Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 24 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all). under Legends. 22 In the Project Browser. 776 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . select Level 4. under Floor Plans. and click New Sheet. 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Floor Plans. 29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar. click (Match Type). The open drawings are both visible. 28 In the Project Browser. select the Wall Type 2 component. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. click Modify to end the command.25 On the Design Bar. Creating a Component Legend | 777 . Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. double-click Level 4. indicating that it captured the wall type properties.

34 On the View Control Bar. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.32 In the floor plan view. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. select Detail Level: Medium. 33 Select the patio divider wall. 778 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .

contractor inquiries. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds.35 Optionally. In this exercise. Using the table. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. These changes can be due to owner requests. Using Revision Tracking | 779 . and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. click 36 Save the file. double-click Level 4. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. or changes in building material availability. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. You can create a sequence of revisions. unanticipated changes in construction conditions.rvt. under Floor Plans.

all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 5 For Description. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. For example. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. When you use this option. 7 Under Show. In most instances. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. the revision is locked and issued to the field.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 780 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. verify that Per Project is selected. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. In general. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. If Visible is not selected. for Numbering. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. type a date. When Issued is selected. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. If you select Per Sheet. yet as concise as possible. if the active revision is number 1. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.

2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. double-click Level 4. 3 Select the divider. click (Move). move the cursor up. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. you make changes to the project floor plan. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. including revision number and revision date. 5 Select the divider. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Sketching Revision Clouds | 781 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 9 Save the file. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall.8 Click OK. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. click Modify.rvt. 6 On the Design Bar.

In the Snaps dialog.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 782 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. select Snaps Off. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 8 In the drawing area. click near the partition you moved. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. and click OK. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud.

you load a revision tag into the project. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 17 Save the file. click the Annotation Objects tab.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Line Weight. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 783 . select 6. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 16 Click OK. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.

scroll down to Revision Clouds. 8 In the Tags dialog. click Training Files. click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt. You then issue a revision. and because the revision is the first in the project. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 4. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. the cloud is tagged as number 1.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table.rfa. 5 In the Tags dialog. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Training File 784 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 10 In the drawing area. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 12 Save the file. notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. 6 Click Load. click OK. you need to add one. under Floor Plans. select Leader. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 11 Click to place the tag. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Working with Revisions In this exercise. click Tags. Because you chose to number by project.

select Issued. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. You do this by issuing the revision. double-click A107 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and click OK. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Add another revision row. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. click Add. 7 For Description.Unnamed.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. type Modify Paving Area. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. Working with Revisions | 785 . and enter a date.rvt. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. with the description Relocate Door. you prevent further changes to the revision. 9 Click OK. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. You can continue to add revisions. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. under Sheets. NOTE After you issue a revision. you can no longer modify it. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. and enter a date for the revision.

Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 19 To add tags. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. 3 .Modify Paving Area. 12 In the drawing area. double-click Level 4. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 13 Click Finish Sketch. under Sheets (all). 20 On the Project Browser. in the drawing area. 2 . click to add a revision clouds. 11 On the Drafting tab. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. apply Seq.Unnamed. 17 Using the same method learned previously. for Revision. select the revision cloud. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 15 On the Options Bar. select Tag ➤ By Category. double-click A107 . click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 786 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select Revision Cloud. select Seq.

Click Options.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. delete the first 3 characters. for Numbering. for Sequence. select the titleblock. height. 25 Click OK twice. beginning with "D". select Alphabetic. Working with Revisions | 787 . You do this so that the revision can be changed. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. 26 In the drawing area. and rotation) to the revision schedule. you edit the titleblock family. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. clear Issued. For each revision. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family.

click Edit Family. select Bottom-up. click Yes. and drag it above the schedule area. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. 34 On the Design Bar. click Yes. under Other. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected.27 On the Options Bar. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. for Appearance. Select Grid lines. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. Clear Blank row before data. click Modify. 788 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click Edit. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. right-click Revision Schedule. for Build Schedule. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. and press DELETE. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the alert dialog. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. and click Properties. Select Outline. 33 Select the schedule header. click Load into Projects. 30 In the Element Properties dialog.

and the most current revisions display in the available rows. Working with Revisions | 789 . When the height property is variable. for Rotation on Sheet. select User defined. enter Rev. click Edit. select the revision schedule. for Height. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. open the titleblock family for editing. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. 40 Select the revision schedule header. 46 Click OK twice. right-click Revision Schedule. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. for Heading. 45 On the Appearance tab. With a user-defined height. and click Properties.. under Other. and on the Options Bar. select 90° Counterclockwise. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. for Formatting. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created.

The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. click Yes. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. text. 51 Save the file. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. you learn to import information (such as images. 790 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click Load into Projects.

Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and place it on a sheet.Importing Image Files In this exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. under Sheets.JPG. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. under Sheets.Title Sheet.Title Sheet.rvt. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. click Text. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Importing Image Files | 791 . 5 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. for Leader.rvt. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. double-click T . click to add text without a leader. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click T . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

click Modify. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 6 Select the text. Training File 792 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. with the new text box still selected. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 11 Save the file. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit MEP.doc text file in another window. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. 9 On the Design Bar.

8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. This exercise demonstrates a common method. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.rvt. for Name. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.JPG. 3 In Microsoft Excel.Unit 18. 1 In the Project Browser. This step has been completed for you. click Desktop. 12 Save the file. 5 Click OK. and open Common\Fixture Schedule.xls. under Sheets. 7 In the Revit MEP window. click Training Files. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. click Modify. and click Save. type Fixture Schedule. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. select the document writer. This process may vary from system to system.mdi. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet.JPG. for File name. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. Importing Spreadsheets | 793 . double-click A102 . Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. click File menu ➤ Print. 10 On the Design Bar. and saved as Fixture Schedule. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 4 Under Printer.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

794 .

you break up the plan into sections. or footprint. To effectively document this project.Using Dependent Views 15 In this tutorial. as well as a large lab building. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. The large floor plan. called dependent views. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. 795 . you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.

796 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 797 .

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit. 6 In the drawing area, select the crop region. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region, and the model crop is the interior crop region.

7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.

798 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

9 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 799

10 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 11 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Labs, and click OK. 14 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 15 Select the crop region. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.

800 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 19 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).

20 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Matchline. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points:

Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.)

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 801

■ ■ ■ ■

Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 16', and click.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

802 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 26 In the Object Styles dialog, click the Annotation Objects tab. 27 Under Matchline, for Line Weight, select 9. 28 For Line Pattern, select Double Dash 5/8'', and click OK.

Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 31 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets, right-click A101 - Unnamed, and click Rename. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 Aviary, and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click Level 2 - Aviary, and drag it onto the sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 803

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet, rename the sheet Level 2 Labs, and place the Level 2 - Labs dependent view on the sheet.

Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 - Aviary is selected. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.

804 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

44 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 45 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 805

46 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2 - Aviary. 47 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Crop Region).

48 Select the crop region, click the far right control, and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.

49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

806 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.

51 On the View Control Bar, click Apply dependent view settings to other plans

(Hide Crop Region).

52 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 2, and click Apply Dependent Views. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view, you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 53 In the Select Views dialog, select all views in the list, and click OK. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view, but are not placed on sheets. 54 In the Project Browser, expand Level 1, and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 807

57 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views
In this exercise, you
■ ■ ■ ■

Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.rvt

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

808 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK. 5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.

6 Select the inside crop region control on the right, and drag it toward the center of the view, cropping the view to the aviary.

7 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

8 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 9 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Right, and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left, and drag it toward the center of the drawing, cropping the view to the lab building.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 809

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

810 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 811

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

812 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

Using Advanced Features

813

814

Grouping

16

Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009, you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. By grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance of a model group, all instances in the building model are updated, and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model group for a typical kitchen, and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project, or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive units.

Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups
In this lesson, you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units, hotel rooms, and typical office layouts. After you create a model group, you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. In another exercise, you add the new model group to a previously created group. The new group is considered nested within the host group, and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. When you make changes to a nested group, the host group is also updated automatically.

Creating and Placing a Group
In this exercise, you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In this exercise, you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You mirror one instance of the group, and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.

815

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium.rvt. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click First Floor.

2 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

816 | Chapter 16 Grouping

5 In the Create Model Group dialog. and click OK.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 817 . 4 On the Edit toolbar. enter Typical Kitchen. click (Group). The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.

click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. select the center control for the group origin. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 7 On the Design Bar. 818 | Chapter 16 Grouping .

11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. under Groups. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. click Modify.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. Creating and Placing a Group | 819 . and click Create Instance. expand Model. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. right-click Typical Kitchen. 12 On the Design Bar. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group.

15 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. click (Mirror).14 On the Edit toolbar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. clear Copy. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 820 | Chapter 16 Grouping .

Creating and Placing a Group | 821 . click (Rotate). 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. and on the Edit toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.

as shown. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. one mirrored. click Modify. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. and one rotated. 822 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 20 On the Design Bar.

click Save As. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group In this exercise.rvt. and click Save.rvt. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. you make changes to an instance of a group. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. press TAB to highlight the wall. and click to select it. Modifying a Group | 823 . Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. When you finish editing.

and click member to group instance. select the element. press TAB. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.). 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. 824 | Chapter 16 Grouping . press TAB. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.). 7 Click (Group Member.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall. NOTE To display an excluded element.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance.3 Click (Group Member. 4 Move the cursor over the door. and click to select the door.

click Door. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 825 . 12 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. click Modify.8 On the Design Bar. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 14 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 13 In the Type Selector. click Wall. clear Tag on Placement.

click Modify. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 826 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.16 On the Design Bar. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. move the cursor up. In edit group mode. All other elements in the model are grayed out. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 22 In the drawing area. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. click Edit Group. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan.

you add the Typical Kitchen group. for Unconnected Height. Nesting Groups In this exercise. created in an earlier lesson. click 27 For Base Offset. enter 7'. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 25 Select the opening. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Constraints. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. (Element Properties). and click OK. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. Nesting Groups | 827 . click Finish.24 On the Design Bar. which acts as the host. 28 On the group editor toolbar. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 3' 4''. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group.

in the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 3 On the Options Bar. select the Typical Kitchen group. 828 | Chapter 16 Grouping .Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.rvt. click Edit Group. click (Add to Group). i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. under Floor Plans.

double-click Second Floor. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. and each of the bifold doors. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors.6 Press TAB. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. Nesting Groups | 829 . click Finish. 7 On the group editor toolbar.

Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. double-click First Floor. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. such as door and window tags. such as text. you add door tags to a group. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. 830 | Chapter 16 Grouping . you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.rvt. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. and filled regions. under Floor Plans.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the next exercise. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model.

6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 4 On the Options Bar. and select a point below the left elevator. Creating a Detail Group | 831 . click to draw a rectangular region. click Finish Sketch.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 7 On the Design Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Filled Region.

16 In the drawing area. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 12 Enter Tile.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 832 | Chapter 16 Grouping . and on the Design Bar. click to add an arc leader. as shown. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click Text. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click OK. and select the text note and the filled region. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. click (Group). 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 9 On the Options Bar.

under Groups. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 833 . click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. 22 On the Design Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. Because the detail group contains variables. 20 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. expand Detail. double-click Second Floor. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. click Modify. and click Create Instance. 21 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group.18 On the Design Bar.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click First Floor. click Modify. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. clear Leader. 834 | Chapter 16 Grouping . Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.manner that a drawing component can be added. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. 3 On the Options Bar. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. as shown. click Tag ➤ By Category. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.

for Attached Detail Group Name. click (Group). click Check None. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached.7 On the Options Bar. double-click Second Floor. and click OK. Using Attached Detail Groups | 835 . 8 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click (Filter Selection). expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. select Door Tags. 9 On the Edit toolbar. under Floor Plans.

select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Place Detail. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. When you load the group from the library into a new project. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. therefore. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. 16 On the Design Bar. Training File 836 | Chapter 16 Grouping . NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. click Modify. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. and click OK.

rvt. and click Save Group. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. click Modify. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Saving and Loading Groups | 837 . click Desktop. In this case. verify that Project is selected.rvt. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and expand Model. verify that Same as group name is selected. and click Open. expand Groups. click OK. 3 For File name. under Groups\Model. and click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Create Instance. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. browse to the Desktop. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. A warning dialog displays. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. select 2 Bedroom Unit. 5 In the New Project dialog. and click Save. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. for Create new. accept the default template file.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.

rvt. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Training Files. and the link is removed. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 In the message dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Use Existing. click Bind.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 17 On the Design Bar. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. select the linked Revit model. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. expand Revit Links. click Link. and on the Options Bar. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. When a group is converted to a link. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Remove Link. click OK. and click OK. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 20 On the Options Bar.rvt file is added as a link to the project. click Modify. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 18 In the Project Browser. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 838 | Chapter 16 Grouping .

This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. You can enable Worksharing for any project. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. The first time you activate worksets within a project. you specify an active workset. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. floors. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. such as annotations and dimensions. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published.Sharing Projects 17 When working with large building projects. doors. All other team members can view this workset. called Worksharing. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit MEP 2009. To make a workset editable. stairs. Working in a shared project In a shared project. 839 . use Element Borrowing. After the project is shared. however. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. and click Editable. go to the Worksets dialog. select the desired workset. and so on. A workset is a collection of building elements. In this tutorial. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. When you are working on a shared project. Using Worksharing. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. you must first enable Worksharing. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. such as walls. they cannot make changes to it. Elements specific to a view.

Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. such as a tenant interior. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. When setting up Worksharing. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. In the next exercise. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. In the lessons and exercises that follow. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you can select which worksets are open or closed. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Instead. Team size 840 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit MEP by opening only those worksets required for your work. In a multi-story structure. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. After learning the fundamentals. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance.

greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. When creating the new worksets. Regardless of the default setting. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Shared Levels and Grids. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. and View worksets. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. with each assigned a specific functional task. As new members create worksets for their own use. This allows Revit MEP to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. not including the Project Standards. In most projects. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. On this tab. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. designers work in teams. You should have at least one workset for each person. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 841 . A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Team member roles Typically. When you create a new workset. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. for a typical project. Experience has shown that. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use.

This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. However. When you save locally (to your local file). Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. the file is saved as the central file. After saving to the central file. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. For example. When you save to the central file. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Therefore. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you make that workset editable by you. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. however. your changes propagate to the entire team. proceeds as usual.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. 842 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. When finished or at regular intervals. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. This is called “Selective Open. When you save to the central file. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. Generally. you should then save to your local file. As you work. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. On the Options Bar. within the local file. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you can select which workset is active. This makes them available to other team members. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. if a workset named Interior was created. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. your changes are saved. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest.

Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 843 . The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. Alternatively. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. save to the central file. make any required worksets editable. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you work no differently then you would in the office.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. for instance. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. and make that workset editable. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. In this instance. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. In this situation. if you know who checked out the required workset. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. In this conceptual exercise. and then save the local file. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. When working remotely. To do this. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit MEP. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. reload the latest changes from the central file. using VPN. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you should check out the Materials workset. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable.

In the next exercise. 844 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Your username displays as the present owner. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File.rvt. and notice all are editable by you. and open Common\c_Worksets. click Worksets. In the left pane of the Open dialog." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. under Show. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. 3 In the Worksets dialog. The Worksets dialog displays. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. click Training Files. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.

The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. click OK. currently named Workset1. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. 12 Click Rename. select Workset1. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. and click OK. 13 In the Rename dialog. you can rename the default workset. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 845 . Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". imagine four users including yourself. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. type the name Exterior Shell. it is better to make them visible by default. Project Standards. Therefore. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. clear Visible by default in all views. In this simple training project. 11 In the Worksets dialog. In this case. however.When you enable worksharing. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. 8 Click OK. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. 9 Click New. When you initially activate Worksharing. and double-click Level 1. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. clear Families. For example. ■ 5 Under Show. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. For training purposes. You do. 16 In the drawing area. In this training file. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. Revit MEP creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. and Views. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. expand Floor Plans. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. click New. Only User-Created worksets should display. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. another is assigned the interior layout. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. expand Views (all). 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. 14 In the Worksets dialog. Because the interior walls appear in many views.

20 Select one of the interior walls. 21 On the Options Bar. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 846 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 29 Click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. under Identity Data. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. and walls. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. and click OK. click . select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. including the interior doors. 19 Click OK.17 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View menu. click the Worksets tab. under Identity Data. click . The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 23 Select all of the interior elements. stairs. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. click .

enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. click Close. click Visibility/Graphics. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. double-click Level 2. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this exercise. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. and click OK. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. select Interior Layout for Workset. 42 On the right side of the dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 847 . Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 32 Select Interior Layout. under Views (all). 33 In the Project Browser. click the Worksets tab. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. select all of the interior elements of the building model. under Identity Data. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 39 Click Save. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 30 On the View menu. you enabled Worksharing on a project. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. and click OK. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 38 In the Save As dialog. under Floor Plans. 43 Click OK. click Worksets. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. If any interior elements remain. make sure you remember the location of this central file. click Non Editable. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Now that you have created the central file. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 41 In the Worksets dialog. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 34 In the drawing area. 44 On the File menu. click . click Save As. 35 On the Options Bar.

15 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 13 On the Window menu. and click Save. You have created a local file which is for your use only. select the central file. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Worksets. click Save As. 848 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 7 In the Save As dialog. select all the User-Created worksets. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. and double-click Level 1. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. expand Floor Plans. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. 12 Click OK. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 6 On the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. you create your local file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. 2 In the Open dialog. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. check out worksets. select Interior Layout for Name. click Open. please do so before continuing. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. select Interior Layout. and select Specify. Next. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 4 Click Open. and click OK. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and click OK. click Options. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. In this case. Before working on the model. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. In addition. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. make modifications to the building model. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 844.

19 In the Element Properties dialog. click . notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 24 Click OK. In the Worksets dialog. 20 Under Constraints. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 22 Click OK. Because this element is not owned by another user. however. click . Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. On the Options Bar. notice the Editable Only option. click Modify. and click OK. Verify that it is cleared. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 21 On the Options Bar.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If this is selected. In this case. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. 23 On the File menu. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. Revit MEP borrows it for you and applies your changes. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. under Identity Data. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. click Worksets. you can still edit this wall. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. Working Individually with Worksets | 849 . The upper exterior wall should still be selected. 18 On the Options Bar. If it was owned by another user.

34 In the Type Selector. 29 In the Type Selector. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 850 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 28 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior . The precise location is not important. 26 Delete the door.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. click Wall. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 31 On the Design Bar. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 33 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr). click Modify. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Door.

Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. In this particular case. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. and save locally immediately afterward. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. Whenever you save. each user must check out worksets. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. which matches the information in the Status Bar. and reload the latest changes. add two door openings into the rooms you created. Borrowed Elements is selected. click Save to Central. make elements editable. save to central. two users access the central file through a network connection. If you have not yet completed these exercises. In addition. displays the workset as well as the element type. checked out worksets. In this exercise. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. leave this file open in its current state. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. Throughout the process. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. you should perform regular saves. a tooltip. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. You modified the building model. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 851 .35 Using the following illustration as a guide. it is recommended. you should relinquish all worksets. please do so before continuing. When working in your local file. For training purposes. By default. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you created your local file. At the end of a work session. Saving your work 36 On the File menu.

and click Save. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. User 2: Create a local file. 15 On the File menu. 11 On the File menu. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 7 In the Open dialog. and select Specify. and proceed to Creating a local copy. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Using a second Revit MEP session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit MEP window. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. Regardless of which central file you choose to use.rvt. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. This file is for your use only. consider that person to be User 1. click Worksets.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. instructions are staggered. click Save As. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. skip the following section. enter User 2. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 2 Start a new Revit MEP session by double-clicking the Revit MEP icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. under Username. click Options. In the following section of this exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. This is a system setting. 9 Click Open. 12 In the Save As dialog. 3 On the Settings menu. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. For training purposes. In addition. and select Yes for Editable. 4 Click the General Tab and. You now have a local copy of the project. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and click OK. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. click Open. and click OK. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. select all the User-Created worksets. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. and click OK. click Options. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. return to the Settings dialog. specifically sequenced. one user has already created a local file. 852 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. select the central file.

User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. 17 Click OK. User 1: Check out worksets. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 853 . 24 In the Project Browser. click Save to Central. If it is not open. and select Yes for Editable. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. expand Floor Plans. click Worksets. 27 On the File menu. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. modify the building model. 23 Click OK. 19 On the File menu. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.You are now the owner of that workset.” 29 Click OK. open it now. select the lower exterior wall. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. expand Views (all). If you only have one workset checked out. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. it becomes the active workset. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. and double-click Level 1. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). 31 Using the following illustration as a guide.

The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. The changes User 2 made are apparent. and click OK. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. right-click Level 1. 37 On the File menu. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 41 On the File menu. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. Click Yes. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 42 Select Furniture Layout.” 39 Click OK. 33 On the File menu. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 45 In the Rename View dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Reload Latest. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. Before adding any furniture. 46 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. However. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Save to Central. under Floor Plans. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 854 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects .A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 43 In the Project Browser. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 44 In the Project Browser. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. User 1: Reload latest worksets. When you save to central. under Floor Plans. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. right-click Copy of Level 1. select Yes for Editable. and click Rename. under Views (all). 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Save to Central. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. you should create a furniture plan view. and click OK. click Worksets.” 35 Click OK.

under Show. 49 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 61 Click OK 2 times. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 855 . 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 66 On the File menu. such as Wall Types. 50 On the View menu. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. click Save to Central. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. are placed under Project Standards. Therefore. select Project Standards. the Visible by default option was not selected. 62 On the File menu. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. click Visibility/Graphics.200mm. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 65 Click OK. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. click Reload Latest. click Rename. choose any desk. 48 In the Type Selector. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. enter Exterior Wall . and click OK. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 60 In the Rename dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Save to Central. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall.” 55 Click OK.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. NOTE System families. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. and click inside any room. click the Worksets tab. and click Element Properties. rather than Families. and click OK. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. 63 In the Worksets dialog. click Component. click Worksets. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click Modify. 53 On the File menu.

■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). and still have your local files open. modified the building model. select Reload Latest. 3 In the Save As dialog. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. and click OK. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. As each of you work. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. click Training Files. 856 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . and these problems are rectified. select the following. click Save As. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. In the final exercise of this tutorial. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. click Options. and save 69 On the File menu. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 856. User 1: Reload latest. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. you save the training file as a central file. leave this file open in its current state. This exercise requires two users and. 70 On the File menu. At the appropriate point in this exercise. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Each user checked out worksets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you need to set up your central and local files. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Each user must have network access to the central file. Checking out worksets. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. select Save to Central. In subsequent steps.rvt. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. There are specific instructions for each user. finished the previous workset exercises. leave this file open in its current state. and published their changes back to the central file. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. throughout this training.

16 Select all the User-Created worksets. click Open. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. 5 Click Save. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Set the Username to User 2. and click OK. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and reset the Username to your computer login name. and click Save. The central file should still be open. and click OK. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click Save. and click OK. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. click Options. 8 In the Save As dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 13 In the Open dialog. click Options. return to the Settings dialog. click Save As. In addition. click Options. This is the local file for User 1. ■ ■ ■ This Revit MEP session is now set up for User 2. 6 On the File menu. select Make this a Central File after save. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. This is a system setting. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit MEP by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 857 . you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 15 Click Open. select the central file. any referenced workset is opened but hidden.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 12 On the File menu. Next. and click OK. On the Settings menu. 17 On the File menu. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and select Specify. 18 In the Save As dialog. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. and click OK. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. click Save As.

select Exterior Shell. and select Yes for Editable. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 26 In the Worksets dialog. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. select the second window from the top. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. click the File menu. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 858 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. select Interior Layout. 24 Under Active Workset. verify that Editable Only is cleared. and select Yes for Editable. and click Open. double-click Level 1. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. 22 In the Worksets dialog. Afterwards.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. if any User-Created worksets are not open. click Worksets. and click Editing Requests. 30 On the left exterior wall. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. and then click OK. under Floor Plans. 27 Under Active Workset. select the Interior Layout workset. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 29 On the Options Bar. You are now the owner of that workset. click Worksets. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. After you submit the request. At this point. You are now the owner of that workset. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. select them.

and click OK. click Check Now. click Close. In this case. 36 Click Close. you requested permission to edit the element. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 859 . to Local. 38 Click OK. select the following. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. In this multi-user exercise. select the request submitted by User 2. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 35 Click Grant. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. and close 39 On the File menu. and notice the window is in the new location. A message informs you that your request has been granted. select Save to Central.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. and the other user granted it.

860 .

Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. For example. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. 861 . At any time in the design process. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. In addition. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can have multiple sets of design options. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). In this tutorial. Using design options. After you and the client agree on the final design. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. and each option set can have multiple schemes.Creating Multiple Design Options 18 When working with a building model.

you set up multiple design option sets. TIP In this exercise. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. After you create a design option. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. each with multiple design options. make your final design decision. the only available command is to create a new option set. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you can edit it. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. In the final exercise of this lesson. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. and delete the unwanted options from the project.rvt. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). With the second option. 2 In the Design Options dialog. the roof and structure systems must work together. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. under Option Set. click Training Files. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered.In this particular case. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. The client has asked you to create various options. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. you design each of the structural options. In the first exercise in this lesson. therefore. click New. In the second exercise. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. 862 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . In the left pane of the Open dialog. each is constructed for interchangeability.

13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. or add a dimension string between the columns. 9 On the Design Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 863 . Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. TIP To center the middle column. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. click Modify. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and click Close. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. click Column. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 7 In the Type Selector. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. and the third column centered between the two. In the following illustration. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. In this case. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. expand Views (all). select: ■ ■ ■ . click Edit Selected. click 12 On the Options Bar. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. By selecting Multiple.3 Select Option 1 (primary). the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. add three columns. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 5 On the View menu.

A copy of the three selected columns is added. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 18 On the View toolbar. click . 17 Zoom out and.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. using the same technique. 864 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. When you are finished. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. they are difficult to see in this view. Because of the size of the columns. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction.

The second click specifies the end of the beam. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Zoom in on the upper right column. Creating the Structural Design Options | 865 . select Round Bar : 2". 23 On the Design Bar. you add the beams that span the columns. In it. Adding a beam is a two-click process. 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. click Beam. Use the following illustration as a guide. Next. The first click specifies the beam start point. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. under Floor Plans. double-click TOP OF CORE.Notice the 12 columns that you added. and click at its center to set the beam start point. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns.

click 26 On the Options Bar. and click the center point. 866 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . click . move down to the next set of columns. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. zoom into the left column. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.25 On the Edit toolbar. and select the center of the column to add a copy. 30 On the View toolbar. 28 Zoom out. select: ■ ■ ■ .

under Option. enter Structure for New. and click OK. click New. 33 Click Finish Editing. and click OK. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 46 Under Option. 41 Under Option Set. click Rename. click New. click Rename. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click New. and click OK. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. not a new option set. under Option Set. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 40 In the Rename dialog. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. click Rename. under Option. There should now be two roofing design options. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 34 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. click Rename. 45 Under Roofing. name the option Louvers. and click OK. 38 In the Rename dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options | 867 . select Option 1 (primary). 43 In the Rename dialog. and click OK.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 37 Select Option 2 and. 32 In the Design Options dialog. enter Roofing for New. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option Set. enter Beam for New. enter Brackets for New. under Option. 36 In the Rename dialog. click Rename.

under Floor Plans. Under Now Editing. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. under Structure. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 868 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . name the option Sunscreen. select Beam. 52 Click Close. it will resemble the following illustration. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. select Edit Selected. and click OK. 48 Under Option. When finished. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 50 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename. you create the second design option. 51 Under Edit. select Option 2. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 53 In the Project Browser. double-click ROOF TERRACE.47 Under Roofing.

56 In the Type Selector. 58 On the Tools menu. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 869 . Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. select Roof Beam. click Component. Refer to the following illustration. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. click Align. The second click represents the plane that is moved.

click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click to indicate the end point of the move. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 62 Select the beam and.60 After aligning the beam. 870 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 61 On the Design Bar. on the Edit toolbar. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. The first click sets the move start point. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. click Modify. The second click represents the move end point.

68 In the Design Options dialog. click Save As. you need this file in its current state.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. i_Urban_House-in progress. Creating the Structural Design Options | 871 . That is because the brackets option is set to primary. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Save. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise.rvt. which is visible by default. Notice that even before you close the dialog. 70 On the File menu. 69 Click Close. click Finish Editing. 67 On the Tools menu. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. click . 66 On the View toolbar. name the file.

You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. Sunscreen. 10 Referring to the following illustration. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. 8 In the Type Selector. select Louvers (primary).In this exercise. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 872 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. open it now. expand Views (all). under Roofing. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. 3 In the Design Options dialog. The second roofing system. click Edit Selected. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. delete them after the rafter is in place. The first option. If you need to add dimensions. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. select Rafter 2 x 10. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. expand Floor Plans. click Component. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. a Louver system. you set up multiple design option sets. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 4 Under Edit. do so now. With the second option. the other for beams. each with multiple design options to pick from. Under Now Editing. 2 On the Tools menu. In the next exercise. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. you design each of the roofing options.rvt. 5 Click Close. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise.

and click OK. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. enter 38' 6" for Length. under Other. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 16 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 15 On the Edit menu. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 873 . click . Select 2nd for Move To. Enter 5 for Number.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Constrain. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. click Array. 12 Select the rafter you added previously.

Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. when the listening dimension displays. rather than entering 3' 3". The space separates feet and inches. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. TIP When entering a dimension value. and press ENTER. enter 3' 3". you can enter 3 3.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. For example. 874 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options .

and click OK. enter 1’. click . and click Array. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. click the Edit menu. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 25 With the louver still selected. and select the louver you just placed. Select Constrain. select Louver 2 x 6. Enter 34 for Number. and. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. and press Enter. 27 For the array starting point. under Other.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. when the listening dimension displays. 26 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Design Bar. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 875 . Select 2nd for Move To. click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. click Component.

30 On the Tools menu. 876 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Finish Editing. 31 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click . under Edit.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. The louver roof system is complete. 29 On the View toolbar.

expand Elevations. the top of the next column on the right. and then click Close. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. click Lines. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. then you can modify it through the dimension. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. You will fix this in a later step. and double-click West. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 33 Under Editing. and click OK. click Properties. Click OK. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. under Roofing. Therefore. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. The first two points define the ends of the line. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 877 . and the third point defines the arc. 39 On the Design Bar. 43 On the Design Bar. click Edit Selected. select Sunscreen. click . Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. 41 Select the top of the left column. In this case. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. 40 On the Options Bar. 34 In the Project Browser.

and then click Close.44 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 50 On the Tools menu. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 45 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. The louver roof system is complete. you designed each of the roofing options. 46 On the Tools menu. Sunscreen. click Save. click Finish Sketch. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. then the center arc. 878 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Finish Editing. In this exercise. The first option. click Trim/Extend. Under Constraints. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. The arcs should connect. 51 In the Design Options dialog. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. a Louver system. The second roofing system. 48 On the Design Bar. click . you need this file in its current state. 49 On the View toolbar. 52 On the File menu. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. Select the right arc. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Under Constraints. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. under Edit. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options.

If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. and click Rename. 7 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. do so now. secondary. double-click Secondary Option. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. and click Duplicate.Managing Design Options In this exercise. under 3D Views. under Views (all). Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). 11 On the View menu. under Views (all). you must create a named 3D view for the primary. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. make it part of the building model. After exploring the combinations. enter Primary Option. under Views (all). and last options. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. and click Rename. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. you select a design. expand 3D Views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click {3D}. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. 5 Right-click each of the copies. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. click the Design Options tab. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. Managing Design Options | 879 . tertiary. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. click Visibility/Graphics. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. and delete the discarded design options. 9 Click OK. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. double-click Primary Option. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. 2 In the Project Browser.

19 On the View menu. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. 15 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. 18 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. under Views (all). specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 14 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). under 3D Views. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. double-click Tertiary Option. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 880 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. and click OK. double-click Last Option. and click OK.

click Accept Primary. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. but should be accepted as part of the building model. In your design options. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. In this case. Because the client has selected the design option. click Yes. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 30 Under Option Set. 27 In the alert dialog. since you no longer need them. 31 In the alert dialog. 23 In the Design Options dialog. the beam option becomes part of the model. Managing Design Options | 881 . the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary.At this point. click Yes. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. double-click Primary Option. select Beam. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. An alert is displayed. select Make Primary. 22 On the Tools menu. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Close. the current primaries are no longer options. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 24 Under Option. 33 In the Design Options dialog. The set is deleted. under Structure. This was the client choice for structural. 26 Under Option Set. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 29 Select Roofing. click Delete. 25 Select Structure.

you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 35 On the File menu. you selected a design. click Save. and deleted the discarded design options. made it part of the building model.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. In this exercise. 882 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . After exploring the combinations.

This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. then add new walls and doors in a different location.Project Phasing 19 In any project. demolish existing construction. 883 . demolish existing walls and doors. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. For the client. In the second exercise. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. You create new phases. You create new phases. and then add new building model elements. In the second exercise. complete with schedules. In the lesson and exercises that follow. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. This changes room definition and total building model area. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules.

they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. During the demolition and renovation process. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. 6 On the Options Bar. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. If you wish to do so. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. and double-click Level 1. 4 Click Cancel. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. and click OK. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 7 Click Cancel. are visible in this view. go to the Settings menu. click Modify. under Phasing. click Project Units. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. expand Floor Plans. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. When you create a new project.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. regardless of phase. under Phasing. define the units. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. click (Element Properties). This means that all building model elements. you do not need to change the project units to metric.rvt. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. As you add new elements to the building model. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Common\c_Phasing. click Training Files. In the Element Properties dialog. 884 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all).

Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection.Existing. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. for Phase Created. clear Door Tags.Existing. TIP If this were a multi-story building. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. and click Rename. 16 In the Rename dialog. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. and click Rename.Existing. click . are highlighted in red. enter Level 1 . enter Level 1 . 17 Click No. click Modify. select Existing. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. Phasing Your Model | 885 . and click OK. and click OK. After you release the mouse button. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 20 In the Rename dialog. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 . right-click Copy of Level 1 . draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. 19 In the Project Browser. including the door tags. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. Because this is a phase-specific view. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. under Phasing. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. Because this is a renovation project. 10 On the Options Bar. After you create the views. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Filter dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Demo. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. all of the building model elements.

under Floor Plans. 886 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . Existing. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. Because of this time relationship. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. to which all the building model elements belong. 28 Under Filter Name.Demo. under Phasing. 26 In the Phasing dialog. double-click Level 1 . double-click Level 1 . you modify these settings. click the Phase Filters tab. enter Composite Plan. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. under New. Demolished. 27 Click New. 29 For Composite Plan. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. On a logical time line. select Overridden. There are five default phase filters. Next. 21 In the Project Browser. In this case.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. Phase status is time-dependent. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. select Existing. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. for Phase. You may need to zoom in to see this. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status.Existing. however. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Later in this exercise. and Temporary. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. new construction occurs after existing construction. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style.

This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. When you demolish the host. you begin demolition. you demolish all elements hosted by it. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 39 In the Phasing dialog. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Demolished row. or you can use the demolish tool. select red. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. 36 Using the same method. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. under Floor Plans. select the line style. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. double-click Level 1 . Phasing Your Model | 887 . under Floor Plans.Existing. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. click the value for Color. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. click OK. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. select the interior walls one at a time. double-click Level 1 . You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. 42 In the Project Browser. select a lighter blue. under Cut ➤ Lines. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns.Demo. click (Demolish). its display changes to a red dashed line. As you click each wall. select Demolished.31 Under Phase Status. Next. 34 In the Color dialog. There are two ways to demolish an element. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. 35 Click OK twice.

for Phase Filter. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Wall.Demo. 52 Open Level 1 . select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. click Door. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. select Basic Wall: Interior . 46 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 53 Open Level 1 . and click OK.Existing. under Phasing. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 49 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84".4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 51 Add a door leading into each room. 888 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 47 In the Type Selector. 50 In the Type Selector.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Show Previous + New. The demolished walls no longer display. for Phase Filter. add a long horizontal wall. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions.

61 On the View Control Bar. All elements are displayed in this view. regardless of phase. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. which are displayed as red. new is shown in blue. because the phase filter is set to Show All. 57 In the Project Browser. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. right-click Level 1 . and existing shows as half-tone. 59 Open Level 1 . and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. click (Default 3D View). Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. Phasing Your Model | 889 . 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . 62 If necessary. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 60 On the View toolbar.New. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls.Demo. The renovated building model plan is displayed.New.

and click OK. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. demolition. define the units. click Project Units. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Open Level 1 .Existing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Open Level 1 . therefore. and new construction.Demo. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. you can see the new walls added to the building model. click Training Files. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. As the renovation process continues. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all). You can also see that the room quantities. All room boundaries are phase-specific. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly.rvt. you do not need to change the project units to metric. you can do so at this time. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. In this exercise. If you wish to save this file. the rooms change in both definition and size. 63 Close the file. Notice that this view is the original building model. expand Floor Plans. and locations change depending on the phase of the project.New. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. If you wish to do so. 890 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. and double-click Level 1 . In the next exercise. go to the Settings menu.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. In this view. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. In this view. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. sizes.

click Room Tag. yet they have different room numbers. 9 On the Design Bar. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner.Existing. and maximize the view. 10 Open Level 1 . click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Room. notice that there are two phases defined in this project.New.Demo. Use the following illustration as a guide. click Modify. 5 Click OK. click Room.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 891 . 13 Open Level 1 . click in each room as you move to the right. 6 Open Level 1 . 11 On the Design Bar. In the Phasing dialog. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide.

View phase-specific room schedules. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. 19 On the Window menu. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. click Close Hidden Windows. The two schedule views tile. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. In this case. expand Schedules/Quantities. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. In addition. click Tile.Existing. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. 17 On the Window menu.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. and double-click Room Schedule . you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. 892 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing .New Construction. 20 Close the file. In this exercise. 18 Open Room Schedule . room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. 16 In the Project Browser.

you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. In this tutorial. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. modify their visibility. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. and manage the links throughout the project. In these situations. performance. In the final lesson.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. You position the building models on the site plan. This maximizes efficiency. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. 893 . Comparison of alternatives on a site.

you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. You position the building models on the site. 894 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .Linking Building Models In this lesson. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes.Center to Center: Revit MEP places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit MEP 2009 to automatically place it. modify their visibility. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. One building model is a condominium. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. and the other is a townhouse. NOTE The center of a Revit MEP model is the center of the model geometry. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. You link two building models to the project.

click Training Files. Manual . and open Common\c_Site. right-click. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. this system is not exposed to the user. with write permission. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 911. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 8 Clear Read-only. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. RELATED See the lesson. Otherwise. however. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. and save the file there.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. ■ ■ Manual . c_Condo_Complex. click Open.rvt.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Select c_Site. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. this option will place the link at a predefined location. 2 On the File menu. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit MEP model. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. click Open. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. select the three files. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. and click Properties. Auto . navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. 4 On the File menu. click Save As. 5 On the File menu.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit MEP Files. c_Townhouse. All three files now reside. click Close. This option is grayed out. NOTE Revit MEP projects have an internal coordinate system. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. in the Model Linking folder that you created.■ Auto . you can do so. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 895 .

13 Click Open. 10 In the Project Browser. Notice the blue detail lines. 11 On the File menu.Origin to Origin. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. select Auto . 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. 896 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . expand Views (all). The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. For Positioning.■ Click Open. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.

15 On the Edit toolbar. 16 For the move start point. The Move command requires